ſ ºſſºs • ******* • • • • •∞ √≠ √∞*~*=~~~~sººs wºsº， e ers · · ·,≤ …！=* -aesºs-ºs--~~~ ~~~~， e e，-， ºs • ••• • • • • • •=> • <sºurºs， cº-~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~~~*~*~~~~ ~~~~ ~~~~<！-a， * ºººººº！！！--* * * * * * *2 s praes - ： *= * * * * ** ********** º ***， º* e ==--~< ^ • ºº ：:a exſº， º aeæ：æ æææ ：s - ， ， ， ！！！！！！ ** ***** • • • •****************ſºnº， praer;！º.
،aeº.- ：ſaeº： , „
（~~~~ ~~~~ ~~~~ ~~~~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ！, -，w y №. ~ ~ + · · ·• • • • Ann ：: ~~）;° •$nºw , * x = ** ** ** ** ***** ** ** **3 ， ， ， ， ** ** ***** º *. — **
• • • • • • • • ►ººve-， ezt * ， ， ， ， -， -s………….………！！！！--~~~~ wºasa aes •••••••• • • •~~~ ·
ſaeģſae
$$$$$
*****************

！ ,J. „_ /_ \ , i ） :： i : ' ' , ' '）'| * ,Țſ III·|-， -lº. Ji < j）
（~~~~ aeste essessº sees，sae·
MICHI,
ſr ----
|-----k -
: -------
، ، ، ، ، ، ، ، ،
* he li () he
y v ENºras .#
T 1: H.
LIBRARY
IVE
ſtºr-wÇſ）， TOETOETOE.
∞ √° ſ√≠√ìfy
. . . . . . . !! # | | | | | | | | | | | | |* * * * * · * *-_- - -1 … !! ！!
|--------~~~– ~---- - - - --- - ----- - - - - ~~--------------- ------- ----- ----- - -------- - - -








t
# *,
º,
*
t
* * **
a 3. #
t
• ‘ * ,
#
“ . .
<-.
§
*
Af
* º
*
*
%
* . . . .
** *** .
er














:-）*, ſ°，













--~~~ ~~~~:~~=++~~：：~~=+==~~~~）; cą
|-* · · · · *- - . '
* .·→





| [[lu
basket-ball able
FORREST C. ALLEN, D. O.
Director of the Division of Physical
Education and Athletics,
University of Kansas.
* , *;
- & • *,
• ‘.
:- tº
3 : * *,
Jº
g -
| & §
l 9 2 4
———-- ~~~~~~~<r.- . ~ : - - -
CopyRIGHT, 1924
: . . By
FoRREST C. ALLEN
SMITH-GRIEves Co.
PUBLISHERs
KANSAs CITY, Mo.
s
Qº,^.&S.º
Acknowledgments
Acknowledgment of Appreciation .
is made to
TUSTAN ACKERMAN, Captain-Elect 1925 Kan-
sas; Forward on Ever-Victorious Missouri
Valley Championship Team of 1923; Forward
on Missouri Valley Championship Team of
1924; All-Missouri Valley Forward of 1923-
1924; All-Western Center of 1924
to
WILFRED BELGARD, Guard on Missouri Valley
Championship Team of 1924
to
STANLEY LINDLEY of the University of Kansas
Basket-ball Squad of 1925
for their patient assistance in posing for the
fifty action halftones which illustrate this
book.
ALso
- warmest thanks are due
MR. JoHN BUNN, Assistant to the Director and
All-Freshmen Coach, University of Kansas,
for preparing diagrams, assisting in the prep-
aration of parts of the MS. and willingly of-
fering helpful advice and criticism at all times,
- and to -
MRs. ALLEN, who has labored patiently and un-
selfishly on the correlation and compilation
and has kept the writer at the work when it
otherwise might have been left unfinished.
V
TO MY MEN
WHEREVER THEY ARE
AND
TO THE MEMORY OF
THE GAMES THEY HAVE PLAYED.
Vi
The Silent Ones

“ToMMY” JoHNSON LOUIS DUPUIS
GEORGE McCUNE GEORGE HALE
DAN SETSER ToM SANDERs
-*-*
RoBERT CLORE—(Chateau Thierry)
RAY KARL–(St. Mihiel)
ROBERT HEIzER—(2nd Battle of the
- Marne)
EARLE TAYLOR-(Argonne Woods)
DAVID ADAMs—(Belleau Woods)
“Only Those Who Are
Fit to Live
Are Not Afraid to Die”
vii
Notice
For the purpose of clearness and expediency
in following the exposition in Chapter III on
Individual Defense, we have reprinted three
series of exhibits—E series, J series, and N.
series. In Chapter II these same series occur
and are discussed from the standpoint of in-
dividual offense; in Chapter III the discussion
is from the standpoint of the defense.
Scy. **d--
Ü) &Yºr'
15 - || 3 - 32.5"
|| 3 (2 | Contents
. PAGE
INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XXV
PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxi
CHAPTER I -
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES. . . 1
SPRAINS or SYNovITIS of Joints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Moist AND DRY HEAT For TREATMENT of
SPRAINS AND BRUISES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
TAPING AND Bandacing * * * * * * * e º e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
SPRAINs of THE FINGERs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Combination Wrist AND THUMB BANDAGES. . . . 22
BANDAGING SEVERE SPRAINs of WRIST . . . . . . . . . 24
CoMBINATIONS OF TRANSvERSE GLovE BANDAGE. 26
CANvAs GLovE WITH LEATHER BAck SUPPoRT. . 28
AcETATE DOPE CAST For HAND AND WRIST. . . . . 30
SPIRAL REVERSED BANDAGE FoR FoREARM AND
ARM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
FLEXIBLE COLLODION PATCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
TACKLE FootBALL OR LAME BASEBALL Shoulder 38
BATTERING-RAM Football. BANDAGE. . . . . . . . . . . 42
BANDAGE FoR PAINFUL or CRACKED RIB. . . . . . . 43
SURGICAL ADHESIVE STRIPs for CUT's Over EYE. 45
BANDAGING STONE BRUISE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
TAPING THE Foot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
TAPING AND BANDAGING—Continued PAGE
Figure of EIGHT ANKLE WRAP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
BASKET WEAve ANKLE BANDAGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Double SPIRAL THREE-QUARTER FIGURE OF
EIGHT KNEE BANDAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Acetate Dope Cast for Knee. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
REMoving ADHESIVE TAPE ExcEss. . . . . . . . . . . . 64
CAUTIONS IN TAPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
LUXATIONS OR DISLoCATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
CoNTUSIONs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
BURNS AND “STRAwBERRIES”. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
INFECTIONS AND LACERATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Specific MANIPULATIONs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
DEEP PREssure Upon BACK TO RELIEVE PAIN. . 73
MAssage For RELIEF of ConstipATION AND
STALENEss. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
METHOD of MANIPULATING ATACKLE SHOULDER 84
MANIPULATION TO CoRRECT A CHARLEY HoRSE. . 86
MANIPULATION of THE HIP Bon E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
“PULLED’’ TENDON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
STITCH IN MUSCLES OF ABDOMEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
ATHLETIC HEART. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . * * * * * * s e º e º is 93
EMERGENCIES. . . . . . . . . . . ... s is a tº e s s a e s is s is a s e s & e º 'º e 95
Acidity of the Stomach. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
CoNGESTION IN THE HEAD (CATARRH). . . . . . . . . . 95
CHILLs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
contRNTs xi
EMERGENCIEs—Continued - PAGE
. . TonsiLITIS, SORE THROATs, AND COLDs . . . . . . . . . 98
“Gym.” Itch or Jockey Strap Itch.... . . . . . . . . 100
INGROwn Toe NAILs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 101
HEMORRHOIDs (PILEs). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Hiccoughs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Tooth.ACHE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . … 104
EYE MURINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
CHAPTER II
PREPARATIONS FOR THE SEASON. . . . . . . . . . . . 106
THE GYMNASIUM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
ATHLETIC FIELD Hous Es.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
PortABLE BLEACHERs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
ENTERTAINMENT of PATRONs BETween HALves. 108
DEcoRATING THE GYMNASIUM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
THE Court. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
LIGHTING, HEATING AND VENTILATION. . . . . . . . . . . . 117
BACKBOARDs, BASKETs, BALL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Six REGULATION BASKETs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Two SPECIALLY ConstructED BASKETS For
CAROM SHOTs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
MEDIUM WEIGHT BALL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
ScoREBOARD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... 121
xii MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
- . . . . PAGE
ARRANGING THE SCHEDULE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
SCHEDULE COMMITTEE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
DouBLE ROUND ROBIN SCHEDULEs. . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
THE IDEAL SCHEDULE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 127
THE PLAYING SEAson. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
OFFICIALS AND OFFICIATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
REMUNERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
PERSONALITY OF THE OFFICIAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
THE UMPIRE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . … ... 136
THE REFEREE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
THE CoAch's DUTY to the REFEREE. . . . . . . . . . . 138
DUTIES OF THE REFEREE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
HINTS TO Officials................. - * * * * * is is ſº p 145
Equipment of PLAYERs. . . . . . … 146
PRACTICE AND CONDITIONING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Choosing THE MEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 171
CHAPTER III
INDIVIDUAL OFFENSE . . . . . . . . . ... • * * * * * * * . . . . . . 174
ZonING BACKBOARDS FOR SHOOTING PRACTICE. . . . . 175
METHOD For Teaching CoRRECT ARCH IN SHOOT-
ING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
THE TIP-off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
SHOTS AND PASSEs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
FREE THRow or UNDERHAND SHOT . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 .
PUSH ARCH or CHEST SHove SHOT... . . . . . . . . . . 190
CONTENTS xiii
Shots AND PAsses–Continued pace
UNDERHAND LOOP SHOT IN SCRIMMAGE . . . . . . . . . 194
ONE-HAND ENGLISH SHOT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
One-arm Over-shoulder Hook Pass.......... 200
ONE-ARM UNDERHAND PAss. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
ONE-HAND UNDERARM PASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
RECoverING A HELD BALL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
FUNDAMENTAL DRIBBLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
THE DRIBBLE IN PLAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
CHAPTER IV
INDIVIDUAL DEFENSE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
THEORY OF GUARDING... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
PRACTICE OF GUARDING... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
CoRRECT GUARDING STANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
INcoRRECT GUARDING STANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
BLOCKING or GUARDING THE Hook PAss. . . . . . .245
GUARD IN BAD Position To ExTRACT HELD
BALL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Guard Breaking Up Dribble................ 254
GUARDING A PIvoTING OFFENSE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
INCORRECT GUARDING OF PIvoTING OFFENSE. . . .268
Footwork IN REcovery of BALL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
- CHAPTER V
TEAM OFFENSE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
THEORY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
xiv - MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
PAGE
ForMAL OFFENSIVE PRACTICE DRILLs. . . . . . . . . . . . 284
OFFENSIVE DRILLS WITHOUT OPPosition . . . . . . . 285
OFFENSIVE DRILL WITH OPPosition. . . . . . . . . . . . 295
INFORMAL GAME DRILLs For TEACHING MASS
FUNDAMENTALs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
Twenty-ONE... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
100% GAME DRILL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
PEPPER-PASSING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . º 307
“You KNow ME, AL”. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
CRow AND CRANE... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
5 OR No Count GAME. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Hot Point or TRIPPLE-TIPPING GAME. . . . . . . . .313
MAss DRILL Work IN ExECUTING AND BREAKING
UP THE DRIBBLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
How To B R E A K TH RO U G H A SET F 1 v E-MAN
DEFENSE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
OFFENSIVE SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Floor PLAYS FROM REGULAR ScRIMMAGE. . . . . . . . . 327
CoMMON FOULS AT CENTER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
TIP-OFF PLAY FROM UNBALANCED ForMATION,
DIAGRAM 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
TIP-OFF PLAY FROM UNBALANCED ForMATION,
DIAGRAM 15... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
TANDEM LEFT X PLAY (TIP-OFF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Scissors FIGURE EIGHT PLAY (Tip-OFF). . . . . . . .338
GUARDs-UP PLAY (TIP-OFF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
CONTENTS XV
FLOOR PLAYS FROM REGULAR SCRIMMAGE–Cont. pace
PINCERS PLAY (OUT OF Bounds). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
OUT-OF Bound PLAY UNDER OPPONENTs’ BASKET. 349
OFFENSIVE Foul LINE PLAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
CHAPTER VI
TEAM DEFENSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Evolution of DEFENSIVE PLAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
OLD STYLE MAN-To-MAN DEFENSE. . . . . . . . . . . .357
THE FIVE-MAN ONE-LINE DEFENSE. . . . . . . . . . . .358
THE Two-MAN SET AND THREE-MAN SHIFTING
DEFENSE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
THE THREE-MAN SET AND Two-MAN SHIFTING
DEFENSE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
THE Four-MAN Box DEFENSE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
THE FIVE-MAN Two-LINE SET or MAss
DEFENSE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
VARIATIONS OF FIVE-MAN DEFENSE. . . . . . . . . . 368
(1) MAN-To-MAN TYPE OF FIVE-MAN
DEFENSE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
(2) Zone METHOD of FIVE-MAN DEFENSE. . .372
How TO TEACH A FIVE-MAN SET DEFENSE OR
ITS VARIATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
FALLING INTO DEFENSE AFTER Los ING THE
DEFENSE AFTER A SHOT FOR GOAL. . . . . . . . . . 381
DEFENSE WHEN OFFENSE IS PLAYING FOR
xvi MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
PAGE
SPECIAL DEFENSIVE SITUATIONs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
DEFENSE AT THE TIP-OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
THE SCISSORS DEFENSE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
THE FUNNEL DEFENSE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
THE TRAPEzoiDAL Box DEFENSE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
DEFENSE AFTER FREE THRow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
DEFENSE AFTER A HELD BALL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
DEFENSE on OUT OF Bound PLAYs . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
BALL OUT of Bounds Opposite Opponents'
GoAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
BALL OUT of Bounds UNDER OPPONENTs’
GoAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
BALL OUT of Bounds AT THE SIDE LINE IN
OPPoNENTs’ GoAL Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
How To BREAK UP A Rolling OFFENSE. . . . . . . . . . 410
CHAPTER VII
INSPIRATIONAL COACHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
BUILDING TRADITION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
GETTING CLOSE To YoUR MEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
GETTING CLOSE To YoUR TEAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
IN THE DREssING Rooms—JUST BEFor E THE
BATTLEs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Story of ONE GREAT GAME. . . . . . . … 430
OBLIGATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
PLATE
100
101-A
101-B
102–A
102–B
103-A
103–B
104-A
104-B
105-A
105-B
106
107
108
Photographic Plates
SHOWING BANDAGES AND
MANIPULATIONS
SPRAINS OF FINGERs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPRAINS OF THUMB, COMBINATION BANDAGE,
(VoIAR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPRAINS OF WRIST, CoMBINATION BANDAGE,
(DoRSAL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
WRIST BANDAGE (Vol.AR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
WRIST BANDAGE (DORSAL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
CoMBINATION TRANSVERSE GLovE BANDAGE
(DoRSAL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CoMBINATION TRANSVERSE GLovE BANDAGE
CANvAs GLovE WITH LEATHER BAck SUP-
PORT (ANTERIOR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CANvAs GLovE WITH LEATHER BACK SUP-
PORT (PostERIOR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AcETATE DoPE CAST For HAND AND WRIST
T A C K L E Foo T B A L L o R L AM E. BASEBALL
SHOULDER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
39
109-A
BATTERING-RAM FootBALL BANDAGE (VoIAR) 39
xvii
xviii
MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
PLATE
109–B
110
111
112
113–A
113–B
114-A
114-B
115-A
lis-B
115-C
115-D
116
117–A
117-B
118
119
120
121
122
- PAGE
BATTERING-RAM FootBALL BANDAGE (DoRSAL) 39
BANDAGE For PAINFUL or CRACKED RIB . . . . 39
SURGICAL STRIPs For CUT ABove the EYE. . . 39
BANDAGE For Stone BRUISE of HEEL. . . . . . . 49
TAPING THE Foot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
TAPING THE Foot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
FIGURE OF EIGHT ANKLE WRAP. . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
FIGURE OF EIGHT ANKLE WRAP. . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
BASKET WEAve ANKLE BANDAGE (METHOD
OF FIXATION). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
BASKET WEAve ANKLE BANDAGE (MEDIAL
VIEw). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
BASKET WEAve ANKLE BANDAGE (LATERAL
VIEw). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
BASKET WEAve ANKLE BANDAGE (AFTER Its
REMOVAL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
DoublE SPIRAL THREE-QUARTER FIGURE-
EIGHT BANDAGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
AcETATE Dope CAST For KNEE (LATERAL). 59
AcETATE DOPE CAST FOR KNEE (MEDIAL) . . 59
METHOD of RAISING DEPRESSED RIBs. . . . . . . 83
METHOD of MANIPULATING TACKLE SHOULDER 83
MANIPULATION FOR Correction of CHARLEY
HoRSE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
MANIPULATIO N FoR Co R RECT I o N OF A
WRENCHED BACK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
METHOD of ExERTING PREssure to RELIEVE
Diagrams
NUMBERS PAGE
KEY TO DIAGRAMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
1 Zoning THE BACKBOARDS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
2 AIR PATHS For HIGH ARCH SHOTs. . . . . . . . . . . 178
3 PRACTICE DRILL 1 (FORMAL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
4 Practice Drill 2 (FoRMAL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
5 PRACTICE DRILL 3 (FoRMAL). . . … . . . . . . 290
6 PRACTICE DRILL 4 (FoRMAL) … 292
7 PRACTICE DRILL 5 (FoRMAL). . . . . . . . . . . . . ‘. . .294
8 PRACTICE DRILL 6 (FoRMAL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
9 PRACTICE DRILL 7 (FoRMAL) • * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 297
10 PRACTICE DRILL 8 (FoRMAL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
11 100% GAME DRILL (INForMAL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
12 MAss DRILL WoRK IN ExEcutING DRIBBLE. . .317
13 How To BREAK THROUGH A SET FIVE-MAN
DEFENSE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
14 TIP-off PLAY FROM UNBALANCED ForMATION.331
15 TIP-off PLAY FROM UNBALANCED ForMATION.335
16 TANDEM LEFT X PLAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
17 ScissoRS FIGURE-EIGHT PLAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
18 GUARDs-UP PLAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
19 PINCERS PLAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
20 OFFENSIVE Foul LINE PLAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
21-A OLD STYLE SHIFTING MAN-To-MAN DEFENSE.356
21-B THE FIVE-MAN ONE-LINE DEFENSE. . . . . . . . . . 356
xix
XX MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
31
NUMBERS - - PAGE
21-C Two-MAN SET AND THREE-MAN SHIFTING
DEFENSE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • - - - - - - - 356
22-A THREE-MAN SET AND Two-MAN SHIFTING
DEFENSE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
22-B THE Four-MAN Box DEFENSE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
23 Five-Man Two-Line Set or Mass Defense.367
24 THE SCISSORS DEFENSE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
25 The FUNNEL DEFENSE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
26 THE TRAPEzoIDAL Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
27 Defense Arter Free Throw............... 397
28 DEFENSE AFTER HELD BALL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
29 DEFENSE on OUT of Bound PLAYs . . . . . . . . . . 407
30 OUT of Bounds At SIDE LINE IN OPPONENT’s
GoAL Zone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
How to BREAK UP A Rolling OFFENSE. . . . . . 413
Photographic Illustrations
SHOWING PLAYERS IN ACTION
EXHIBIT PAGE
After the final gun. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
S-1 Official in correct officiating attire. . . . . º 136
S-2 Referee standing in proper location to put a -
held ball near the side line into play. . . . . . . . 143
R-1 The tip-off. Jumper in air. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
C-1 Player balancing the ball. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
C-2 Player preparing for free throw shot. . . . . . . . . . 185
C-3 Player coming down for the shot. . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
C-4 Final step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
G-1 Push arch shot. Third step................. 190
G-2 Charging guard confronts player in the act of
making push arch shot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
G-3 Guard blocks underhand loop shot. . . . . . . . . . . . 195
G-4 Guard forces passer's hand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
O-1 Execution of one-hand english shot (first step). 198
O–2 One-hand english shot (final step). . . . . . . . . . . . 199
J-1 One-arm over-shoulder hook pass (first step). . . 201
J-2 Pass completed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
J-3 Passer and guard alighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
J-4 Showing passer in correct alighting position. . .204
A-1 One-arm underhand pass (initial step). . . . . . . . .206
A-2 A lower crouch (second movement). . . . . . . . . . . 207
xxi
xxii
MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
EXHIBIT PAGE
A-3 The follow-through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - - - - - - - - 209
A-4 The one-hand underarm pass. A time-saver...210
E-1 Players striving for possession of the ball. . . . . . 212
E-2 Forward loses sight of the ball. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
E-3 Forward pries guard loose. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
E-4 Pivoter in good dribbling position . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
M-1 Dribbler ready for first step in fundamental
dribbling (practice form) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
M-2 Player demonstrating second step in dribble
(practice form). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
M-3 Player demonstrating correct stop at end of
dribble. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
M-4 Player demonstrating incorrect stop at end of
dribble. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
N-1 Dribbler under way..................... . . . .225
N-2 Dribbler passes on guard’s left. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
N-3 Dribbler tries to go around guard. . . . . . . . . . . . .228
N-4 Dribbler plays for a back pass to trailer. . . . . . . 229
N-5 Dribbler tries to force his drive past the guard. .230
N-6 Pivoting dribbler succeeds in blocking guard off.231
N-7 Pivoter pulls away from guard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
N-8 Pivoter aids new dribbler by running interfer-
- CI1Ce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
H-1 Correct guarding stance. . . . . . . • * * * * * * * * * * * * & e 237
H-2 Correct position for lateral guarding. . . . . . . . . . 239
H-3 Guard in correct retreating position. . . . . . . . . . . 240
PHOTOGRAPHIC ILLUSTRATIONS xxiii
ExHIBIT PAGE
H-4 Guard in correct advancing stance... . . . . . . . . . 241
H-5 Guard blocking a feint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
H-6 Guard advancing in incorrect walking position. 244
J-1 (Guarding)
J-2 (Guarding)
J-3 (Guarding)
J-4 (Guarding)
E-1 (Guarding)
E-2 (Guarding)
E-3 (Guarding)
E-4 (Guarding)
N-1 (Guarding)
N-2 (Guarding)
N-3 (Guarding)
N-4 (Guarding)
N-5 (Guarding)
N-6 (Guarding)
N-7 (Guarding)
Guard advancing to block pass. . . . . 245
Guard rushes forward. . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Guard fails to block the pass. . . . . . . 247
Guard ready to meet offensive shift.248
Guard on right. Forward on left.
Guard trying" to extricate held
Guard in hard straits. . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Guard thrown in awkward position. 252
Guard to save the play must rush for
basket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Guard advancing to meet dribbler. .254
Guard drawn over too far. . . . . . . . . 255
Guard charging the ball. . . . . . . . . . . 256
Guard in versatile position tº e º & © tº e º º 257
Guard forces dribbler to pivot. . . . . . 259
Guard thrown into pocket. . . . . . . . . 260
Guard drawn away from direction of
- opponent's basket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
N-8 (Guarding) Guard must rely on speed and weight
to force the play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
K-1 Correct guarding of a pivoter. . … 264
K-2 Pivoter completes his shift. . . . . . . . . . . * - - - - - - - 267
xxiv.
MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
K-3
K-5
K-6
K-7
K-8
Incorrect guarding of a pivoter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guard aims to bat ball out of pivoter's hands. .
Guard committing a common foul. . . . . . . . . . . .
Guard after shifting drives forward. . . . . . . . . . .
Guard blocks progress of pivoter. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guard masters the play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INTRODUCTION
E. succeeding season adds an ever-in-
creasing contribution to the number of
enthusiastic followers of sports, who,
either through participation or attendance, find
recreation and entertainment in the rapidly grow-
ing game of basket-ball. The fact that this de-
velopment has become so widespread is sufficient
reason for one's seeking, at least, a general un-
derstanding of its fundamental features.
Whether the reader be an athlete, a coach, or
a spectator makes little difference. If he appre-
ciates physical contests and enjoys the human
side of athletics, Dr. Allen’s “My Basket-ball
Bible” will be interesting and instructive.
To many of the readers of this book, the
author will need but brief introduction. In the
first place, he has been a great player of the
game, having been named All-American Guard
while a member of the Kansas City Athletic
Club Teams of 1904 and 1905. As a player on
the Kansas Varsity, he showed his versatility by
playing forward, center, or guard and was
elected captain of the team of 1907. For seven-
teen years he has coached teams and has worked
as an official in basket-ball games. For the last
XXV
xxvi MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
four years he has officiated regularly in the
National A. A. U. Tournaments held in Conven-
tion Hall in Kansas City, Missouri. Such ex-
periences have enabled Dr. Allen to come into
contact with every phase of the subject of basket-
ball.
The author coached his first teams at Baker
University, Baldwin, Kansas. This School,
though comparatively small, met such teams as
the University of Nebraska, the University of
Missouri, Kansas State Agricultural College,
and the strongest college teams in Kansas, and
established a record of winning every game
played during the two years that Dr. Allen was
there with the exception of one, which was lost
to the University of Nebraska.
From Baker University, Dr. Allen went to the
Haskell Indian School at Lawrence, Kansas,
where he was Director of Athletics and Coach of
Basket-ball for one year. Besides winning the
National Aboriginal Championship in this year,
he was successful in carrying the Indian team
through a continuous five thousand mile playing
trip, meeting such teams as Detroit Athletic
Club, Kansas City Athletic Club, Missouri Ath-
letic Club of St. Louis, Michigan Agricultural
College, Wabash College, and other noted teams
INTRODUCTION xxvii
in Illinois, Ohio, Indiana, Kansas, Missouri,
Minnesota, and Kentucky. Fighting through a
schedule of twenty-four games in twenty-five
playing nights, his Indian five were victorious in
nineteen of the twenty-four games played.
During the seasons of 1908 and 1909, he held
the position of Head Coach of Basket-ball at the
University of Kansas. While coaching at this
school in these two years, his teams captured
the Missouri Valley Championship honors both
times.
For seven years Dr. Allen was Director of
Athletics and Coach of all sports at Missouri
State Teachers College, Warrensburg, Missouri.
In the first year there, he coached undefeated
teams in the three major sports—football,
basket-ball, and baseball—his football team hav-
ing turned back every conference opponent
scoreless. The basket-ball teams won consecu-
tive championships throughout the entire seven
years and in addition defeated many reputable
teams outside the conference.
In 1919, Dr. Allen returned to the University
of Kansas, as Director of Athletics. In this year,
basket-ball prospects at Kansas hit the bottom.
After the first scheduled game of the season was
played, Dr. Allen was asked to take the team
xxviii MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
and to see it through the season. Fully aware
of the seriousness of his task, he took the team
and finished third in the Missouri Valley Con-
ference race of 1920. Since that time he has
continued with the basket-ball teams at Kan-
sas and has built up a system that ranks well
with any basket-ball system in the United States.
In 1921 Kansas again finished third in the Val-
ley race; in 1922, tied championship with Mis-
souri; in 1923, ever-victorious championship; in
1924, conference champions with only one de-
feat. During the three years of 1922-23-24, Dr.
Allen's Kansas teams have won forty-nine out
of fifty-one conference games played and have
run up a record of thirty-four straight victories
before being halted.
Dr. Allen has gained national recognition as a
trainer of athletes and as a specialist in the treat-
ment of athletic injuries. Big league baseball
players and noted athletes in all branches of
sports have directed their steps to Dr. Allen's
door. So generally has his skill become known
that journalists have called him “The Miracle
Man” and “The Second Bonesetter Reese.”
Recently Dr. Allen was appointed head of the
consolidated Physical Education Program at the
University of Kansas. He is introducing in the
INTRODUCTION xxix
University a plan whereby each student will
participate in his own chosen sport. Now the
play slogan at Kansas is “A Game for Every
Student.” -
Although such schools as the Oregon Agricul-
tural College, the University of Illinois, and the
United States Military Academy at West Point
have sought him, Dr. Allen has preferred to re-
main in Missouri Valley circles and to build up
a physical education program at Kansas that will
fulfil his dream of physical development for
every student through a favorite sport.
The fundamental secret of Dr. Allen's basket-
all success seems to lie in an unusual ability to
work with his men as though he were one of
them. Dr. Allen's teachings are based on the
belief that no team (matter it not how individual-
ly skillful the players or how thoroughly organ-
ized the playing unit) can succeed consistently
without group morale and a will to drive to the
end. His men know him as a player on psychic
chords; and his technique as a technique with a
soul. His powerful personality has won for him
the distinction, among many, as being the
greatest inspirational coach in the country.
Backed by seventeen years of coaching ex-
perience with fifteen championships, Dr. Allen
XXX MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
speaks with authority in the chapters on “In-
dividual Offense,” “Individual Defense,” “Team
Offense,” and “Team Defense”; having had a
wide experience in handling injured athletes, he
knows the treatment of “Athletic Injuries”; re-
lying largely upon mental stimulation in the
training of his own teams, he has earned the
right to add an innovation in “Inspirational
Coaching.” With such a background “My
Basket-ball Bible” occupies an important place
in the literature of sports. -
PAUL ENDACOTT,
g Captain of the University of Kansas
Basket-ball Team of 1023.
+--——
|
*
PREFACE
Firm in the belief that the building of men is
cqually as important as the building of machines,
I am leaving this book with basket-ball coaches
and with players who expect to become coaches,
for their perusal and for their meditation.
If a man is honest in his convictions, out of
his years of ea periences, there must be gleanings
that will aid some one else.
This is the spirit that has prompted me to
give to the basket-ball world, which has given
to me throughout these years a means of liveli-
hood, my contribution.
- Forrest C. Allen
University of Kansas
Lawrence
xxxi
CHAPTER I
Athletic Injuries and Emergencies
The Team Physician—Every athletic team
should have a team physician. Regardless of
whether or not the coach or the trainer is a
physician, every team in its major injuries
should be treated by an outstanding physician
of the town. Such a physician would be too busy
to care for the details of training, such as taping
and minor injuries; but he should be called upon
for help in critical emergencies, or in cases
where there is room for doubt in the diagnosis.
However, there is one exception to the team-
physician plan. In cases of probable gravity, if
the ill or injured athlete has a preference for
the medical attentions of some town physician
other than the one who administers to the team,
the coach should see to it that this preference is
gratified.
In the handling of dislocations, severe con-
tusions and suspected fractures, the trainer or
the coach should report these, at once, to the
team physician or to the physician for whom the
injured man expresses a preference. Let us
say here for the benefit of coaches, trainers, and
players, that all bad sprains should be treated as
fractures until those in charge are otherwise
assured. The use of the X-rays has become so
trustworthy an authority in such troubles that
2 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
we think of it as a first aid. Indeed, it is the
first aid in determining the proper line of treat-
ment to pursue. Sometimes the cracking or
the chipping of a bone is so minute that only
the X-rays will show it.
The team trainer, even though he is a licensed
physician should make no attempt to overstep
his position. Due to the fact that his field of
experiences in his profession is limited to the
care of athletes, he can not be so proficient a
diagnostician as is the practicing physician
whose scope of experiences is wide. The player,
backed by such confidence in the medical atten-
tion that he will be able to secure, will smash
into the game with greater self-abandonment,
because he is reliably assured that he will have
the best of care, should injury come to him.
The Team Trainer and His Twofold Respon-
sibility—The coach is the logical man to care
for the injuries of his team provided he is
mentally and physically equipped for the versa-
tility and strenuousness that such a combined
job implies. If a coach is not qualified to act
as trainer for his teams, he should become so.
However, a man handling the combined responsi-
bilities of trainer and coach must be a human
dynamo. Also, he must be sanguine, tranquil
yet forceful, and clean. He must not know
weariness and must be so steeped in his work
that he will forget to save himself.
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 3
But a trainer when administering treatment
for athletic injuries and emergencies must have
more than a tranquil conscience and a clean
personality. His duty as a trainer exacts from
him a knowledge of the “finger tip” type; that
is, information which has been stored away, yet
can be recalled to meet any emergency at a
moment's notice. The successful trainer must
possess an accurate working knowledge of
anatomy, physiology, and psychology. He
should be able to see both the visible and the
invisible in the player’s life. He should so
administer to the physical needs of his athletes
that he can aid them in functioning as a part of
a 100 per cent team machine; and he should
so administer to their psychical needs that he
will be able to see a steady mental and moral
progression instead of retrogression. For no
small part of a trainer’s satisfaction lies in his
ability to see in the lives of his athletes a
gradual unfolding of the spirit of true gentle-
111611.
The coach who is his own trainer can utilize
the time that he spends working with his men
to implant constructive suggestions in willing
and plastic minds. It is during such times of
friendly intimacies that the morale of winning
combinations can be established. . The trainer,
while working over the athletes, taping and
bandaging them, and administering in other
4 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
ways, can get close to them in their confidential
moods; and, as a result, he will find many naive
and ingenuous opportunities to build moral
courage in his men. While he is treating the
players' physical disabilities, a trainer who is
serious in his profession can also treat their
mental and moral lethargies. -
A trainer should consider the mental lives
of his charges in a system of causes and effects,
and should at all times display whole-hearted
sympathies and interests in their attendant hopes
and fears. A real trainer should be equipped to
study his players constructively in their many
reactions of mental flow. He should be able
to determine whether the emotions and judg-
ments of some misguided player are the results
of hereditary disposition or of suggestion; and
with this decision weighed, he, guided by judg-
ments which are the combined outgrowth of his
training and his past experiences, should be
able to pursue the wisest course of action. -
The more of this form of psychotherapy that
the trainer applies, the more valuable to his
team he will be. And the more interested the
trainer is in shaping the driving physical force
of his men, the more keen will become his
interest in them for their own sake.
Trainer Must Ask Questions—A high-grade
athlete will seldom bother the trainer with his
own ills. The trainer will be forced to draw
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 5
him out. The athlete will be thinking more
of the injuries of team mates and will, unless
watched, overlook some minor ill or injury of
his own—often an ailment that might become
aggravated with delay and cause trouble for the
rest of the season. Therefore, a trainer must
be a veritable “quiz box.” He must continuous-
ly inquire about physical imperfections during
the entire season with such questions as:
“Let me look at that leg, Charlie?”
“Bob, how is that shoulder of yours? Let's
take a look at it anyway. We want to see how
it is progressing.” -
“Bill, are you exercising that “bum' ankle?
Use the heel and toe exercises regularly every
morning and night to build up that weak arch
and strengthen the ankle.”
Questions and directions constantly and un-
ceasingly, much after the manner of a mother
who is protecting her children from injury, is
the order of the day and the order of the season
for the trainer who meets with success. Such
individual questions and directions will accom-
plish two things and probably much more. First,
they will aid the trainer in finding the player's
physical weaknesses, thus giving him an oppor-
tunity to improve the athlete’s condition. Second,
they will help the trainer to find the athlete's
strong points, and thus aid the trainer in re-
taining the athlete's interest and loyalty. This
6 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
is a recognized asset to the trainer’s balance
sheet when the season is through.
In the following paragraphic discussions, only
the problems of taping, bandaging, manipula-
tions, and emergencies that the coach and trainer
will meet with most frequently, will be taken up.
Each accompanying plate is from a photograph
of the bandage in actual service.
SPRAINS OR SYNOWITIS OF JOINTS
Webster defines, quite in a general way, a
sprain as an “inflammation of a synovial mem-
brane, usually accompanied with pain and
swelling of the joint.” -
Dorland says that a sprain is “the wrenching
of a joint with partial rupture or other injury
of its attachments, and without luxation of
bones.”
†Moullin, on sprains, has this to say: “Gen-
erally speaking, the tissues on one side of a joint
are overstretched and torn; those on the other
compressed and crushed together; but there is
always so much twisting, and such a difference
in the strength and power of resistance of
various structures, that unless the part is ex-
amined with the greatest care it is almost im-
possible to say what actually has given way.”
For the limited discussion that we shall be
forced to give, here, it is enough to think of a
sprain as a temporary displacement followed,
fMoullin’s Monograph on Sprains.
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 7
immediately, by a return to place, with a rapid
swelling of the parts involved.
Hemorrhage of the blood vascular and lym-
phatic walls due to torn vessels is the primal
cause of the immediate swelling of the parts
after a sprain. This extravasation of the blood
and lymph not only is present in the surrounding
tissues but extends to the synovial wall and
cavity as well. With prolonged rest, the joint
will soon become immobile, the mass will be-
come organized, and the result will be much
discomfort and pain. Unless a sprain can be
examined soon after the injury, due to the
swelling of the affected parts, it will be difficult
to determine accurately just what damage has
been done. As stated previously, when in doubt
as to the structural disturbance, treat the injury
as a fracture until a radiographic examination
has been made. 4.
The function of the muscles and the ligaments
is not only to hold the bones in place, but also
to assist in the production of motion or the
exertion of physical force. Either the muscles,
the ligaments, or both, may be involved in
sprains to a greater or lesser degree. If the
ligaments should be the more seriously involved,
the healing will be slower than the healing of
a torn muscle, as the ligaments receive a lesser
blood supply than the muscles.
8 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Coaches and trainers are probably more often
called upon to treat sprains and consequently to
restore function to the parts involved in sprains
than to administer to any other athletic injury.
For this reason, the treatment and bandaging
of sprains has been dealt with at greater length
than has any other injury.
First Step in Treatment of Sprains—After
thoroughly examining a sprain, carefully adjust
any soft tissues that have been displaced. Relax
all contractions by a light massage, using pas-
sive movements in order to reduce and to com-
bat hemorrhage and swelling. Take extreme
care to see that there are no displaced cartilages,
ligaments, tendons, or muscles. Be very careful
in these manipulations not to pommel the in-
volved area. ,
After this preliminary examination, the appli-
cation of an ice bag is a good practical treat-
ment. Or cold water constantly poured over
the involved area for about twenty or thirty
minutes will accomplish about the same result.
When the skin commences to dull and blanch,
the maximum benefit from the cold applications
has been secured. Now extreme heat should be
applied for about the same period of time.
This applied heat will relax the muscles so that
a better circulation will follow. After the lapse
of another thirty minutes in which the heat has
been applied, use cold and heat, alternately, for
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 9
shorter periods of time to serve as a douche for
tonic effect. This alternate application of heat
and cold is only temporary and should not be
continued excessively, else an opposite effect
will ensue.
Bandaging—Second Step in Treatment of
Sprains—After the execution of these prelimi-
naries, bandaging the sprain is the next step in
the treatment. Always apply the bandage from
the extremity toward the trunk and always be
sure that an even pressure is being secured.
Unless the latter point is observed, the bandage
will not give the desired service to the weakened
part.
Almost a score of the various devices and
schemes for specific bandaging of strains,
sprains, and stretched tendons are taken up in
this chapter under marginal topics which will
indicate the photographic plate designating the
particular bandage. This outlined discussion
of bandaging is considered at this particular
time only to indicate that bandaging is the
second step to pursue in the treatment of
sprains. Sprains of the toes, sprains of the
ankles, sprains of the knee, sprains of the wrist,
sprains of the hand and of the fingers will each
be treated separately under the heading of
“Taping and Bandaging,” after the third and
fourth steps in the treatment of sprains have
been outlined and discussed. This plan has been
10 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
adopted for the discussion of sprains in order
to avoid a break in the continuity of the various
steps of the treatment of such injuries.
Activity–Third Step in the Treatment of
Sprains—Do not rest an injured joint too long.
The function of a joint is movement. If a
healthy joint is immobolized for a prolonged
period, rigidity and stiffness will occur. Passive
movements should be used from the second day
of the date of the injury until the injured player
can execute active movement without pain.
†Mumford says, “Immobilization for more
than a few days, as under the old methods, is
objectionable, because adhesions are apt to form,
thus causing impairment of function.”
*While Holder Sneve in the “Journal of the
American Medical Association” states that,
“Immobilization of muscles is not rest. On the
contrary, in all sprains the muscles should have
passive exercise during the first few hours and
days and active exercise after that. In the
majority of cases active exercise should be in-
stituted from the beginning. The plaster cast
should not be used at all, even in cases where we
have a fracture unless it be impossible to main-
tain a proper position of the joint.”
#Moullin has the following to say in his chap-
ter on “Manipulation and Massage,” “To carry
iReference Handbook of Medical Sciences—reference to Mumford.
*Journal of American Medical Association, June 1, 1901.
£Monograph on Sprains, Moullin.
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 11.
manipulation out effectively two things are
needed beyond all others. The one is a sense of
touch so delicate that it can appreciate the least
resistance or irregularity of movement; the
other an accurate knowledge, not merely of the
ordinary anatomy of the part but of the differ-
ent degrees of tension that fall on the ligaments
in every position of the limb. Each joint re-
quires a different kind of manipulation accord-
ing to its construction. There should be no
jerking. The movements must be vigorous and
forcible, but perfectly smooth; and they must be
carried out thoroughly, the joint being moved to
its full extent in all directions that are natural
to it. Each kind of action should be combined
successively with the rest, one by one, so that
the tension may fall in turn upon all the differ-
ent parts of the capsule of the joint. Recent
slight adhesions give way at once without a
sound though the sensation is generally con-
veyed to the hand. When they are older the
noise may be as loud and clear as when a bone
is broken.” -
Massage of Sprains—Fourth Step in Treat-
ment of Sprains—So conclusive is Moullin
upon this subject of massage that he is being
quoted from the same text to express what the
writer, as a trainer, has found to be true. “Mas-
sage in the strict sense of the term is a great deal
more efficacious than manipulation, especially
12 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
with older sprains. Its action is not limited to the
skin and superficial structures. These undergo
immense changes, it is true; they become softer
and finer while under manipulation; their
strength and elasticity increase, the extreme
tenderness diminishes, and the natural appear-
ance and texture return. The surface loses its
dry, harsh character and becomes warm and
moist again; the livid bluish color gives way
to a brighter hue, and the deeper layers of
fibrous tissue yield and stretch so that the hide-
bound shrunken condition that is often present
after long disuse gradually passes off. But the
good effect is not by any means limited to, or
even most conspicuously shown by this. When
properly carried out, massage exerts a simul-
taneous influence on muscles, nerves and vessels;
in fact, on all the tissues within its reach.
“The circulation is the first thing to feel its
power. It has already been explained how,
after prolonged rest, the blood, as it were, lies
almost stagnant in the tissues, slowly circulat-
ing through them, and neither giving them suf-
ficient for their nutrition, nor removing from
them the waste products of their action. This
is changed at once. The life of the part is
quickened. The veins and absorbents are
emptied first, and the fluid they contain driven
out into the heart, which fills more rapidly, and
contracts more vigorously and firmly. Then
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 13
the pressure falls in the smaller vessels, and
the tiny irregular spaces, full of lymph, which
extend in all directions through the tissues.
These, in their turn, are compressed and
mechanically emptied, their contents being
driven on into the empty vessels, from which
any backward flow is prevented by the valves.
The circulation becomes more rapid; nutrition
is carried on with greater energy, and the actual
amount of the blood in the tissues at any one
time so much increased that they become full
and soft to the touch and regain the even and
rounded contour of active health.
“It is most essential to commence as gradual-
ly and as gently as possible, only working on *
the deeper tissues after the more superficial ones
have become thoroughly accustomed, and have
been unloaded of their surplus fluid. The skin,
the soft subcutaneous tissue, the muscles, and
the deeper layers, must all be worked in turn.
Nor should the manipulation be confined to the
injured part. In a sprain of any standing,
the whole of the limb is affected more or less.
It is usually better to devote attention first to
the parts nearer the trunk than to deal with
those around the injured area, and only after-
ward when the circulation is thoroughly re-
established, to manipulate the joint itself.
“The tendency is to make the sittings last too
long. Deep manipulation itself rarely requires
14 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
more than five minutes; but in dealing with a
recent injury, it may be advisable to spend a
longer time than this over the friction and
other preparatory measures, so that a quarter of
an hour Soon passes by. When the tenderness
is very great, and the amount of swelling ex-
cessive, much longer than this may be neces-
sary; but short, frequently repeated sittings are
of greater benefit than one long one. A skillful
operator, too, will often effect more in a few
minutes than an ordinary rubber will in as
many sittings.” •
MOIST AND DRY HEAT FOR TREATMENT OF SPRAINS
+ AND BRUISES
Moist Heat—In the treatment of sprains,
bruises, and contusions of all sorts, heat is in-
dicated. Moist heat if properly applied, is very
effective as a therapeutic agent. When used in
a baking machine and under proper care, it is
invaluable for the athlete's injuries. But moist
heat applied under improper conditions is beset
with disadvantages. Especially is it difficult to
use during the night, unless the athlete is under
the care of a special nurse who will see that
the danger of too rapid cooling and chilling of
the body is eliminated.
Moist heat is not effective unless it is in-
tense heat. Medium hot towels accomplish lit-
tle, if any, good. Intense heat is a deep heat
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 15
and is, therefore, effective in the treatment of
deep bruises and sprains. -
During the injured player's waking hours,
you can apply hot fomentations of boric acid
(saturated solution) and alcohol (equal parts)
to the affected areas with good results. This
solution should be applied hot on Turkish towels,
which should be kept as hot as the skin will
stand. Three Turkish towels will be needed
for the applications in order to make the
alternations successful. Leave the first towel
on during the entire baking process, but alternate
the second and third towel by forking each
one out of the near-boiling liquid and apply-
ing it while it is still as hot as your hands
can stand. Over these fomentations, keep a dry
woolen blanket so that the heat will be held
within. These baking processes should last
one hour at a time and should always be fol-
lowed with an alcohol rub so as to close the
opened pores. It is also well to apply Athletic
Liniment copiously over the tender area after
the baking, as this will relieve the soreness of
the injury by quieting the sensory nerves.
Also, either Campho-Phénique (liquid) or
Anagelsic Balm may be used as alternates when
one or the other non-irritants loses its effect.
Dry Heat—On account of the disadvantage
caused by the too great radiation of the skin
under moist heat applications and the consequent
16 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
risks of congestion incurred therefrom, also on
account of the inconvenience attached to the
application of moist heat, dry heat has become
the trainer's friend.
The common incandescent light bulb, the elec-
tric heating pad, and the therapeutic lamp are
all dry heat agents that the athlete can adminis-
ter to himself with gratifying results. The only
inconvenience that might be incurred by the
use of dry heat would be a too complete drying
of the tissues of the skin. This could happen
only from a too prolonged use of dry heating
methods and without any diversity of moist
heat whatsoever. The use of hot fomentations
during the day and dry heat at night makes
an ideal baking schedule for the athlete, when
such treatment is indicated. Olive oil rubs will
overcome any excessive dryness of the tissues
from the intense dry heating.
In fact, dry heat has practically all of the
advantages of moist heat in the treatment of
athletic injuries, with none of the disadvantages.
The use of an electric heating pad is indicated
in almost all sprains and bruises. Such pads
are flexible and can be bound around the joint
or other affected area of an extremity and can
be left there during the sleeping hours. The
heat can be so regulated that an even and com-
fortable temperature can be maintained.
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 17
Even the use of an incandescent light bulb
is splendid if the athlete uses it while he is
awake and can so guard the light that there is
no danger of fire. However, it would not be
advisable to use such a heating agency after
going to bed as the hazard taken with fire
would not justify its use.
Therapeutic Lamp—A large sized aluminum
bell-shaped therapeutic lamp with a five hun-
dred candle power globe is a valuable dry heat
agent to use in the dressing rooms. The heat
rays from such a lamp will penetrate from one-
sixteenth to one-half an inch, owing to the ef-
fectiveness of the lamp.
There is little danger of blistering the skin
by the use of such a lamp. When the tissues of
the skin get excessively warm, stroke the heated
area gently with the hand. This stroking of
the skin will so diffuse the capillary circulation
that for the time being, the uncomfortable sen-
sation to the skin will be lessened.
For a Charley horse, weak knees, or strained
shoulders, this therapeutic lamp is indicated. By
using this lamp before a massage or a manipu-
lation is attempted, you will get the deeper struc-,
tures well relaxed. All massage should be
around and away from the part and never di-
rectly over it. Massaging the bruise itself will
only tend to aggravate it.
18 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
TAPING AND BANDAGING
The trainer who desires to use adhesive tape
efficaciously should know where to find the
ligamentous attachments to the bones. Every
trainer should know the origin and insertion of
the principal muscles as well as their nerve and
blood supplies. Such knowledge is not difficult
to acquire if a trainer is concerned enough about
improving his art to give as much as an hour
each evening to the study of anatomy. He should
also know the spinal divisions clearly enough to
manipulate artfully for aid in the correction of
athletic injuries and emergencies. In sprains
and other emergencies, adhesive tape is the
trainer-coach’s best friend. Practically every
injury, with the exception of a fracture, can be
taken care of by the artful and intelligent ap-
plication of tape.
Adhesive tape should be administered with the
thought that, on account of the ligaments being
weakened by the sprain, the tape must aid in
the functioning of the impaired tissues. -
Positively discourage the excessive use of
adhesive tape and other bandaging. Try to es-
tablish a standard that the best athletes are
those that require the least attention. We, as
coaches, are not training prima donnas but are
trying to develop fighting men, with courageous
hearts. Men with nerve who will not whine
when they are hurt.
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 19
Some athletes wear tape bandages for decora-
tions. But these men who are constantly en-
cased in plasters or supports are ordinarily the
“grand stand or alibi” type of athletes. San-
guinary and determined temperaments are the
ones needed on real teams.
In the following directions on bandaging, an
attempt has been made to show only the most
important uses of adhesive taping in athletic
sprains and other injuries.
BANDAGING SPRAINS OF THE FINGERS
Sprains of the fingers are probably the most
common of the athlete's injuries. The thumb,
the ring, and the index fingers are the members
usually involved. -
When a finger is sprained, tape the shorter
injured member to the longer approximate un-
injured one. In the case of a sprain to the
middle finger, tape it to the index finger, which
is not so long as the middle finger itself; but, on
account of the more compatible attachments of
the flexor tendons of these two fingers, this con-
nection gives more freedom of movement than
if the taping were made to the ring finger, its
other neighbor. -
This plan of taping the shorter injured digit
to the longer uninjured one gives full protection
to the weaker digit. If the little finger is
sprained, bandage it to the ring finger. If either
Plate
100.
20 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
the ring or index fingers are sprained, bandage
to the middle finger.
The Bandage—Use thin narrow strips of ad-
hesive tape, not more than one-fourth inch wide
and four and one-half inches long, to bandage
the sprained finger. By using this narrow
bandaging tape, you will not restrict the full
freedom of the joints. Usually, it is better to
tape in a simple circular fashion as shown in
Plate 100; but occasionally it will be expedient
to tape one of the injured fingers spirally to
aid the injured capsular or collateral ligaments
of the joint. After either style of taping, the
finger should be strapped circularly to its fellow
by a thin strip of adhesive tape. In Plate 100
the circular strapping has been effected on the
middle and index fingers, and the spiral strapping
on the ring finger.
No taping should be so tight as to interfere
with the blood supply or with the mobility of
the joint, beyond a restriction that is consistent
with full protection of the member.
By referring to fspalteholz's Anatomy, you
will get so clear a discussion upon the liga-
mentous attachments of the metacarpal bones
and the phalanges that you can readily see why
such taping of the digits as outlined above is
expedient. Space forbids such a complete dis-
cussion here. -
initiand Atlas of Human Anatomy, Werner Spalteholz, Vol. I, Page
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 21
Plate 100, Sprains of Fingers.
Plates 101-A, 101-B, Combination Wrist and Thumb Bandages.
Plates 102-A, 102-B, Bandages for Severe Sprains of the Wrist.
Plates 103-A, 103-B, Combination of Transverse Glove Bandage.
Plates 104-A, 104-B, Canvas Glove with Leather Back Support.

22 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Plates
101-A
10|-B
COMBINATION WRIST AND THUMB BANDAGES
Basket Weave
Sprains of the Thumb–Beginning at the in-
side surface of the thumb joint, use three-eighth
inch strips of adhesive tape in a basket weave
around the thumb, ending in a swing back on
the hand and around the wrist, as shown in
Plate 101-A.
Overlap each strip of adhesive tape used in
the basket weave about one-third of its width.
It is much better to start the bandaging with
short strips, beginning each one on the inside
surface of the thumb and then swinging back
and forth around the thumb as shown in Plate
101-A, than it is to take a longer piece of tape
and endeavor to bring this long piece around the
thumb each time in a figure of eight. Such an
attempted figure of eight will cause the tape to
roll up on the inside of the thumb and thus
necessitate an awkward and clumsy movement
when the thumb is in action.
When the bandage is finished, place a short
piece of adhesive tape over the starting point
of the bandage. This additional strip will secure
the bandage and will also protect it from being
loosened around the thumb joint by water when
the hand is washed.
Secure the ends that were extended around
the wrist with a two-inch circular adhesive tape
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 23
wrist bandage, which will be taken up in the
continuation of this combination, Plate 101-B.
Should the fleshy part of the thumb have
been bruised when the thumb was sprained,
swing additional strips of tape out over the
palmer surface of the thumb and draw them
back around the wrist, where the ends of these
additional strips should be entirely covered by
the wrist bandage.
Sprains of the Wrist—Often the wrist is
sprained conjointly with the thumb. Whether
the wrist is involved in the injury or not, the
basket weave thumb bandage works most satis-
factorily with its combination wrist bandage to
act as a Support. 1
This wrist bandage supports the anterior and
posterior ligaments of the wrist when there is
injury, as well as fixes the thumb bandage
and keeps it from giving way. -
Before applying the wide strip of tape to the
wrist, place a cigarette roll of cotton on the
front of the wrist between the two bones of the
forearm. This is done to insure an adequate
return circulation of the blood. Then apply
the bandage proper, using a strip of tape from
two to two and one-half inches wide. The ends
of this wide strip should overlap at least three
inches.
After the bandage is set, bind two narrow
strips of tape, each one-half inch wide, around
24 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Plates
102-A
102-B
the edges of the bandage to reinforce it and
to keep it intact when the bandage comes into
contact with soap and water. This is an es-
pecially good bandage for football and basket-
ball injuries of the wrist.
BANDAGING SEVERE SPRAINS OF THE WRIST
In a severe sprain of the wrist, there is a
strain of the annular ligaments across the volar
(front) surface of the wrist and a wrenching
of the dorsal carpal ligament. These two liga-
ments give great support to the flexor and ex-
tensor tendons of the forearm. By firmly en-
circling the left wrist with the thumb and finger
of your right hand, you can easily see from the
support that you give the wrist, how much, a
firm brace, artfully applied, will strengthen this
area when it is weakened by a sprain.
The Method: The main features of this
wrist bandage are similar in detail to the wrist
bandage previously discussed in the combina-
tion bandage, except that the other bandage, un-
less in cases of severe sprain, need not be so
carefully applied. In many instances, it will
act only as a support for the thumb bandage.
But this bandage under discussion is for severe
sprains of the wrist.
In this bandage, as in the previous one, use
the cotton cigarette roll between the radius and
the ulna on the volar surface of the wrist. Fit
this roll snugly between the tendons of the
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 25
flexor carpi radialis and the palmaris longus
muscles (muscles of the forearm and hand) to
safely insure the return blood circulation to the
heart. .
Use for this bandage a strip of adhesive tape,
varying in width (according to the size of the
wrist) from two to two and one-half inches,
and in length (varying for the same reason)
from ten inches to one foot.
Lap one end of the bandage over the cigar-
ette roll—about one inch past the center of the
wrist. Hold this loose end in place with your
thumb and index finger while you draw the
bandage very firmly around the wrist.
Just before completing the circuit of the
tape around the wrist, press downward and for-
ward with your thumb on the tightening
bandage in the direction in which the tape is
being applied. This sets the bandage and makes
it fit more snugly.
Bring the bandage down on the wrist as close
to the hand as is possible without interfering
with the flexion and the extension of the wrist
joint.
Even if the wrist is covered with hairs, never
place gauze under this bandage. It is well to
shave the wrist before bandaging, but many
situations arise for which this bandage is indi-
cated and in which there is no opportunity to
previously prepare the wrist for the bandage.
26 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Plates
103-A
103-B
The advantage of attaching the tape directly
to the skin is that this method sets up a natural
massage which assists in restoring normal func-
tion to the wrist. The skin, by the application
of the adhesive tape, is fixed. With every move-
ment of the wrist, its muscles ply beneath the
skin; hence, a continued natural massage to
the injured wrist results. -
Tape should always be applied to joints with
the thought of making an adhesive brace serve
as a substitute for torn ligaments and tendons.
If the sprain is very severe, you can further
strengthen the wrist by applying additional ad-
hesive bands to the bandage already set. These
added strips should be about one-half inch wide
and eight or ten inches long. Continue to draw
these around the wrist until you have the brace
as tight as you desire.
If the hairs of the wrist should pull at the
edges of the bandage after it is set, run a blunt
instrument around and break them off, so that
there will be no discomfort to the player in his
wrist movements.
COMBINATIONS OF TRANSWERSE GlovE BANDAGE
This bandage can be used when there is a
sprain of the thumb, wrist, or transverse arch
of the hand. It has a threefold advantage when
properly applied. It allows full freedom of
movement of the hand, serves as a splendid pro-
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 27
tection against further injury, and gives added
strength many times when it would otherwise
be impossible to pit the hand against resistance.
This bandage is especially helpful when the
metacarpal bones of the hand and tissues sur-
rounding them have been strained or sprained.
The hand technique of the basket-ball player is
not handicapped in the least when this bandage
is used. -
The Bandage: Wrap a strip of adhesive tape
one and one-half inches wide and twelve inches
long firmly around the palmer (front) and
dorsal (back) surface of the transverse arch
(the hand). The fit of this transverse strip
should be snug. To keep this strip of bandage
in place, run small strips of adhesive tape three-
eighths of an inch wide and three inches long
between the fingers. Attach these narrow strips
of tape to the back and to the front of the trans-
verse bandage. - - -
For the attachment of the bandage from the
wrist to the palm on the volar (front) surface,
use a strip of tape two inches wide and eight
inches long. Fold this tape with the ends un-
even and the adhesive surface approximating
so that you have a loose end left. Slip this end
under the wrist bandage for an attachment there.
Push the other end under the transverse bandage
for attachment at the palm, where it can be
secured by an additional piece of tape. Repeat
28 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
this same process when adjusting the posterior
Plates
104-A
104-B
strip on the dorsal surface of the hand.
It is impossible to use this type of glove
bandage unless you also apply the wrist bandage
using the cigarette roll. There would be no
place to anchor the glove supports without this
wrist bandage.
When this type of bandage has been properly
adjusted, the hand can be immersed in hot water
without loosening the bandage supports. After
adjusting a bandage of this type, it is a good
plan, although not entirely necessary, to use an-
other piece of adhesive tape over the loose end
already anchored to the front wrist bandage.
This further insures against the bandage work-
ing loose.
CANWAS GLOVE WITH LEATHER BACK SUPPORT
Coaches and trainers can easily make many
of their own braces and supports. The trainer
should have at his disposal a heavy sewing
machine that will stitch either canvas or leather
goods.
The eyelet and thumb bands of the glove
shown in Plates 104-A and 104-B were made
from an old punching bag cover. The canvas
used in the glove was found among scraps of
waste materials. :
The leather used in the posterior view of
the glove (Plate 104–B) was taken from a dis-
- ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 29
carded basket-ball cover. A piece of paper
fibre coated with Acetate Dope 104 and dried
well before using, was inserted beneath the
leather, which was then stitched to the back of
the canvas glove. - *
In games in which there is possibility of in-
jury to a hand that is either weakened from a
former injury or is in need of additional pro-
tection on account of a recent injury, such a
canvas glove as the one shown in the two
previously mentioned plates is economical, dur-
able, and effective. The front lace makes it
easy to adjust. , .
This glove, combining the qualities of light-
ness, durability, and strength, makes an ideal
glove for many purposes. A player wearing
this type of glove is not handicapped by clumsi-
ness because he has complete use of the wrist,
fingers, and thumb. He is, at the same time,
assured full protection for the back of the hand.
In football scrimmages especially, in which there
is repeated danger of the hand being stepped
upon, this glove is invaluable.
30 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Plates
105-A
105-B
ACETATE DOPE CAST FOR HAND AND WRIST
A new feature in athletic braces has been
discovered. It is the use of Acetate Dope 104
in their construction. This Dope can be ob-
tained from the Perry Austin Manufacturing
Company, of Grasmere, Staten Island, New
York City. The price is about $4.00 for a half-
gallon tin. This material comes in liquid form
but when applied dries very hard. It is most
extensively used on aeroplane wings. This fact
is evidence enough of its qualities of extreme
resistance. -
Directions for Using the Acetate Dope in
Casts: After clothing the wrist, hand, and arm
with a layer of cotton about one-sixteenth of an
inch thick, apply a gauze roller bandage over
the desired area. You will not need to employ
the spiral reversed bandage in wrapping the
joint, hand, and arm in this case, for the Dope
will cement and hold the bandage. Then apply
with a one and one-half inch varnish brush, the
Acetate Dope 104, to the entire surface of the
gauze bandage. If more than one coat is needed
to give greater firmness and weight to the
bandage, apply as many coats as are desired.
As high as ten coats may be used, but three
coats are usually all that are needed. It will
take about thirty minutes for each coat to set.
Do not apply an extra coat until the previous
one is thoroughly dry.
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 31
Plates 105-A, 105-B, Acetate Dope Cast for Hand and Wrist.
Plate 106, Spiral Reversed Bandage for Forearm and Arm.
Plate 107, Flexible Collodion Patch.

32 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
After the first coating has partially hardened,
the bandage should be cut. Use a pair of blunt
Surgical Scissors to cut the seam along the middle
front of the wrist, hand and arm. By the time
that the cast is cut, it will have hardened enough
so that the next coating may be applied. Three
applications of the Dope will make the bandage
as hard as plaster of Paris; and in addition to
firmness, it will have lightness—a quality so
much to be desired in bandaging.
In finishing the cast for use, turn a three-
inch strip of adhesive tape over each of the
edges of the cast, where it was cut for the open-
ing. These strips of tape will supply the sur-
face for the eyelet bands. The openings for
the thumb and ends can be treated in the same
way with adhesive tape.
After the adhesive bands have been placed
and the eyelets arranged, apply to the cast its
last coating of the Dope. This will set the
adhesive tape and make it an integral part of
the bandage. This structure now becomes prac-
tically as strong as canvas. By testing the
strength of the wing of an aeroplane, you will
be able to appreciate what resistant qualities
this Dope has.
By folding crosswise a piece of adhesive tape
two inches wide and twelve inches long, with
the adhesive surfaces approximating, you can
make a six-inch tongue similar to the tongue of
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 33
a laced shoe. Stitch the tongue to one side of
the cast lacing. This will protect the wrist
against the pressure of the eyelets and the laces.
Adjust the bandage by tightening or by releas-
ing the laces. -
Remember in making this cast that the en-
tire inner surface must be covered with cotton.
The Dope will not penetrate the cotton but will
leave a downy, pliable surface that will come
into contact with the skin area. In cases of
injury to the hand and wrist, when any pres-
sure against the palmer surface of the hand
throws the wrist back and causes additional pain,
this is a most desirable cast to use, as it pro-
tects against such a jar. -
Such a cast is lighter than aluminum, and
more pliable, yet more tenacious than leather.
This new feature of athletic support has mani-
fold possibilities. With Acetate Dope 104 at
hand, a trainer with ingenuity has opportunities
to work out plans for almost any type of athletic
casts and braces.
SPIRAL REVERSED BANDAGE FOR FOREARM
AND ARM
This bandage shown in Plate 106 is a gauze
bandage primarily employed to hold applications
of unguentine and antiphlogistine in place. It
is especially desirable for clothing the arm with
an ointment dressing for an overnight appli-
cation. - - -
Plate
106
34 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Directions for Application: To keep the un-
guentine from working through the gauze, ap-
ply a pad of cotton over the area involved. In
the bandage itself, use a roller of gauze two
and one-half inches wide and ten yards long.
In the first step of the application of the gauze,
take two revolutions around the wrist, always
drawing the bandage toward you. Once the
bandage is started, ascend the forearm by spiral
reversed turns and cover the elbow in a figure
of eight. End the bandage on the upper arm
by two circular turns around the arm and fasten
the loose end with a strip of adhesive tape
brought over the end of the gauze and circularly
around the arm. +. -
Should you have trouble with the spiral re-
versed bandage separating or slipping off dur-
ing the night, wrap strips of adhesive tape one-
inch wide spirally around the arm. This will
hold the bandage together and will keep the
Plate
|07
ointment in place.
FLEXIBLE COLLODION PATCH
This patch is especially desirable when it is
difficult to make adhesive tape hold a bandage
in place. The joints of the elbows and knees,
as well as the surfaces of the forehead and
face, are difficult areas to bandage successfully.
Burns, boils, and abrasions are ideally protected
by using this type of patch. -
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 35
When an athlete is forced to bend a joint
which is in close proximity to a laceration of
any type, the movement will cause a cracking
of the injured surface and will produce pain.
Under such conditions it is very much better,
after careful washings with penetrating anti-
septics, to use ointments that will keep the tis-
sues around the wound pliable.
Directions for Applying the Patch: When
the affected area has been thoroughly cleansed
with a reliable antiseptic, apply some such oint-
ment as unguentine or campho-phénique salve
in reasonably liberal quantities. Always place
a pad of gauze directly over the ointment. Then
take a thin piece of cotton, separating it by
layers, and work the fibres apart so that the
cotton will form a very thin covering over the
gauze. See that the cotton covering is kept
thin so as not to have a clumsy patch. Let the
edges of the cotton extend beyond the edges
of the gauze about an eighth of an inch.
The patch is now ready for the application of
flexible collodion. Immerse in a bottle of flex-
ible collodion a wooden applicator or a tooth-
pick with fibrals of cotton wound around the
end. The cotton will pick up and hold enough
collodion to supply an excess, which will be de-
posited upon the patch. When applying the
collodion, hold the applicator between the thumb
and the index finger and roll the applicator away
36 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
from the center of the patch so that the col-
lodion will extend over the edges and thus cover
the entire surface without the edges being rolled
up, as would be the case if the collodion were
rolled from the outside toward the center.
Never try to daub the collodion on, as you will
attach the dry particles of the cotton fibrals to
the applicator and make a mess of your efforts.
Continue this process of rolling the collodion on
the patch until enough is added to hold it in
place and to keep the unguentine from oozing
through. This patch can be guaranteed to hold
for several days on any skin area.
After a game, redress all wounds (excepting
burns) with some worthy sterlizing agent, fol-
lowed by an application of dusting powder.
Either boric acid or Campho-phénique dusting
powder are reliable agents. Cover the powder
placed upon the wound with gauze and a thin
piece of cotton, as was done when ointment
only was applied. This time, deposit the col-
lodion on the edges of the patch, only. Put no
collodion over the top center of a dry powder
dressing. Such treatment would shut out the
air from the wound and would prevent its heal-
ing.
If an abrasion should be caused by a lime-
burn on the football field or by a floor-burn on
the basket-ball court, do not use a dry dressing;
but use daily applications of ointment dressings
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 37
instead. Unguentine has possibly come to be
known as the first word in the treatment of
burns. s
In the treatment of boils and carbuncles, a
practicing physician should have complete
charge. On account of the sequelae in such
cases, specific treatment is indicated. There is
danger of spreading the infection to other play-
ers, when boils and carbuncles are handled in the
dressing rooms with limited and often inade-
quate facilities. However, should you find it
necessary to open a boil, first paint the entire
area involved with iodine and immerse the
scalpel, or knife, in a bottle of phenol (carbolic
acid) for several minutes before using it. When
opening the boil, do not drive the knife through
the sides, but place the point down into the
center of the boil through the crater. You will
find upon investigation that the leucocytes have
built a hard barrier or wall around the infection
and that there is a cavity in the center which
contains pus. Never open a boil or a carbuncle
unless the center is soft, but keep the parts
asepticized and poulticed until you can bring the
boil or carbuncle to a head.
When opening the boil, probe the point of
the scalpel into the center about one-fourth or
one-half an inch deep and then force the sharp
edge of the knife through the outer wall. Re-
peat this operation on the opposite wall, in order
38 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Plate
108
to establish a good drainage. When the proper
incisions are made, insert a wooden applicator,
the end of which is wrapped with cotton and
treated with carbolic acid, into the crater. Re-
move this applicator and follow it immediately
with one that has been resting in grain alcohol.
The alcohol will neutralize the further action of
the carbolic acid upon the tissue. The carbolic
acid will cut away the tenacious tentacles of
the carbuncle or the boil, and the alcohol will
check the progressive destruction of tissue by
the carbolic acid. After this preliminary treat-
ment, apply a copious amount of Campho-
phénique powder. Then cover the whole area
with a piece of gauze, and add the usual thin
piece of cotton to the top. By using the flexible
collodion on the edges only, you will have a
bandage that will keep the power in place and
at the same time will allow the curative re-
agents to work at maximum speed.
After twenty-four hours, remove this dress-
ing, and you will, except in rare cases, be able
to lift out all of the remaining infectious sub-
stance at once. Continue the use of a dry
dusting powder until the cavity is entirely
closed and healed. -
TACKLE FOOTBALL OR LAME BASEBALL SHOULDER
BANDAGE
This bandage will support the weakened
muscles of the shoulder girdle, as the strain al-
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES
39
Plate 108, Tackle Football or Lame Baseball Shoulder Bandage
Plates 109-A, 109-B, Battering-ram Football Bandage.
Plate 110, Bandage for Painful or Cracked Rib.
Plate 111, Surgical Strips for Cut Above the Eye.

40 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
ways comes at the juncture of the clavicle and
the scapula. The so-called broken shoulder,
tackle shoulder, and knocked-down shoulder are
generally only strains of the acromio clavicular
articulation (juncture of clavicle and Scapula—
top point of shoulder). This bandage will re-
lieve the pain caused from the strain of the
loose hanging arm. In this injury, adhesive tape
correctly applied will aid in the functioning of
the weakened ligaments.
Directions for the Bandage: Apply a strip
of adhesive tape three inches wide and six
inches long transversely on the outside of the
arm at the insertion of the deltoid muscle, which
is eight inches below the top point of the shoul-
der. This strip will serve as the lower anchor
for the longitudinal strips that will be applied.
Another anchor piece ten inches long should be
taped across the shoulder near the juncture of
the shoulder and the neck. This strip will serve
as the upper anchor for the longitudinal strips.
Before applying the longitudinal strips, force
the arm up alongside of the body to obtain a
complete relaxation of the shoulder muscle.
Support the arm in this position until the longi-
tudinal strips have been applied. Now apply
five longitudinal strips of tape three inches wide
and twelve inches long to the anchor tapes at
the deltoid and at the neck. Bring these strips
up the arm and over the shoulder, firmly press-
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 41
ing them into place. After the longitudinal
strips of tape have been brought up over the
point of the shoulder, split each one into halves
and bring one half to its attachment in one
direction and the other half in the opposite di-
rection. This is done to avert the inconvenience
of the tape wrinkling across the shoulder which
will occur if this precaution of splitting the
longitudinal strips is not followed. \ -
After the arm bandage is in place, attach
three additional pieces of tape eight inches long
and three inches wide to the back of the shoul-
der. These strips should be attached from the
inferior angle of the scapula across the point
of the shoulder to the clavicle, thus drawing
the scapula (shoulder blade) closer to the clavicle
(collar bone). Then attach two additional
strips of tape six inches long and three inches
wide from the front of the chest across the
clavicle to the spine of the scapula. Be very
Sure when applying this bandage that the arm
is supported during the entire process by a rest
that will give a full relaxation of the muscles
of the shoulder. .
When the bandage is finished, secure it by
outside coverings of strips of tape three inches
wide, both at the insertion of the deltoid and
at the top of the shoulder near the neck. It is
these outer strips of tape used to secure the
bandage that are seen in Plate 108. The pri-
42 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Plates
|09-A
|09-B
mary anchor strips are beneath these strips,
which really serve as secondary anchors for the
bandage proper. In no case, allow these arm
anchor strips to completely encircle the arm as
they would cut off the circulation of the blood.
BATTERING-RAM FOOTBALL BANDAGE
This bandage is designed with the intention
of making the football player a battering-ram.
. After affixing tackle foot-ball or lame base-
ball shoulder bandages on both shoulders in the
manner described in Plate 108, it is comparative-
ly simple to add the necessary additional trans-
verse strips used in the battering-ram bandage.
These additional strips applied to both front and
back will strengthen a player's shoulders, de-
cidedly. - *
Plate 109-A shows how two strips of three-
inch adhesive tape are drawn over the top of
each shoulder and down to the front of the
chest. Two additional strips of three-inch ad-
hesive tape are brought across the front of the
chest and adhered to the over-shoulder bandage.
These lateral strips are also shown across the
chest of the player in Plate 109-A.
Plate 109-B shows the scheme of running
three three-inch strips across the back from the
outside of one shoulder to the outside of the
other. This draws the shoulders closer together,
yet leaves plenty of freedom of movement when
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 43
the player raises his arms. When the arms are
dropped again to the sides, the tape thus affixed
forms an encasement for the player and aids in
absorbing and resisting the shock of a force
thrown against the front of the shoulder and
the chest. Not only is this bandage helpful to
a plunging back-fielder but also to a lineman
as he withstands the shock of a gruelling line-
plunging team.
Such a bandage should be worn only when a
player's shoulders are in bad shape or when a
line is forced to meet much heavier opponents
with a crunching back-field plunging attack.
This bandage is seldom, if ever, used in basket-
ball.
By using special exercise methods, such as the
dip on the fingers every morning and night, a
player can build up a splendid resistance to
shock and force. Refer to the section on “Train-
ing and Conditioning” in Chapter I for prescrip-
tions of exercises used in developing special
muscle groups.
PAINFUL OR CRACKED RIB BANDAGE
The so-called cracked rib or pain in the side
is common to players who engage in games of
contact and combat. The intercostal muscles
and intercostal nerves are often injured or in-
flamed by such collisions, and thereby cause
great pain upon any movement of the thorax.
Plate
| || 0
44 - MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Many so-called pleurisy pains are results of
slight injuries or sprains of these intercostal
tissues contracted in athletic contests.
Many times a runner is susceptible to lanci-
nating pains in the side due to a cramp of the
intercostal muscles. Manipulation and bandag-
ing will readily alleviate such suffering.
The course of the ribs and their relation to
each other in the thorax should be carefully
studied in order to apply this cracked rib ad-
hesive tape bandage artfully.
Directions for Applying the Bandage: Start
the bandage at the juncture of the abdomen and
the front of the ribs. In this instance (Plate
110), the bandage is started at the juncture of
the right ribs and the abdomen, near the ex-
tremities of the lower ribs.
Beginning at the place indicated, draw several
strips of three-inch tape obliquely upward and
backward, around the dorsal surface of the
thorax and overlapping the spine far enough to
give the tape a substantial mooring. This at-
tachment of the tape across the spine and to
the angles of the opposite ribs secures the de-
sired immobilization of the injured area and
thereby lessens the pain, upon body activity.
A three-inch accessory adhesive strip over the
right shoulder from the rear attachment of the
primary bandage to the front of the chest and
abdomen serves further to limit the action of
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIEs 45
the ribs. See Plate 110 for the location of this
shoulder strip. .
To aid further in holding this bandage in
place and also to obtain from it the maximum
benefit of immobilization, use two or three (as
many as are consistent with the weight of the
primary bandage) three-inch strips of adhesive
tape running from the angles of the opposite
ribs obliquely around and across the untaped
side to the primary bandage at the front.
The unions of the two bandages at the back
and at the front can be secured by applying ad-
ditional short strips of adhesive tape over them.
As the skin is a pliable envelope covering the
body, this bandage around the opposite side of
the thorax is needed to take up the “play” in
the skin and to hold this adhesive corset in place.
Such a bandage will make a girdle that will
give comfort and, at the same time, will give
protection. A player encased in such a band-
age will breathe in a restricted way but with-
out pain.
SURGICAL ADHESIVE STRIPS FOR. CUTS OVER EYE
Often in athletic contests, the player receives
a wound over the eye when his head comes into
contact with the head of an opponent. This
split of the skin and other tissues may be any-
where from one-half an inch to an inch and a
half long. As the bleeding interferes with the
*.
*
Plate
| ||
46 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
vision of the player, immediately apply a pad of
Cotton Soaked in a solution of adrenalin chloride
(1-1000 parts). The action of the adrenalin
will constrict the capillaries and will stop the
hemorrhage. -
Then bathe the wound and the adjacent area
with grain alcohol. Wipe the wound carefully
with aseptic gauze to insure continued cleanli-
ness and to get the wound dry.
Prepare some thin strips of adhesive tape
about one inch long and one-eighth of an inch
wide. By slightly warming the adhesive tape,
you will be assured of better sticking qualities.
The lower attachments of these strips should
begin on the skin area underneath the supra-
orbital cavity. By lifting the tissue gently, the
open edges of the wound can be brought to-
gether, and the attachment of the upper edges
of the strips of adhesive tape can be made to
the skin above the eyebrow. Leave a longi-
tudinal space between the strips of adhesive so
that air can be admitted to the wound. This
precaution will aid greatly in the healing proc-
ess and will stimulate the development of
healthy granulation. -
If such a bandage should be torn off during
the game, it can easily be replaced. There is
less chance when the strips are applied under
unfavorable conditions, for infection, than there
is if stitches were taken under similar conditions.
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 47
In applying these strips of tape to such a
wound, always exercise care that the parts are
not too tightly drawn together, because with this
type of contusion there is some brusing of tis-
sue, which will cause swelling. When affixing
the strips, make allowance for this possibility.
After the strips are all in place, iodine can be
applied to the exposed area between the strips.
Never use the iodine immediately before the
application of the strips. If tape is added to
an area previously painted with iodine, the area
will blister. -
Two or three days is generally sufficient time
to effect the union of the separated parts. See
to it while the wound is in process of healing that
no separation of tissue is allowed between the
edges of the wound. Such neglect of a cut or
laceration will surely produce a scar.
This adhesive strip eye bandage is much
superior to the metal wound clips, as such ad-
juncts are dangerous to use in athletic contests.
The strips are also more satisfactory for the
short wounds indicated than are stitches taken
around the eye, as stitching is not only a pain-
ful process but is very hard to do in the short
time allotted to a player in a time-out. To get
the player back into the game within two minutes
is the problem in such cases, and an adhesive
strip bandage is a simple as well as an effective
way to do this.
48 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Plate
| 12
BANDAGING STONE BRUISE OF THE HEEL
When a player alights heavily on an unpadded
heel, he often receives an injury known as a
stone bruise of the heel. A stone bruise is
really a severe injury to the plantar nerve in its
course through a groove in the calcaneus or OS
calcis (bone of the heel). The injury to this
nerve inflames the adjacent area and makes it
difficult for the player to run or even to walk
on this injured heel.
By using strips of adhesive tape four and
one-half inches long and three inches wide in
alternating bands lengthwise and crosswise of
the foot, you can get a player with such an in-
jury back into the game much sooner than by
many other methods of treatment that are
employed. -
When completed, this stone bruise bandage
should have from five to seven of the alternating
strips of tape on the heel. The tape, if applied
alternately and firmly, will afford splendid pro-
tection for the injured heel. When the player
is in action, this adhesive tape cushion will take
the brunt of every blow or jar which would
otherwise come full upon the heel.
All adjuncts, such as applied moist heat to
the heel and the foot, and massage of the foot
and leg, are indicated in the treatment of this
injury. The bandage as described is used sole-
ly to guard against further irritation to an al-
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 49
Plate 112, Bandage for Stone Bruise of the Heel.
Plates 113-A, 113-B, Taping the Foot.
Plates 114-A, 114-B, Figure of Eight Ankle Wrap.


50 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
ready injured member. The bandage is for
protection, which, in this case, is the greater
part of the cure.
TAPING THE FOOT
* (1) Blister on Sole of Foot—When a blister
"** is raised on the plantar area of the foot, use a
sterile needle and penetrate the skin. You
should penetrate the true skin instead of merely
puncturing the blistered area, so as not to ad-
mit air to the seat of the blister. Air admitted
to the blister will cause pain. After letting the
fluid out, cover the inflamed area with a thin
piece of cotton about the size of the blister it-
self. Over the cotton affix a piece of adhesive
tape approximately four times the size of the
blister. The cotton will keep the adhesive tape
from sticking to the blister and from damaging
the tender and inflamed area when the tape
must be removed; while the tape will keep the
blister from breaking open during the time of
tenderness and inflammation, and will thus al-
low nature to build a base under the blister.
(2) Callus on Heel—A callus may become
so thick on the plantar surface of the foot that
it may positively hinder locomotion in either of
two ways: first, by pinching the nerve end
plates of the skin; second, by allowing a blis-
ter to form underneath the callus. In the lat-
ter case, the excess exudate is difficult to re-
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 51
lease, and before the individual discovers what
is wrong, the whole foot may be throbbing much
the same as it does in a case of blood poisoning.
If the player will wear a large piece of ad-
hesive tape Over a callus, the action of the zinc
oxide in the tape will soften the calloused part;
and if he will use a safety razor blade to trim
the hypertrophied tissue; he will be able to pre-
vent the after effects of the callus—among
which is the pinching of the nerve end plates in
the skin. Such pinching will cause pain upon
pressure of locomotion.
Should a blister form underneath the callus—
a condition which might prohibit the player from
getting into the game—it would be better to use
a more heroic treatment than the one previously
indicated. In such case, immediately cut down
with a scalpel into the callus and puncture the
blister. It is well to cut off the heavy skin
directly over the blister. A tender and raw
surface will then be exposed. In about ten
minutes, after the blister has had ample time to
drain, put a pad of gauze saturated with alcohol
over the blister; then apply some reliable oint-
ment freely over the involved area. Over the
Ointment use a piece of gauze and another of
cotton with a binder of adhesive tape to hold
the ointment in place. As soon as the foreign
substance is released from the blister, and an oint-
ment, such as Unguentine or Campho-phénique ,
52 . MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
salve, is applied freely, the player will be able to
again stand on his foot, and without much pain.
After such treatment is applied, a player can
Soon get back into the game. The greasy base
of an ointment dressing prevents another blister
forming while the athlete is in action. It also
removes the inflammation from the part.
(3) Bunion or Sprain of the Great Toe Band-
age—A bunion is produced by lateral pressure
from the inside of the shoe against the great toe.
The joint of the great toe is then exposed, and
the friction of the shoe against the joint sets
up synovitis. Man in walking pushes off on the
great toe. If there is any impairment of
strength or support of this member, he will
shift his weight to the heel. Due to the fact, that
the great toe is so vital to a correct walking
posture, it should be kept in proper position.
Directions for Strapping the Great Toe: Draw
a strip of adhesive tape one inch wide and fifteen
inches long around the great toe, along the arch
of the foot and anchor it around the heel. Now
add a strip of tape one inch or one and one-half
inches wide, transversely, to the arch of the foot
to hold the bandage close to the arch when it
passes from the base of the great toe to the
heel. This strip of tape will draw the bandage
a little tighter. Reinforce the first one-inch
strip that was applied with an additional one-
, inch piece of tape starting at the base of the
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 53
great toe and running to the arch. By using
this type of bandage, you can so brace the great
toe that it will not drop over against the second
toe. If the bunion is very painful and the case
is of long standing, do not attempt to adjust the
toe to proper position in the first bandaging.
This must be accomplished gradually. But if
the great toe is constantly kept in position, the
other toes will soon find their correct places and
will fill in the space which has been produced
by the great toe having been out of line for so
long. -
This bandage should be worn for a period of
five days without changing. It may be necessary
to wear this type of bandage for several months
before the bunion can be entirely removed.
If the joint itself is painful, cover it with ad-
hesive tape to further relieve any pressure that
might come upon it. Should you find it neces-
sary to loosen the bandage somewhat after it
has been applied, pull the attachment loose
from the end of the great toe and thus allow
the bandage to give somewhat. Then replace
the attachment so that the movement of the
great toe is less restricted. This makes an ad-
justable bandage.
(4) Broken Arch or Flat Foot Arch Support
—By referring to Plate 113-B as well as to
Plate 113-A, you will readily see how this band-
age was put on. Plate 113-A shows the bandag-
54 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
ing of the inside arch, and Plate 113-B shows
the bandaging of the external transverse arch.
Any player who has trouble with his arches
will do well to use this kind of bandaging.
These two braces combined not only give added
strength to the arch but also hold the bones of
the foot and ankle in place.
When applying an arch support to the inside
arch of the foot, first invert the foot and tightly
wrap three one-and-one-half-inch strips of ad-
hesive tape transversely around the arch. These
strips should encase the Schaphoid and the in-
ternal cuneiform bones (bones of the arch).
When the inside arch is well supported by the
strips of tape, continue the bandage on around
the heel and to the point where the tape was
started. It will be surprising to see how much
support these strips around the arch will afford.
When applying this support to the external
transverse arch of the foot, first bring a strip
of tape one-inch wide around the heel and over
the top of the foot. Then start an additional
one-inch strip of tape circularly around the
transverse arch of the foot and continue it un-
derneath the foot to be attached to the sole.
Soft Corns Between Toe—Perspiration of the
feet, the proximity of the toes to each other,
and more or less pressure from shoes, are the
predisposing causes of Soft corns. The fact
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 55
that the players do not dry well between the toes
after bathing is the principal exciting cause.
A direct treatment that is very beneficial to
the broken-down tissue of soft corns follows:
Apply a thin tissuelike layer of cotton saturated
in alcohol and menthol crystals to the soft corn.
The alcohol will toughen the skin; while the
menthol will act on the sensory nerves and will
give a healing and cooling effect to the painful
tissue. Two drams of menthol crystals to one-
half pint of grain alcohol is the right propor-
tion to use. -
The player should carry a small vial of this
liquid in his pocket during the season and apply .
it to the corn every two hours. At night he
should spread a thin layer of cotton mulched
in boric acid powder between the affected toes.
The boric acid powder will dry the soft corn at
night after the alcohol and the menthol have
had their effects during the day. With this
combination of alcohol, menthol, and boric acid
at work, it will be a matter of only two or
three days until the corn will be ready for dull
dissection. After the corn is dull dissected, see
that the player continues the use of the alcohol,
and soon all traces of this trouble will disap-
pear. -
Hard Corms on Toe—An athlete is constantly
charging forward, pushing his toes into the
athletic shoes. Friction on the upper part of
56 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Plates
| 14-A
| |4-B
the toes is apt to produce hard corns. By having
the men trim such corns with a sterile safety
razor blade and then plaster them with pieces
of adhesive tape, you will soon eliminate the
trouble. The friction of the shoe will come upon
the tape and not upon the toe. This tape can
be worn for five or six days at a time. If such
adhesive patches are used consistently on hard
corns for a period of two or three months, the
corns will not reappear.
FIGURE OF EIGHT ANKLE WRAP
By using bandages of heavy unbleached mus-
lin two and one-half inches wide and seven feet
long, you can make ankle wraps that will support
the arches and the other bones of the feet. Few
players ever sprain their ankles when wearing
a bandage of this sort. Players should be taught
how to apply these ankle wraps without aid.
Directions for Applying: Invert the foot and
cover the instep with two circular turns of the
bandage. After the instep is well covered,
carry the bandage directly around the point of
the heel and return to the instep by bringing
the bandage over the top of the foot. Continue
this procedure until the bandage is exhausted.
Do not leave any loose ends. On the last lap of
the figure of eight bandage, slip the loose end
under the last layer of the ankle wrap and thus
secure it in place.
To further strengthen the ankle and to hold
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 57
the bandage in place, strips of adhesive tape one
and one-half inches wide and twelve inches long
can be drawn around the ankle at the point of
greatest mobility. A player should not walk
on his foot after the bandage has been applied
until the sock and shoe have been placed over
it. Any bandage will work loose unless the
shoe is laced over it to assist in holding it in
place.
BASKET WBAVE ANKLE BANDAGE
First Taping
This bandage is intended for an ankle that
has received a very severe sprain. For the ap-
plication, prepare three strips of three-inch ad-
hesive tape twenty-two inches long and three
strips of three-inch tape eighteen inches long.
These strips should be torn into smaller strips
one inch in width. This will make a total of
nine strips that are twenty-two inches long and
an equal number eighteen inches long.
Invert the foot while the bandage is being
applied. Bring the strips of one-inch tape that
are eighteen inches long lengthwise around the
foot and the heel. (Study Plate 115-A for this
adjustment.) Alternating with these strips
which are applied to the foot and heel are the
strips twenty-two inches long that go under the
heel and halfway up the outer, inner, and back
sides of the leg. This bandage practically meets
itself behind at the tendon Achilles. The reason
Plate
| |5-A
58 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
for running the tape So far up the leg is to take
some of the strain off the insertion of the gas-
trochnemius muscle (large muscle in the back of
the leg) where it inserts into the tendon Achilles.
When applying the strips, overlap each one
about two-thirds of its width by the next strip
that will run in the same direction. . The ends
of the strips around the foot must not overlap
nor meet on top of the foot. Leave a space
about one and a half inches in width along the
entire anterior view of the bandage for the re-
turn circulation of the blood. Take extreme
pains in putting every strip of adhesive tape on
smoothly—without any semblance of a fold—
for any irregularity will cause either a blister
or a break in the skin.
This bandage should not be worn over five
days, because the cuticle, when tightly encased
in adhesive tape, is irritated by the hair follicles.
When the bandage is removed if the ankle is
still weak, another bandage can be put on after
a day's rest, provided the skin has been tough-
ened sufficiently by the frequent applications of
alcohol. - -
When using a basket weave bandage, always
apply it to the foot and ankle the day preceding
an important contest, as it will take some time
for the player to become accustomed to a tight
bandage of this type.
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES
Plates 115-A, 115-B, 115-C, 115-D, Basket Weave Ankle
Bandage.
Plate 116, Double Spiral Three-Quarter Figure of Eight
Knee Bandage.
Plates 117-A, 117-B, Acetate Dope Cast for Knee.


60 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Plate
||5-B
Method of Fixation
Medial View—When the basket weave ban-
dage has been completed, fix or set the edges
by collateral taping. At the top of the bandage,
bind a three-inch strip of adhesive tape circular-
ly around the leg. Continue these three-inch
circular collateral strips around the foot and the
heel until the basket weave is in an additional
encasement of three-inch tape. This additional
encasement of the basket weave bandage is
plainly shown in Plates 115-B and 115-C.
To keep the tape from rolling up along the
front or sides of the foot, affix strips of one-
and-one-half-inch tape along the edges of the
front of the bandage and down its entire length
along the shin and the top of the foot.
When the bandage is first set, there will be
intense pulling at the back of the leg where the
top of the basket weave is attached. The
bandaged leg and foot will be so clumsy that
the player will feel he can never run. However,
insist that he put on boots or high shoes and
walk for an hour or so until the bandage gets
set. The high shoes together with the walking
will set the bandage; and after the bandage is
once set, no further difficulty will be encoun-
tered. Not only will this adhesive tape cast,
when set, prevent excessive swelling and permit
walking without pain, but the attachment of
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 61
the tape to the skin will form a natural massage
when the muscles are in action, and thereby
will aid in recovery.
In addition to showing the collateral taping
affixed over the basket weave ankle bandage,
Plate 115-B shows a front view of the foot.
Note that an untaped space has been left along
the entire front of the leg and foot to provide
for the return circulation of the blood.
Finished
Lateral View—If the sprain should be most
Severe at the external malleolus (ankle joint),
use additional adhesive bands (shown in Plate
115-C) running from the outside of the foot
around and back of the heel. These additional
strips will brace the weakened joint. A high
shoe worn over the bandage will aid materially
in locomotion.
At the end of five days if the sprain is severe
enough to require a second bandage, paint the
skin of the leg and foot with grain alcohol
several times before applying a second bandage.
The alcohol will toughen the skin and remove
Plate
||5-0
the inconvenience caused by the excessive sore-
ness and tenderness of the taped area. Such
a condition of the skin will in all probability
exist after the removal of the first bandage, as
all air has been excluded from the area encased.
62 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Plate
| |5-D
Plate
|| 6
After Its Removal
Plate 115-D shows the basket weave ankle
bandage supporting its own weight. This plate
gives one a clear idea of the strength of the
make-up of this bandage.
The splendid qualities of this bandage are to
be found in no other. It possesses all the ad-
vantages of the plaster of Paris cast and yet
allows passive movement of the joint. It com-
bines thinness with strength, and can be worn
under a shoe without inconvenience. The entire
bandage when once applied is no thicker than
a heavy woolen sock. With such a support for
the ankle, a player, who has been eliminated
from probable participation in a contest on
account of his injury, may get back into the
game.
DOUBLE SPIRAL THREE-QUARTER FIGURE OF EIGHT
KNEE BANDAGE
When the internal or external lateral liga-
ments of the knee have been stretched and in-
jured, a double spiral three-quarter figure of
eight knee bandage will give much support to
the knee. The knee is one of the most difficult
parts of the body to support by a brace that
will give, at the same time, protection, support,
and latitude of movement.
Directions: Prepare eight one-and-one-half-
inch strips of adhesive tape twenty-two inches
long. Begin the first pieces eight inches above
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 63
the knee, one on the inner and the other on the
outer side of the back of the thigh. Run the
strips diagonally across each other, just above
the kneecap and end them on opposite sides, on
the back of the leg. Fasten the loose ends of
the tape together with short pieces of adhesive
tape. This bandage makes a most substantial
and effective support. A steel brace, which is
stock athletic material, can be worn over this
adhesive bandage for further protection if
desired.
ACETATE DOPE CAST FOR KNEE
º: Lateral or Outside View—In addition to the
ii.7-B steel brace and the adhesive tape bandage, a
most effective knee cast can be made from
Acetate Dope 104. The acetate dope has been
previously described in connection with Plates
105-A and 105-B. The splendid feature of this
acetate bandage is that it can be made form-
fitting and adjustable by the addition of lacing
eyelets and a tongue. In Plate 117-A such a
lacing has been placed at the side of the thigh,
knee, and leg. Plate 117-B shows the cast
without the lacing. -
When applying this bandage, the cotton and
gauze were placed upon the thigh and leg and
then the first coat of acetate dope was applied
with a two-inch paint or varnish brush, and
after the dope had hardened sufficiently, the cast
was cut as it was in the casts for the forearm
64 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
and wrist. The process for making all such casts
is identical with that taken up in Plates 105-A
and 105-B. If more coats of the dope should
be needed, they can be applied in the same way,
some thirty minutes apart.
When the cast is removed from the knee, the
eyelet bands and tongue can be sewn in. Keep
the cast laced over a small feather pillow until
you are ready to replace it on the injured knee,
in order to hold it in shape. This bandage can
be made as hard as is desired by applying addi-
tional coats of Acetate Dope 104.
The possibilities of making bandages from
cotton, gauze, adhesive tape, and Acetate Dope
104 are unbounded. The bandages may be sup-
ports for the shoulders, ribs, nose, chin, or any
other part of the body.
REMOVING ADHESIVE TAPE EXCESS
The excess of adhesive tape can be removed
by applying gasoline, benzine, alcohol, or ether
to the parts to which the under surface of the
tape has adhered. If these agents should parch
or irritate the skin in the process of the removal
of the tape, apply some comforting ointment to
the tender areas.
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 65
CAUTIONS IN TAPING
Never paint a skin area with iodine and then
cover the same immediately with adhesive tape.
Iodine blisters when the skin is immediately
covered with a bandage, especially when cov-
ered with adhesive tape.
Also, never put, adhesive tape over a raw
wound. Such procedure would bring grave
danger from infection. Adhesive tape is not an
antiseptic. -
LUXATIONS OR DISLOCATIONS
A dislocation is “a persistent separation from
each other, partially or completely, of two
articular surfaces. A self-reduced dislocation
is called a sprain. There are three forms of
dislocations: (1) traumatic; (2) spontaneous
or pathological; (3) congenital.” In this athletic
connection, we shall discuss only the traumatic,
for practically all athletic dislocations are trau-
matic.
If a dislocation that is easy to reduce should
occur, many times the trainer can handle it.
However, if he feels at all uncertain about the
injury, it is best to call a physician. A disloca-
tion of the shoulder can easily be determined
by the following simple method: If the injured
player can place his hand located on the side of
the injured shoulder on his opposite shoulder,
he probably does not have a dislocation.
66 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Shoulder dislocations of the simpler type
(subglenoid) can often be reduced by the fol-
lowing method: Place the player prone upon
his back. Remove your shoe and place your
heel in the axilla (arm pit) of the injured
player. Exert a strong traction on the athlete's
dislocated shoulder by clasping his wrist and
pulling with both hands while you simultaneous-
ly extend your foot forcibly in and under the
player's shoulder. -
If the resistance of the muscles around the
joint is not too great, this movement should
replace the shoulder with a snap. However,
many times such contractions of the muscles,
due to the attendant pain of the injury, cannot
be overcome until an anaesthetic is administered
and complete relaxation is thus obtained.
After a dislocation has been reduced, it should
be bandaged so that it will get the benefit of a
maximum support.
Passive movement is also indicated in the res-
toration of a member, thus weakened, to normal
strength and activity.
CONTUSIONS
General—These injuries generally result from
violence. There is usually pain, tenderness,
swelling, and discoloration of the skin. Numb-
ness may also be produced if the contusion in-
volves a large nerve fibre.
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 67
Be very careful in examining the injured
area of a contusion. Always anticipate a frac-
ture. Where there is the slightest doubt as to
the nature of the contusion, employ the X-rays.
In simple contusions when there is no frac-
ture, cold packs are generally indicated for the
first half hour. Follow the application of the
cold packs with heat, either moist or dry. Due
to the inconvenience of applying moist heat,
usually the dry heat is more expedient. An
electric pad is an excellent and an easy way to
treat such emergencies. These pads are
especially convenient at night, as the heat is
evenly distributed and the pad can be wrapped
around the affected joint or the extremity. Pin
the heating pad around an extremity so as to
get the heat thoroughly distributed over the
area but be sure not to let the pin get into
contact with the coils as a short circuit will
result. The best heating pads are wired for
high, medium, and low heat, which makes it
possible to regulate them and to get the exact
degrees of heat desired. -
Internal Hemorrhage of Lower Leg—The
rupture of a small blood vessel in the thigh or
leg will often discolor a large area of tissue.
Generally, the athlete is worried and wonders
what is the cause of the discoloration. If there
is no pain, there is no cause for alarm. The
discoloration signifies that the ruptured blood
68 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
vessel has released its contents between the
sheaths of the muscles and the skin. As the
blood, thus released, gravitates downward during
the process of disintegration, discoloration is
sure to occur. Only through absorption can
this be carried away. There is nothing harm-
ful or serious about a condition such as this;
and it is well to assure the athlete in advance
that, when the affected area turns green and,
later, greenish yellow, the processes of repair
are going on.
However, if pain attends such a discoloration,
report it at once to a physician, as something
more serious might develop.
Hemorrhage of the Nose—Whether the
hemorrhage is from the nose or from some other
part of the body, use cotton soaked in adrenalin
chloride (1/1000 parts). If the hemorrhage is
of the nose and is at all severe, stuff a small
piece of cotton in the nostril, and by throwing
the head back, let the excess of adrenalin
chloride flow into the nasal pharynx. This will
constrict the capillaries and cause a coagulation
of the blood so that the hemorrhage will soon
cease. The tampon in the nostril can be re-
moved in time to get the player back into the
game within the required two minutes.
A pad of cotton forced securely under the
upper lip will also stop nosebleed, but it will
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 69
take a longer time to accomplish the result than
is required by using the adrenalin.
Epistaxis (nosebleed) is quite common with
many athletes. A catarrhal condition of the
nose and throat generally predisposes to this
annoyance. Often by massage of the muscles
of the neck, at the base of the occiput (base of
cranium), the blood supply will be increased,
and consequently the vitality to the nasal region
will be strengthened. These small capillaries
with their vitality strengthened, will not then be
so easily broken down by exertion.
Varicose Veins—An insufficiency in the mus-
cular walls of the veins causes excessive dila-
tion. This dilatation often so weakens the walls
of the veins that a hemorrhage is easily pro-
duced by a heavy force directed against the
area of lowered vitality. Such ruptures of the
vascular walls easily shades into varicose ulcers.
First aid treatment in such an emergency:
Apply a pad soaked in adrenalin chloride; and
after the hemorrhage is reduced, use cold ice
packs. The team physician should have such
cases under careful observation.
Black Eye (Ecchymoses)—This injury is
seldom very serious. Rapid swelling will take
places unless cold packs are immediately applied.
Use pressure against the injury while applying
the cold packs. After half an hour or so, hot
70 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
applications should be resorted to. Apply hot
packs continuously until the swelling is reduced.
If the enlargement of the swelling should in-
terfere with the player's ability to see, there are
times when a leech can profitably be employed
to draw the blood from the strutted area. Raw
beefsteak applied to the blackened eye is also
another old method that various trainers have
employed with success.
But more expedient than either of these
agencies to remove the discoloration and to
lessen the swelling is a pad of cotton soaked
with English marigold (Calendula) and placed
over the bruised tissues of the blackened eye.
BURNS AND “STRAWBERRIES”
These injuries to athletes come in all sports.
While they are common in football and basket-
ball, they occur more often in baseball and
track. In reality, they are burns incurred
through friction, by falling while in rapid
motion, either upon the floor, the ground, or
the cinders. Their red seared appearance gives
them the nickname of “strawberries.”
If there are any particles of foreign matter,
such as small cinders or dirt lodged in the
wound, wash the part with a five per cent
lysol solution, combined with castile soap. Then
wash thoroughly with grain alcohol and apply
iodine. Iodine is contra-indicated on burns of
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 71
other types, as it only adds insult to injury. But
in these athletic “strawberries” the danger of
infection is too great to take a chance with
milder antiseptics.
Follow your antiseptics with applications of
Unguentine or other ointment to allay the pain.
Continue to use an ointment on such burns,
especially if the athlete is a competitor and ex-
pects to participate in the next few days.
Ointment makes the injured part more pliable,
therefore, more readily bent. An ability to bend
an injured member is very essential to a partici-
pating athlete. - º
After two or three days apply, over the raw
tissue of the burn, a gauze pack saturated with
pure grain alcohol. The alcohol will have a
tendency to harden the raw tissue and to build
a base for new tissue. Keep the area moist with
alcohol for a time (a day or two) and then
revert to the ointment dressing. The ointment
dressing is a slower healing process than is a
dry dusting powder dressing, but so long as you
have the wound sterile, pliable, and soothed, the
athlete can participate in games without injury
or inconvenience while his wound is healing
slowly but surely.
INFECTIONS AND LACERATIONS
All infections and lacerations should be
treated immediately with an antiseptic. Iodine
72 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
is probably the most widely used and undoubt-
edly one of the most reliable.
Wet antiseptic dressings are best for ulcers
and all infected areas such as lacerations, burns,
etc. If the wound is kept continuously satu-
rated with the wet antiseptic solution, there will
be small chance for the infection to become
deep seated; and there will be but little chance
for any infection in the wound to exist and
thrive. -
No trainer should be without these two
formulas for wet dressings: namely, Ochsner's
Solution and Wright's Solution.
Formula for Ochsner's Solution—
Boric acid. . . . . . . 7 oz.
Glycerine. . . . . . . . 3 oz.
Alcohol (grain). .27 Oz.
Phenol. . . . . . . . . . 2 oz.
Aqua (distilled). .89 oz.
Mix the boric acid and glycerine in a paste
before adding the phenol, alcohol, and distilled
water. The preceding ingredients should make
up one gallon of Ochsner's solution.
Formula for Wright's Solution—
Sodium citrate. . . . . . . . . . . . ... 4 gr.
Sodium chloride (table salt). . .40 gr.
Aqua (distilled). . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 oz.
The best results are obtained from wet
dressings by saturating the gauze, which is
placed on the wound, every thirty or forty
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 73
minutes with the solution. The boric acid and
salt deposits around the wound will aid in the
granulation which is so essential to the healing
processes. Do not remove the gauze from the
wound during treatment but continue to apply
the liquid so that the wound will be kept moist
and the gauze kept free from adherence to the
wound.
Boric Acid Solution—Boric acid (saturated
solution) is a splendid liquid with which to
irrigate an infection before the application of
the wet dressing. When irrigating a wound,
use the boric acid solution hot. Pour it over
the infected area and catch it in a pan under-
neath. The same solution can then be reheated
and reapplied again in the irrigating process.
SPECIFIC MANIPULATIONS
Exerting Deep Pressure Upon the Back to Relieve
Pain.
During the Spanish-American War, the
natives of the Philippines taught the American
Soldiers a mechanical way to relieve dysentery.
They would throw an army blanket over a log,
six or eight inches in diameter, and stretch
across the log on their backs with the small of
the back in proximity to the log, the head and
shoulders touching the earth on one side of the
log and the feet and legs, on the other. By
maintaining this position for five or ten minutes
Plate
| 22

74 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
at a time, they could temporarily relieve their
pain and the inconvenience accompanying their
condition. -
Today the same temporary relief can be
effected in such conditions by similarly stretch-
ing across the edge of a bath tub or other con-
venient object. When the object used for this
purpose is at too great a height to touch the
head and shoulders to the floor while exerting
the pressure to the small of the back, stretch the
arms above the head and retain this position
for several minutes at a time—as long as is
compatible with comfort.
Or, as shown in Plate 122, a more specific
relief can be obtained by exerting deep pressure
with the cushions of the thumbs and index
fingers upon whatever vertebral area is involved.
The area to be treated depends wholly upon the
location of the affected regions and its resultant
nerve supply.
| Such pressure stimuli are very effective in
cases of diarrhea as well as in dysentery, in
abdominal cramps, nausea, staleness and con-
stipation, and also in the relief of cases in which
a player has received injury to the generative
Organs.
The method of applying this deep inhibitive
pressure to the vertebrae is very simple indeed.
The only prerequisite is a workable knowledge
of the fundamental laws of anatomy. The
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 75
Plate 121, Manipulation for Correction of Wrenched Back.
Plate 122, Method of Exerting Pressure to Relieve Pain.

76 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
position and location of the trainer's hands in
Plate 122, designate the area that should be
treated when injury to the generative organs
occurs.
In all mechanical pressure upon the spine for
the relief of the various ailments indicated, the
pressure should be administered as an alternat-
ing pressure and release movement. The con-
tinuation of the deep heavy pressure should vary
in time lengths, from twelve to fourteen seconds;
and each release should vary in length, from
three to five seconds. In cases in which the
stomach and intestines are involved, each pres-
sure should be continued or maintained from
thirty to forty seconds, and each release or rest,
about ten seconds. In any case, all such pres-
sure and release movements should be repeated
until relief is obtained.
All pressure stimuli are transmitted from the
spinal sensory nerves through the white rami
communicantes (connections between spinal and
sympathetic nerve systems) to the sympathetic
system which conveys the stimuli through its
various plexuses to the nerves of the parts in-
volved. e
There are four definite spinal regions which
should be specifically treated for certain in-
dicated ailments or injuries. They are as
follows: (1) The cervical region, which com-
prises the area from the base of the skull to the
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 77
lower part of the neck at its juncture with the
trunk (first seven vertebrae). This area con-
tributes the nerve supply to the neck, shoulders,
arms, forearms, wrists, and hands. Manipula-
tions correctly exerted in this region will mini-
mize ailments of these parts.
(2) The dorsal or thoracic area, which com-
prises the area from the lower point of the
cervical region to the beginning of the small
of the back (twelve vertebrae). This area
contributes the nerve supply to the heart, lungs,
liver, stomach, and intestines. If the function-
ing of these parts has been perverted, manipu-
lation in this region will aid in restoring their
normal activity.
(3) The lumbar region, which begins at the
end of the thoracic area and extends through
the small of the back to the fixed posterior wall
of the pelvis. This area contributes the nerve
supply to the anterior surfaces of the thighs,
legs, ankles, and feet, as well as to parts of the
generative apparatus and to the colon. Deep
inhibitive pressure in this region, along with
other manipulation, will relax contractures and
Cramps.
(4) The sacral region, which comprises the
flat area between the two innominates and ex-
tends to the coccyx (last vertebrae of the spine).
This area really contains but one vertebra,
which before ossification took place was five
78 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
separate vertebrae. This region contributes the
nerve supply to the posterior parts of the hips,
thighs, legs, ankles, and feet as well as to the
pelvic and generative organs. Deep pressure
manipulations to these parts will reduce pain
after injuries to the testicles and other genera-
tive organs as well as affections and injuries to
the thighs, legs, ankles, and feet. The pudic
nerve which arises in this area and supplies the
generative organs, is affected by pressure upon
the third and fourth sacral nerves.
A pressure upon the first and second verte-
brae of the lumbar region will also affect the
ilio-inguinal and the genito-femoral nerves,
which control the nerve and blood supply to
these parts. -
In cases of injuries to the testicles and other
generative organs, this method of deep pressure
relief, repeated as outlined, will quickly ease the
pain caused by the blow, and the player will
get back into the game in full physical strength
in a few minutes.
For the relief of nausea, acute indigestion
and its attendant uneasiness between attacks,
exert a deep thumb and finger pressure upon the
seventh and eighth thoracic vertebrae. You can
easily locate this vertebral area by running your
fingers across the back in a straight line, from
the lower angle of one shoulder blade to the
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 79
other. In this movement, your finger will cross
the spine near the seventh or eighth thoracic
vertebrae. ... • -
By exerting deep heavy inhibitory pressure
with the palms and heels of the hands upon the
nerves of the lumbar and the sacral regions,
dysentery, diarrhea, and cramps in general can
be relieved. -
Sometimes just before the game, due to
nervousness or other causes, a player will suffer
a severe acute attack of diarrhea. Deep pres-
sure exerted over the area of the lumbar region
(identically located in Plate 122) will usually
give immediate relief. -
Too, vague as it may sound, the stomach and
small intestine can be aided, indirectly, in re-
gaining their normal function by mechanically
kneading the common carotid artery sheaths on
both sides of the front of the neck. The vagus,
or the tenth cranial nerve, which is one of the
principal nerve supplies to the stomach and
small intestine, lies in this same sheath. For this
reason, an inhibitory pressure upon this sheath
will affect the stomach and the small intestine.
This vagus nerve, called the tramp nerve by
anatomists because it is such a body-wanderer,
also supplies the larynx, pharynx, heart, lungs,
and liver. Therefore, stimulations or inhibitions
to it are far-reaching in their effects.
80 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Massage for the Relief of Constipation and
of Staleness
Athletes can do much for each other by trad-
ing manipulations after scrimmages One
player can massage or knead the entire set of
back and spinal muscles for another player who
will lie relaxed and prone upon his abdomen.
The many tender areas and contractures in the
deep heavy layers of the muscles of the back
will respond readily to such daily treatment.
Teach your players the art of this work, and
in a short time the men will pair off without any
solicitation on your part and reciprocate manipu-
lations and massages. There is too much rub-
bing and slapping of the skin rather than firm,
heavy, kneadings of the deeper tissues, combined
with full rotations of the hip and shoulder
joints. A little time spent by the players in
this routine each day will virtually destroy
every semblance of the menace of constipation
among the players.
By such a routine relaxation each day after
the grind of practice, staleness among the men
can be thwarted and usually averted. A gentle
springing of the spine and a deep massage of
the heavy muscles of the back will send the
athlete home each evening in tip-top physical
and mental condition.
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 81
Method of Raising Depressed Ribs
Instructions—In these directions let us assume
throughout that the trainer-coach is the oper-
ator. Face the player who is lying on his left
side. The player should flex his thighs and
draw his knees up toward his abdomen. Such
a position will anchor his body and keep him
from being pulled over on his abdomen when
traction is exerted upon the arm and upon the
angle of the ribs.
The player's right arm should be thrown
limply over your right forearm and arm.
Now place your left hand over the angle of
the player's right ribs and sink the cushions
of the fingers deeply and firmly into the heavy
tissues of the back, as shown in Plate 118.
Then with a slow stretching process, draw
the player's right arm forward and, at the same
time, cause a downward and forward pull at the
angle of the ribs. By holding this advanced
position for eight or ten seconds, you can relieve
a so-called stitch in the side or a pressure from
a depressed rib, possibly acquired in a scrimmage
collision. -
In like manner, you can move your left hand
along the spine to the angle of each rib and
each time repeat this stretching process, until
every rib has been lifted. w
A more decided stretching and lifting of the
depressed parts can be obtained by having some
Plate
| |8
82 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
one stand at the back of the injured player and
encircle the crest of the player's hips with his
hands and arms. This assistance will fix the
position of the hips and facilitate a greater
separation of the ribs, when the player's arm and
shoulder are brought forward. - -
If still greater traction is needed in this
manipulation, you can, by moving one step
farther to the right and leaning in the same
direction, throw your entire body weight away
from the player and thus exert an extreme
tension in this stretching process. -
To briefly explain scientifically, what you will
have accomplished by this type of manipulation:
By the manipulating process that you have em-
ployed, you have stretched the latissimus dorsi
muscle which has its origin in the spines of the
lower thoracic, lumbar, and sacral vertebrae, the
crest of ilium, and three or four lower ribs, and
has its insertion in the bicipital groove of the
humerus (upper arm). You have also manipu-
lated the serratus posticus superior muscle,
which has its origin from the spines of the
seventh cervical and the two upper thoracics and
its, insertion to the second, third, and fourth
ribs; and the serratus magnus muscle which has
its origin in the eight upper ribs and its inser-
tion into the inner margin of the posterior
border of the scapula (shoulder blade). By
stretching these three principal muscles, which
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 83
Plate 118, Method of Raising Depressed Ribs.
Plate 119, Method of Manipulating Tackle Shoulder.
Plate 120, Manipulation for Correction of Charley Horse.


84 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Plate
| 19
have their origin along the spines of the verte-
brae and in proximity to the union of the ribs
and the spine, and their insertion into the upper
arm and the shoulder blade, you can readily see
how the elevation of the ribs will be effected.
Method of Manipulating a Tackle Shoulder or a Lame
Baseball Shoulder
Do not manipulate the tender area at first.
Work the uninvolved area until the adjacent
tissues have been thoroughly loosened and the
blood supply thereby increased and the pain
lessened. An electric heating pad is an ex-
cellent adjunct to the treatment of this type of
injury, in which there is extreme tenderness of
the part.
In preparation for this manipulation, the in-
jured player is in a position identical with that
shown in Plate 118. His right forearm, with
its accompanying hand dropping over as an
anchor, is thrown limply across the trainer's
right forearm. In Plate 119 the trainer has
changed his position somewhat from that main-
tained in Plate 118. His right hand in this
movement bridges across to the player's neck
and shoulder muscles. &
Instructions: First, by shifting your left
hand out to the point of articulation of the
clavicle and the scapula, palpate and determine
the extent of the injury. Then, with your right
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 85
hand in the position previously indicated and
your left hand grasping the injured player's
elbow, push his arm down and back so as to
relax the heavy shoulder muscles. Keep your
abdomen pressed firmly against the player's
elbow, and thereby get an easier manipulation
of the heavy shoulder muscles.
Use your right hand for the delicate manipu-
lations of the brachial plexus, which is the main
nerve supply to the arm and shoulder and which
arises from branches of the fourth, fifth, sixth,
seventh, eighth cervical, and the first thoracic
nerves. In this manipulation of the plexus, let
your finger cushions carefully feel their way
into the tissues. Do not, when exerting the
finger pressure, punch or dig them. By a
thorough and gentle, though deep manipulation
of these tissues that involve the nerve and blood
supply to the injured parts, you can aid in re-
storing normal function to a crippled shoulder.
If the lameness of the shoulder should be in
the attachment of the muscles of the arm and
the scapula, instead of in the region of the
brachial plexus, use the left hand in the manipu-
lation of the joint. In this case, by bringing the
player’s forearm around to his back and letting
it rest there, you will have both hands free for
the manipulation of the joint.
86 - MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Plate
|20
Manipulation of the Leg to Correct a Charley Horse
in Back, Leg or Thigh -
Charley horse—“Stiffness of an arm or leg,
as of a baseball player.”—Webster.
* The Charley horse is the coaches' bugaboo.
It is interesting to recall the origin of the
expression “Charley horse.” Years ago when
“Muggsy” McGraw was playing with the Balti-
more Orioles, a number of the gambling base-
ball fraternity had been tipped off by a race
horse tout that a horse named Charley, who
was a long shot “sure” thing to win, was billed
to come under the wire a winner. Charley got
off in the lead, held it through the first, second,
and third turns, but when Charley came around
the last turn and into the final stretch, he pulled
up lame and came in a rank outsider. The
boys of the ball club, who had placed all their
earnings on Charley to win, were “broke.”
The next day, when the baseball game was in
progress, a quick-witted player, the like of
“Germany Schaefer,” was on the coaching line.
A young player hit a sharp infield grounder.
In trying to beat the hit out to first base, the
young chap “pulled” a tendon and was thrown
out by the infielder. The clever coacher on the
line—recalling his sad experience of the day
before when he lost his money on Charley—
shouted to the unfortunate player as he limped
from the base, “Ah-haw, just like our old
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 87
Charley horse!” From that day, the term has
been generally accepted for a certain type of
injury. It is a misnomer. Any contracture
(continued contraction) which is abnormal and
causes a knotting of the muscles is called a
Charley horse, and it may occur in any part of
the body.
In correcting a Charley horse of the thigh
or leg, you should place the player on a table
prone upon his back, with his body thoroughly
relaxed. As shown in Plate 120, the trainer
should stand on the same side as is the injured
leg of the player. Once in this position, encircle
the great trochanter of the femur with the
cupped fingers of your left hand. The player's
right knee should be placed in the left axilla
(arm pit). Your right hand with palms turned
upward should clutch the player's right ankle.
At this point, carefully follow the directions
for the final manipulation, for herein lies its
success. - . . . . .
Maintain a steady pressure with the left
hand on the trochanter and a riding downward
pressure on the knee with your arm pit and
shoulder; and contribute to the movement an
elevated lifting force with your right hand and
forearm. Now carry the player's leg and foot
in the extended median plane, up and outward,
toward the end of the table where his other
foot is extended. . .
88 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
This position must be maintained if such
types of injury are to be corrected. The move-
ment properly executed so sets the ligaments
of the pelvis that a correction is effected by
removing the predisposing cause of the Charley
horse. This predisposing cause is usually a
slight subluxation between the pelvic bone and
the back or sacrum. The exciting cause was
the blow or strain to the injured muscle or
nerve. If the nerve supply can be aided in its
functioning by an added blood supply, the
vitality of the injured part will soon be re-
stored; for the structure of the part largely
determines the function.
Manipulation of the Hip Bone (Os Innominatum)
To Correct a Wrenched Back
Plate When the injury to the front of the thigh
'*' (quadriceps extensor muscles) is so severe as
to preclude the flexing of the thigh upon the
abdomen, another manipulation in which the
trainer should use partial rotation of the pelvis
and thus effect a loosening of the deep muscles
of the back around the os-innominatum, is ob-
tained in the following way.
The Method—The player lying upon his left
side with his thighs flexed, faces you. The
player's injured leg and thigh are thrown across
your right shoulder. At this juncture, bring
your left hand and forearm under the player's
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 89
injured thigh with the cushion of your right
hand placed upon the crest of the player's
illium (front of hip bone). At the same time,
place your hand upon the player's back at the
articulation of the sacro-illiac synchondrosis
(juncture of innominate and sacrum). In this
adjustment, an assistant should hold the player's
left foot while you use a firm pressure with
both hands upon the player’s pelvis.
While performing the manipulation, keep the
left wrist and forearm in firm apposition with
the player's tuberosity of the ischium (lower
prominence of the pelvis). With your legs
spread apart, sway back and forth, carrying
the weight of the player's leg and thigh upon
your shoulder. As you move forward, close
your forearms, wrists and hands tighter around
the pelvic bone, and use a quick forward turn
upon the pelvis at the time of the most complete
relaxation of the player. Attempt in this move-
ment to push the pelvis around and forward.
For further manipulation of the deeper mus-
cular tissues, bring the right hand forward and
over to the small of the back. Then, by placing
the palms in the lumbar muscles, exert a heavy
traction with the finger cushions upon the small
of the back. Lean away from the player as
the manipulation is conducted.
90 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
“Pulled” Tendon
This term is generally a misnomer. The
so-called “pulled” tendon is usually an affection
of the posterior tibial or sciatic nerve. -
This accident most often happens to a track
man. The cool damp earth has much to do
with the tightening of the muscles of the legs
and thighs, for track men wear thin-soled shoes.
This fact, coupled with the frequent failure of
the track men to warm up before starting their
events, is the cause of most of these injuries to
the nerves. -
If an athlete would thoroughly stretch the
muscles of his legs, thighs, and back before
competing strenuously, he would avoid many
such injuries. The following plan consistently
executed will keep many an athlete on the track
who would otherwise be off with a “pulled”
tendon. - -
Stretching Exercise: Drive a heavy pole into
the ground so that it will stand about five feet
high. The runner in order to stretch his ham
string muscles should first hold to the top of
the pole with his left hand and kick his right
leg at full extension high above his head, about
eight or ten times; and should then alternate
the same movement by holding to the post with
his right hand and kicking in the same way
with his left leg.
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 91
This stretching exercise will not only increase
the runner's stride but will, if practiced con-
sistently, reduce the occurrence of “pulled”
tendons. Stretching makes the ham string
muscles more pliable and thus renders them less
susceptible to “pulls.” . . .
By manipulating the thighs and hips of the
athlete, rotarily, before he enters competition,
you will also aid in reducing the number of
such injuries, markedly. The relaxation of the
psoas, the glutei, and the ham string muscles
will go a long ways toward keeping a runner
in first-class condition. Should the athlete with
the “pulled” tendon be very lame, place an
electric heating pad in the small of the back
over the affected nerve area. Massage in the
Fmall of the back is also helpful, as the nerves
to the thighs and legs arise in this area. Com-
plete rest for a few days is the best course to
pursue with this injury. Some trainers advise
strapping the back of the thigh and leg with
adhesive tape, but this will not remove the
cause. Taping this injury means a treatment
of the symptom only. But with the cause of
the trouble removed, the athlete will be back on
the track in a few days; and if you will give
him proper care, he will be running in tip-top
form within three weeks. -
92 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Stitch in Muscles of the Abdomen
This painful injury usually results from a
twisted or a misplaced rib which affects the
ventral divisions of the thoracic or intercostal
nerves. These nerves are, for the most part,
distributed to the walls of the thorax and ab-
domen. Often a strain or wrench of the body
will cause an extreme tension on the abdominal
muscles. These muscles, being slightly inflamed,
will readily go into a state of contracture.
Such an injury is often mistaken for a torn
muscle.
If the pain is caused by an inflammation of a
nerve only and not by a torn muscle, by turning
a player thus afflicted on his side and flexing
his thigh up to his abdomen, you can so elevate
the ribs that the player will obtain relief at
once. If relief is obtained by such an elevation
of the ribs, it is evident that the muscle is not
torn. However, there is always danger of a
rupture of the sheaths of the abdominal wall,
and such an injury should always be treated as
serious until you are positively assured that it
is not.
If the pain is relieved by raising the rib, the
player will generally protest against idleness.
By allowing him some leeway in his desire for
activity, you will get an idea of the extent of
his injury. If the injury is at all severe, the
athlete will not force his movement, and you
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 93
can begin to expect a torn sheath, which will
require the aid of your team physician.
ATHLETIC HEART
Most of our athletic specialists agree that
there is no such thing as an athletic heart, but
that there is an athletic tobacco heart. Many
athletes use tobacco and indulge in other forms
of dissipation right up to the time of the train-
ing season. They then go into vigorous train-
ing, expecting to get into shape in a very short
while. The use of tobacco has already in-
creased the muscular walls of the heart, due to
the fact that the heart has been forced to
pump faster so as to eliminate the poison taken
into the system. Added exertion thrown on
such a heart during the athletic season causes
a further increase in its size.
Even a normal heart will increase in size
with continued and progressive exercise. So
should a normal heart decrease in size when the
player gradually trains-out at the end of the
athletic season. When the season ends, the
athlete should not stop his daily exercises
abruptly. In order to protect his heart in its
normal decrease in size, he should train-out in
the same way that he trained-in. When the
athlete trains out carefully, his heart under
normal conditions will subside to its natural
size,_unless he is using tobacco excessively.
94 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
But in cases where athletes use tobacco, the
hearts frequently remain large, and different
physicians diagnose them as athletic hearts when,
in reality, they are athletic tobacco hearts. No
good can come to an athlete by the use of
tobacco. On the other hand, great harm often
results. It is poor business to put a double
load in times of great stress upon the very
organ that keeps life itself pulsating through
our veins and arteries. The best pump is none
too good for a splendid athletic machine. If
any suspected trouble is encountered with the
heart, either functionary or organic, the player
should be put at once under the scrutiny and
observation of a reliable physician.
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 95
EMERGENCIES
Acidity of the Stomach
A player under great tension may awaken
On the morning of the game to find his stomach
Out of order. This is due to an excess of
hydrochloric acid, which condition is termed
hyperacidity. A teaspoonful of BiSoſ)ol taken
just before the meal will usually correct a
slight derangement of the digestive apparatus.
Another antacid that can be used with good
effect in such cases is a tablet composed of the
following ingredients:
- Calcium carbonate. . . . . .3% Grs.
Sodium chloride. . . . . . . . 1 Gr.
Magnesium carbonate. . .2% Grs.
This is a regular U. S. P. formula and can
be obtained at most any drug store.
If unable to procure the above-mentioned
antacids, prepare a half-teaspoonful of sodium
bicarbonate and a half-teaspoonful of sodium
chloride (table salt). These should be well
mixed, moistened, and washed down with a
drink of water.
Congestion in the Head (Catarrh)
This is often directly caused by the athlete's
failure to dry his hair and the nape of his
neck thoroughly, after taking a shower bath.
The players after work-outs are usually per-
spiring when they leave the dressing rooms.
96 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
By going out into the cold air while the pores
are still open, they can easily contract neuralgia
of the face and head, and catarrh of the res-
piratory organs.
The following treatment is splendid for such
conditions, especially when the congestion bor-
ders on hay fever or asthma: Use one dram
of menthol in two ounces of compound tincture
of benzoin. Put a teaspoonful of this liquid
in a half-gallon of boiling water. Then place
a blanket over the head, allowing the blanket
to reach down over the vessel. The inhaling of
the vapor rising from this mixture will clear
up the congestion and relieve the catarrh.
But the best treatment for catarrh is a pre-
ventive treatment. Care of the body to ward
off the exciting causes of the trouble is the best
kind of precaution that can be used, for no
treatment that can be administered will be a
cure. At best, all remedies for catarrh are only
temporary.
Massage of the muscles of the back of the
neck near the occiput will aid in the full return
of the circulation of the blood from the cranium
and, consequently, in guarding against conges-
tion. Likewise, a deep heavy pressure with the
thumb over the junction of the nasal and frontal
bones will serve to clear up the sinuses and the
nasal passages.
Alternate cold and hot packs on the back of
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 97
the neck will also increase the vitality of the
muscles of the neck and throat. Often a dash
of cold water on the face and throat, as a daily
habit, followed by a brisk rub with a Turkish
towel, will relieve troublesome cases of catarrh
of the throat and nose.
Chills
When an athlete has a chill, it is a bad omen.
His resistance is generally very low and many
times it is symptomatic of an attack of ton-
silitis, or some contagious or other infectious
disease.
When such an emergency arises, send the
athlete home, give him a hot lemonade, and put
him to bed. See that his elimination is cared
for. In all doubtful cases, see that a clinical
thermometer is used to get an indication of the
attendant temperature. If the athlete shows a
temperature, materially above 98 6/10 degrees
Fahrenheit, the team or family physician should
be notified, at once. If influenza is at all preva-
lent, such an attack may be a forerunner of this.
If the physician is delayed, use the following
measures until he can arrive. Get a gallon of
bran and pour boiling water over it. Then place
a woolen blanket over the athlete's head and
have him sit with the blanket over the vessel of
steaming bran so that he may get the full bene-
fit of the vapors. After one-half hour of such
treatment, the athlete should be put to bed.
98 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
The inhaling of the vapor as it arises from the
mixture of bran and hot water is a splendid
treatment for simple chills and congestions.
Tonsilitis, Sore Throats, and Infectious Colds
Dobell's Solution and Carrel-Dakin's Solution
are both excellent gargles to use for throat in-
fections and are splendid preventive methods as
well.
During periods of time when sore throats are
prevalent, a five-gallon bottle of some reliable
antiseptic solution should be kept in the train-
ing quarters of athletic teams and used as a
throat gargle each day, both before and after
practice. Often epidemics of sore throat and
tonsilitis among members of the team can be
warded off in this way.
A special price, which will make either of the
above-mentioned solutions reasonably inexpen-
sive, will be made by almost any druggist when
the solution is obtained in quantities of five
gallons at a time. A player who will use a re-
liable gargle during times of infections will very
likely be immune.
It is, however, necessary to handle the throat
wash in an aseptic manner. Paper drinking
cups are possibly the safest means. Although
the individual drinking bottles that are provided
in most places are very satisfactory. If these
one-half pint bottles, with their accompanying
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 99
wire delivery cases, are used, the throat wash
can be carried on the field to the players along
with other individual bottles of drinking water.
During some seasons, an entire team is
stricken with tonsilitis. Not only are the men
incapacitated during the time the disease is on
but are weakened for virile participation for
the rest of the season, and are also left predis-
posed to an attack of pneumonia.
Players affected with sore throats of the
mildest form should gargle with Dobell's or
Carrel-Dakin's Solutions, upon arising in the
morning, at noon, and again before going to
bed; and thus should strive to prevent an epi-
demic of infectious throats and their sequelae
among the squad members.
Hoarseness Due to Laryngitis—When the
duty of calling signals rests with a certain play-
er, he must be in good voice. Laryngitis can-
not be cured instantly. But in such cases as
intimated above, heroic measures must be used
to relieve the hoarseness for the period of the
game, at least.
A lump of sugar saturated with four or five
drops of chloroform and eaten slowly will re-
lax the muscles of the throat enough to enable
a player who is in such a predicament to speak
aloud. However, this measure must not be mis-
construed as a curative one. It is only palliative.
The effect of the chloroform is good only for an
100 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
hour or so and should not be repeated except in
cases of absolute necessity.
Grippe or “Flu”—If possible, refer severe
cases of grippe to the team physician at once, as
there is always the danger of pneumonia ahead.
Until a player so afflicted is taken care of by
a practicing physician, prescribe for him the fol-
lowing treatment; a hot bath, followed by an
alcohol rub; then a toasting of the feet; a gargle
with Dobell’s Solution; and into bed. Hot drinks
are often used in such cases and with good
results. ... •
See that attention is given to the elimination.
If the bowels are thoroughly cleansed, the vital-
ity of the individual will probably ward off the
seriousness of the attack. *
“Gym” Itch or Jockey Strap Itch
This disease is prevalent among athletes and
is caused by infection due to the use of soiled
jockey straps. It first appears on the inner side
of the thighs near the scrotum. Slight itching
and burning is present in the beginning, but
severe cases have been known to cause such an-
noyance that it would be impossible for the
afflicted one to sleep. A complete change of
underclothes and of all athletic equipment—es-
pecially the jockey strap—is the very first course
of treatment to pursue, as the infected area
can become reinfected.
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 101
Treatment: Use a soft brush or cotton swab
and cleanse the affected parts with liquid lysol
soap. Then paint the parts involved with a
2.5% solution of phenol (carbolic acid). This
solution will anaesthetize as well as antisepticize
the parts. Now apply the official formaldehyde
solution and let it remain for two or three
minutes, if the athlete can endure the necessary
pain. Then again paint the infected parts with
the 2.5% solution of phenol. Dry well and
apply Unguentine sparingly. This will serve as
an ointment as well as a lubricant for the sur-
face of the skin. Now dust boric acid powder
over the ointment and see that the player wears
a complete change of clean clothing.
Keep the infected player under observation;
and at the end of one week if there are any re-
current areas at the margins of the previously
infected region, treat them as before. Continue
such treatment once each week until the itch is
killed.
Two weeks is ordinarily the time required to
entirely obliterate this troublesome infection.
During convalescence, use an application of
ointment and dusting powder daily.
Ingrown Toe Nails
An ingrown toe nail will slow down an athlete
perceptibly. If the toe is suppurating, an ap-
plication of burnt powdered alum used every
102 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
night and morning will serve to dry up and
to constrict the wound. Use sterile gauze over
the alum to prevent any possible chance of
infection. . y
Do not resort to surgery for the removal of
the nail until you have given the following
remedy a trial. A removal of the nail by
minor surgery will in all probability incapacitate
the player as a participant for weeks.
Directions for Removing Ingrown Nails: Ap-
ply a 20% solution of nitrate of silver every
other day to the approximated sides of the nail
and skin tissues. Be very careful to leave no
excess of the liquid in the nail groove. The
tissues thus painted will turn black.
After three or four applications of the nitrate
of silver, you can easily dull dissect the painted
nail away from the firmer portion. The action
of the silver nitrate callouses the skin and dis-
integrates the nail. By several such treatments,
an ingrown nail can be removed without incon-
venience to the player’s participation in games.
tº . Hemorrhoids (Piles)
Troubles of this nature are so depressing to
an athlete that it is well to have some reliable
remedy at hand that may be suggested to the
athlete when he is in need of such advice.
Unguentine cones or vaseline, applied through
the sphincter muscle, will bring temporary relief
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 103
from such annoyance. Such ointments will re-
lieve the attendant itching and Smarting. The
lubrication of the walls will assist the veins of
the anus in properly discharging their congested
blood and, thereby, will relieve the attendant
pain by lessening the hemorrhoidal tumors.
Hiccoughs
Many remedies for hiccoughs have been con-
jured up throughout the years by our grand-
mothers of generations past. But the cause of
the hiccoughs was probably never carefully
weighed by those prescribing the remedies. If
the remedy, which was often coupled with more
faith than reliability, worked, it was handed
down to posterity as a hiccough cure.
Hiccoughs are caused by an irritation to the
phrenic nerve which in its turn causes a kicking
of the diaphragm. The phrenic nerve supplies
the walls of the diaphragm. Usually digestive
disturbances are the causes of the irritation to
the phrenic nerve and therefore the causes of
hiccoughs.
If a deranged stomach is causing the hic-
coughs, a teaspoonful of sodium bicarbonate
will sometimes relieve the condition. Or about
one-fifth teaspoon of sugar moistened by four
or five drops of cidar vinegar will often inhibit
hiccoughs. This latter method possibly relieves
the hiccoughing more consistently than does any
104 - MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
other home remedy in use. Try this remedy
first.
Sometimes a drink of water, taken without
breathing while drinking, will relieve the hic-
cough spasm. At other times, a sudden start-
ling of the patient will serve the purpose of re-
lief.
Or, steady inhibitive pressure upon the phrenic
nerve which is made up from the third, fourth,
and fifth cervical nerves will often quiet hic-
coughs. -
Still other remedies employed and often with
immediate success are as follows: e
(1) Depress the root of the tongue with the
handle of a tablespoon for two minutes.
(2) Catch the tongue with a clean handker-
chief and exert traction for cne or two minutes.
This is a very successful remedy for the abate-
ment of hiccoughing. If one remedy does not
work, continue in your hiccough repertoire until
you find the remedy that suits the idyosyncrasies
of the patient.
Toothache
A wisdom tooth or sometimes a crowned tooth
will give an athlete so much trouble before a
dentist can be found to treat it that it is well to
know how to relieve such pain. Such a conven-
ient knowledge may not only relieve suffering
ATHLETIC INJURIES AND EMERGENCIES 105
but may enable the player to continue in a game.
Remedy: Place a five-grain tablet of acetan-
ilid beside the aching tooth and let it dissolve.
This will generally cause an abatement of pain
until more definite remedial service can be
secured. ' - - - t
Eye Murine
This little formula is splendid for the relief.
of inflamed lids and especially when there is a
tendency toward granulations.
Sodium borate 6 Gr. (; . . . .
Boric acid 30 Gr.ſ" Aqua (distilled) 1 oz.
CHAPTER II
Preparations For The Season
THE GYMNASIUM
To Dr. James Naismith, originator of the
game of basket-ball, formerly of Springfield,
Massachusetts, Y. M. C. A. Training School, now
of the University of Kansas, goes the credit for
the erection of large gymnasiums. Before
basket-ball was introduced (in the winter of
1892), there were few large gymnasiums and
practically none with ceilings high enough for
basket-ball to be played.
On account of the proximity of the players of
this game to the spectators, it takes on a special
form of attraction. The weather never causes
a postponement, and the spectators have the com-
forts of the indoors. These phases of the game
along with others have brought it to a state of
popularity that has surpassed the originator’s
fondest dreams.
Large Gymnasiums—With an ever-increasing
interest in this indoor winter sport, which so
delightfully bridges the gap between footbali
in the autumn and baseball in the spring, colleges
all over the country began to combine their
auditoriums and their gymnasiums until now
many of our college and university gymnasiums
seat at a single game from 5,000 to 8,000 spec-
tatorS.
PREPARATIONS FOR THE SEASON 107
But the crowds continue to increase, and
the solution of the seating problem is still un-
solved. Last year the University of Kansas
basket-ball team played to 40,000 spectators
during the season. Many other schools, both
high schools and colleges, have similar attend-
ance marks in a single season. So the need for
greater seating space becomes more and more
pressing as the game continues to grow in
popularity. g
Athletic Field Houses—One of the newest and
perhaps the most feasible solutions of this basket-
ball seating problem is the innovation of athletic
field houses. These mammoth enclosures will
eventually solve the seating problem for basket-
ball games for many schools and will also pro-
vide more protected playing space for other
winter activities. In these gigantic gymnasiums,
approximately 15,000 spectators can be seated
comfortably at one time.
Portable floors are installed in these plants so
that they can be removed and a dirt base can be
used for other sports. Winter football, baseball,
and indoor track practices can be carried on in
these plants without any of the usual handicaps
of winter indoor sports.
Schools located in the larger cities have long
ago been forced to abandon their own gym-
nasiums and to play in the town coliseums or
in convention halls in order to accommodate their
crowds. Land grant schools have been more
fortunate in available seating space than have
108 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
many others, as they have converted their large
armories into basket-ball courts for their big
games.
Portable Bleachers—Due to the fact that space
in the average gymnasium must be economized,
knock-down or portable bleachers have come
into wide use. These can be purchased from
manufacturers, or they can be made at home at
nominal expense to fit the space desired. They
can also be used if needed for the outdoor
sports. -
These portable seats should have foot rests;
and no less than 17 to 18 inches of space should
be sold for each seat. These seats can easily be
placed on the balcony running-track also, pro-
viding the balcony is so constructed that it will
carry the extra load. An engineer should inspect
the running-track and pass upon its peak load
before bleacher seats are installed there.
Entertainment of Patrons Between Halves—
Owing to the packed condition of the average
basket-ball audience, where on account of the
close seating there are no adequate aisles for
exit, it is well to entertain the patrons of the
game between halves. This does away with
practically all of the former confusion and an-
noyance of people stirring about, crossing the
court, going out of doors, leaving doors open
and chilling seated spectators, getting in again
after the game has started, and trying to cross
the court while the team is on the floor.
PREPARATIONS FOR THE SEASON 109
Closing Doors Five Minutes Before Game—It
is a good plan to close the doors five minutes
before the game starts. Patrons may not like
this plan at first, but when they get the habit of
going early and learn to enjoy the relief that
comes from lack of disturbance by late arrivals,
they will welcome the change and would regret a
return to the old plan.
Women’s Physical Education Department
Stunts—Many interesting between-halves inno-
vations can be worked out for the entertainment
of the fans. Clever exhibitions by the women's
physical education department are always well
received. I say “clever exhibitions” because the
average basket-ball audience is quite discerning,
and mediocre stunts will not get across. But it
is surprising how flashy artistic stunts will
“pep” the crowd and increase their enjoyment of
the rest of the game. Good athletic dancing is
always well received. .
Boaring and Wrestling Entertainment—Three-
minute boxing or wrestling bouts by the School’s
best artists in these lines are also welcome spices
in this interim. -
Holding New Cheer Leader Tryouts—“Pep”
Crganizations can give variety to these occasions.
This is a splendid time for the next year cheer
leaders to try out. It gives the student body a
good chance to get acquainted, not only with
110 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
the prospective cheer leaders, but with each
other.
Decorating the Gymasium—A coach should
never be too absorbed in the game and its out-
come to forget the niceties in which audiences
delight. The gymnasium should be evolved from
the bare-wall cheerless place of previous days
into a studied room of life, warmth, and color.
The balcony rail bearing the pennants of every
opponent of the home team—of every team in
the conference—as well as American flags in
proper places, lends an atmosphere of life and
color that is well worth the pains that it takes to
prepare it. If the atmosphere of the playing
court is a thing of studied personality, with every
evidence of thought for the guests of the
evening, returns, not only in gate receipts, but in
interest and loyalty, will be the result. .
Recognizing National Days—If a game should
fall on a fete day or a national holiday, some
recognition should be made of the occasion.
Sometimes a two-minute talk by an outstanding
speaker of the faculty or of the town will
heighten the effect of such an occasion. Appro-
priate music is always a fine expression of
feeling for such a day. Patriotic reverence for
our national holidays is in perfect keeping with
true basket-ball spirit. Lincoln's and Washing-
ton's birthdays both come during basket-ball
season—one on the 12th and the other on the
22nd of February. Often basket-ball games are
PREPARATIONS FOR THE SEASON
111
After the final gun.
Kansas 16–Missouri 14.

112 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
scheduled to occur on or near these dates.
Recognition of such dates is entirely proper.
One Celebration that Worked—In recounting
such events, I recall a game that fell on the
22nd of February (Washington's birthday) for
which we used the following effective program.
It is presented merely as a suggestion.
This particular game with one of our con-
ference rivals was scheduled for February 22,
1923. Many of our students had gone home for
the holidays, but that did not mean that we
should make our game less attractive for those
remaining, We first made recognition of the
occasion by decorating the balcony rail with
large American flags and festoons of red, white,
and blue bunting. -
In that year, it happened that our team had
two sets of home uniforms—one set of red and
one set of blue. Their road uniforms were
white.
For this game we equipped three complete
teams of five each—one team of five being in
red, one in white, and one in blue. About five
minutes before the teams were to have gone
on the floor for the preliminary workout, they
lined up ready to march to the middle of the
court. A lad of eight, dressed in a white regula-
tion “gob” suit and carrying a large silk Ameri-
can flag preceded the line of march. Then came
the teams in single column in the order of the
PREPARATIONS FOR THE SEASON 113
colors of their uniforms—the red, the white, and
the blue.
As the college band struck up the first strains
of “The Star Spangled Banner,” the teams came
to a halt in the middle of the court and stood at
attention until the anthem was finished. Of
course, the crowd arose immediately, and the
spectacle was so impressive that it seems worth
passing on. The team, the crowd, the visitors,
all united in the demonstration—of one mind in
patriotic reverence, regardless of the outcome of
the game that was soon to be.
The entire feature did not consume more than
five minutes. It was just a way of saying to
our patrons, “This is Washington's birthday.
‘Lest we forget’.” -
It so happened in this conference champion-
ship game that we could see the lineups through
far enough to equip the team that was to start
in the red uniforms, the team that was to re-
lieve them in the middle of the half, in the white
uniforms, and the team that was to start the
second half, in blue uniforms. Our visitors on
this night wore uniforms of a color that did not
interfere with our using these three colors.
I should not recommend that this patriotic
display be carried to such length in the average
game. It so happened that these side lights
with their surprise element could be carried
through this once. However, the first five
minutes of this patriotic feature could be used,
114 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
time and time again, without injuring the team's
stride. But the continued feature of playing the
game through in the flag color scheme was
unusual, and as most coaches will agree, risky.
THE COURT
One finds but few college or university courts
now that are not regulation (94x50) so far as
area is concerned. The ceilings are also high
enough not to worry or confuse the visiting
team. Obstructions on the court, such as posts
and supports, have also long been passé.
The One-Inch Restraining Line—But there
are other difficulties that coaches must be con-
stantly annoyed with. Bleachers along the side
lines and at the ends of the playing court con-
tribute their hazard to the game. The desire
to seat as many people as possible causes this
cramped condition.
A one-inch restraining line put on in white
paint three feet inside of the regular two-inch
black side line has relieved the situation for the
passer when out of bounds. It gives him room
to operate. The restraining line holds the guard
back and permits the man, by rule, to pass with-
out being hampered by too close interference.
Remove End Obstructions—All obstructions
at the ends of the court should be removed at
least ten feet from the end line, as players going
under the baskets for tries at goal drive out of
bounds from eight to ten feet.
PREPARATIONS FOR THE SEASON 115
Mark Side Lines with Black Paint—Playing
lines should always be marked off with black
paint. This shows up better under artificial
light. When laying out other playing lines on
the court use white paint. This contrast is
readily discerned and does not confuse the vis-
itors in regard to the restricted area.
Two-Inch Tongue and Groove Flooring Essen-
tial in Construction of Basket-ball Floors—In
convention halls, coliseums, and other places
where new floors have been improvised especial-
ly for games, there is usually the annoyance of
faulty floor construction. These temporary
wooden floors are usually built over a concrete
floor base. Regardless of how many joists are
used under the floor surface, one-inch material
should never be used. Such floor construction
will cause great inconvenience in the execution
of the dribble, as the ball will not respond uni-
formly to the bounce. Two-inch tongue and
groove flooring will entirely eliminate this objec-
tionable phase. By explaining these facts to the
management of the coliseum or hall, the coach
or the director can usually get the type of floor
that he desires.
Keep Floor Waa: Off Court—Whether in pub-
lic halls where improvised playing floors are
used or in one's own college gymnasium, the
playing floor surface is nearly always a constant
Source of annoyance. In many schools the gym-
116 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
nasium floor is used for dances. While the
home team may get somewhat accustomed to
this handicap, it is a decided disadvantage to the
visitors. It is certainly a mistake to permit
dances to be given on the court during playing
Season. However, if the gymnasium must be
used for dances during other seasons, floor wax
should, by no means, be used. It is too hard to
renTOVe.
Borax powder is the best dancing floor powder
to use on a basket-ball court. Several moppings
will remove this, and the powder itself is an anti-
septic. Therefore, it lessens the danger of in-
fections from floor burns and skin abrasions.
Powdered Resin for Slick Floors—Often the
visiting team will sprinkle powdered resin on
the floor when going out to warm up. This
powder used freely compensates in a small way
for the disadvantage of slick floors. -
Mop the Court Often—In many places the
gymnasium is used for assemblies and drill
practices. Under these conditions the floor is
always coated with dust and should be mopped
every day. The moisture from the mopping
seals the cracks and removes the danger of in-
haling dust particles. This removal of the dust
also provides a more stable purchase for the fast
footwork of the player and keeps the ball freer
from dust—a condition which aids materially in
the execution of good finger technique.
PREPARATIONS FOR THE SEASON 117
LIGHTING, HEATING AND VENTILATION
Properly lighted courts are not in the major-
ity. Strong bright lights in the ceiling directly
above the baskets are abominable. The player’s
glance when shooting is always upward, and the
glare from a bright light will demoralize his
scoring ability. A diffused lighting system of
white light, with all fixtures well protected by
metal-wire guards, is the only practical one for
a basket-ball court.
The strongest lights should be in the center of
the court with ample provisions made for the
side lines and the corners. If there is a balcony
around the playing floor, lights can be placed
under this, as it is the correct height from which
to light the side lines.
Turn Heat Off for Games—On the nights of
the games the gymnasium is too often overheated
and too poorly ventilated. As a result both
players and audience are many times in great
discomfort. If the games are scheduled for
seven-thirty P. M. and a large crowd is ex-
pected, the steam should be turned off in the
gymnasium about five o'clock and all the win-
dows thrown open. The windows should be kept
open about one and one-half hours in order to
fill the gymnasium with fresh air for both spec-
tators and players. The heat should be kept off
all evening. In these closely packed audiences
the body heat generated by 5,000 people is
118 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
quite enough for physical comfort without re-
sorting to the heating plant.
Ventilators—Every gymnasium should be
equipped with ventilators to take care of the
foul air. Teams as well as crowds grow stale
in deoxygenated air. There is a certain simple
type of circular roof ventilator that can easily
and economically be installed. It is akin to
criminal negligence to equip a gymnasium where
packed audiences are expected, without installing
ventilators.
BACKBOARD, BASKETS, BALL
Material Used in Backboard—The rule desig-
nating regulation backboards says that the back-
board shall be made of wood, plate glass, or
any other flat, rigid material painted white.
Many conferences agree among themselves not
to use the glass backboards, nor backboards of
any other material except wood, as a change
from wooden backboards to glass or to other
compositions throws a basket shooter off his
shooting form.
Color of Backboard—The rule designating the
color, white, for the backboard is a very wise
provision, as the black rim of the basket stands
out in fine relief against white.
Sir Regulation Baskets—Every basket-ball
court should be equipped with six regulation
backboards with standard basket attachments—
PREPARATIONS FOR THE SEASON 119
two regular goals for use in scrimmage practice
and in games, and four extras for goal shooting
practice.
Two Specially Constructed Baskets—In ad-
dition to these six regulation baskets, it is well
to have two specially constructed ones to teach
accuracy in the push-arch shot. These can be
made by any blacksmith. Each consists of a
regulation basket rim on an eighteen-inch arm
extension and is attached to the backboard by
a flanged or bolted device to insure rigidity.
Two such baskets will give players who are
habitually steeped in carom shots a chance to try
something different. Such practice is essential
in the making of a versatile team, as there are
certain areas on the floor where the direct non-
carom shots can be used to great advantage.
Use Baskets Braced by One Steel Arm—
Baskets with the old-fashioned side braces have
practically disappeared. A new style of patented
basket is now in use which gives better satisfac-
tion in every way. Practically all dealers sell
this new basket or one that is similar to it but
does not infringe upon the patent. This new
type of basket is supported and braced by one
heavy steel arm which flanges and connects with
the basket six inches from the backboard. Sus-
pended from the metal basket rim is a net of
white hammock twine. These nets, if strapped
120 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
on with bicycle or adhesive tape, will last through
a full season of hardest usage.
Much criticism has been directed at these
white twine basket nets, either on account of
their wearing out too quickly or because they
would slip out of place on the rim of the basket.
Taping these nets to the rim does away with all
objections. The white twine nets give to the
game the decided advantage of contrast in color
—the white net and the white backboard and
the black basket rim. The white causes the
black basket rim to stand out so conspicuously
that it becomes an easy target at which to shoot.
Leather nets and heavy tape nets do not have
this advantage.
Use Medium Weight Ball—A regulation
basket-ball can weigh from 20 to 23 ounces. It
is a good plan to use a ball of medium weight—
from 21 to 22 ounces. A medium weight ball
will prepare a team for using either the minimum
light or the maximum heavy ball which an op-
ponent might introduce as a home game ball.
This precaution will avert the catastrophe of
throwing the players off their shooting form on
account of the difference in the weights of the
balls used in the various games.
On Dusty Floors Use a Ball with Oil in the
Leather—Any ball that answers the require-
ments of the rules is official. But there are
decided advantages to be gained under certain
PREPARATIONS FOR THE SEASON 121
conditions by using specific makes of balls. On
floors that are a trifle dusty, a ball that has
some oil in the leather is better, as the oil in
the leather takes care of the dust on the ball
and on the finger tips. -
Wash the Ball—When the cover of the ball
becomes too dusty or dirty, a good washing with
harness soap will renew its luster and activity.
This care of the ball should not be neglected,
as the contact of the finger cushions with a
clean ball assures better finger technique.
SCORE BOARD
Construction—A score board at each end of
the court, well out of the way of the players,
adds much to the general enjoyment of the game.
These score boards should be constructed along
the general lines of football score boards. They
should be about six feet high and four feet
wide so as to provide space for the lineup of
each team, names, numbers, and positions, the
progressive scores, penalties and violations, as
well as the names of the officials for the evening.
. These portable score boards should rest upon
the floor some ten feet outside of the court and
in line with the basket. They are best sup-
ported by triangular wooden brackets, the bases
of which rest upon the floor.
All temporary information given out on the
Score board, such as names and numbers of
122 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
players, etc., should be shown on galvanized
iron plates painted black and swung on metal
hooks from the back of the board. White water-
color letters and numerals should be used on
these plates. They will show up from all parts
of the court and can be used indefinitely. The
lineup positions will be permanent and should be
painted on the board with black paint.
Wooden Clock on Score Board—A large
wooden clock, the dial of which is marked for
the twenty-minute periods and which is large
enough to be seen from all parts of the gym-
nasium, can be placed upon the top of each of
the score boards. It is operated from the back
and indicates the approximate time remaining
to play.
Score Boards Introduce Personnel of Teams
to Crowd—The use of these score boards is an
excellent way to acquaint an audience with the
personnel of the visiting team as well as with the
home team.
In many places, local merchants have stimu-
lated basket-ball interest by offering substantial
prizes to the person picking the correct mythical
lineup for the all-conference team—the authentic
lineup in such cases having been picked by
certain designated sports writers who have come
to their decisions after much deliberation and
after many consultations with men in position to
know. When making these selections each coach
PREPARATIONS FOR THE SEASON 123
of the conference, as well as each official who
has handled the games, sends to the authorized
sports writers his pick of the first and second
mythical teams. Out of these lists, the sports
writers mold their mythical lineup. The contest
for picking the all-conference team should open
with the first game of the season and should
close with the last. One week after the last
game is played, the mythical lineup should be
announced.
It is not unusual to have several thousand
guesses recorded in a single college town. At
one store in a certain town last year, 146 per-
sons guessed the correct lineup of the first all-
conference team. They then drew for the
winner. -
With the introduction of the double round
robin schedules, together with the aid of well
operated score boards, basket-ball players are
definitely introduced to all patrons in their con-
ference. Stimulated interest and larger gate
receipts are the concrete results.
ARRANGING THE SCHEDULE
Selfishness in Schedule Making — Some
coaches, feeling that a bargain well made is
half won, place too much stress upon the ar-
rangement of schedules. It is instinctively
selfish for one coach in a conference to insist
upon the arrangement of his own schedule so
that his season will work up to a fine climax,
-- 124 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
when such insistence will undoubtedly incon-
venience others of his conference associates. It
would be next to impossible for every member
of his conference to plan so happy a schedule—
especially would the weaker members of the
conference be handicapped by such an arrange-
ment. -
Schedule Committee—The longer I work with
coaches arranging their individual playing
schedules, the more firmly I become convinced
that the arrangement of schedules should be
taken entirely out of the coaches' hands, as
individuals. g -
Committee Does Away With Petty Bickerings
—It is a splendid plan to have a committee of
three, selected from the coaches' own group by
the members of the conference, to arrange the
playing schedule each year for the entire con-
ference. This plan put into practice does
away with the petty bickerings and small spites
that sometimes are carried over from year to
year and always rear their heads at schedule
making time. A schedule committee appointed
for this work should be thoroughly familiar
with traveling situations and other necessary
details of conference procedure. Such a com-
mittee will be, by the very nature of the appoint-
ment, put upon its honor to conduct itself for the
good of all. It will usually act in a big way.
PREPARATIONS FOR THE SEASON 125
Rotating Schedule Is Out of Realm of Jock-
eying Coaches—Once a suitable conference
schedule is arranged by the committee, it is very
simple to reverse the order of games for the
succeeding year, and, in the third year, to
revert back to the schedule made for the first
year. This establishes a system in schedule
making which is out of the realm of jockeying
coaches.
Double Round Robin Playing Schedule—A
conference or an association composed of nine
members (schools) makes an ideal organization
for a sixteen-game double round robin schedule,
which provides one game at home and one
abroad for each school with each school during
a single playing season. -
Friendliness Grows Under This Plan—This
plan gives the participating athletes an oppor-
tunity to visit each school in their conference
each year. These visits continued throughout
entire student generations promote feelings of
genuine friendliness among the schools, and
friendships among participating opponents that
often carry over into the business and pro-
fessional fields of later years.
Or Take Two Years to Play the Double
Round Robin—Conferences that do not care for
such an extensive championship playing schedule
as is indicated by a double round robin played in
a single year, can arrange to play it in two years,
126 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
by playing reciprocal games once every two
years instead of each year.
Framing Schedules—Regardless of the kind
of schedule arrangement made, see to it that
there is some provision made to guard against
a stronger rival scheduling all of his games with
weaker opponents and sidestepping the stronger
ones in order that he may be well up in the
percentage column of games won, and thereby
win a championship. Many paper champion-
ships are won in this way. A double round
robin schedule shuts out the possibility of a
greedy coach framing his schedule for a list
of wins. A coach playing a double round robin
in a single year learns to rely only upon
endurance and skill. A championship thus won
is incontestable, and the victor must be worthy
of the spoils.
Coaches Jockey for Second Semester Men—
Under former methods of schedule making,
when each coach worked out his own schedule
and sought his own advantage, much jockeying
for time was done. For instance, if some star
players were to be eligible in the second semester,
the wily coaches would try to schedule with
their most formidable opponents during the
second semester. The new method of committee
arrangement does away with much, if not all,
of this seeking of advantage. A game coach
should be willing, for the good of his conference,
PREPARATIONS FOR THE SEASON 127
to play his schedule with the material at hand,
and at a time when it best suits the conference
schedule arrangement.
The Ideal Schedule—It would indeed be
difficult for the coach himself to try to define an
ideal schedule. The best schedule is a fair one
arranged by a competent committee with the
best interests of its association at heart.
Consideration for the faculty of one's school
should certainly be an item of much concern in
the arrangement of an ideal schedule. Plan to
save all of the players’ class time that you
possibly can. -
On account of being away from school the
least possible time, Thursday, Friday and Satur-
day are the best days for a three-game trip.
This gives Sunday for the players to get home
and to recuperate for class work on Monday.
The one-game trips are best arranged for
Saturday nights, as the team can, if necessary,
leave Friday night and arrive Saturday morn-
ing in time for a good rest before the game is
called. From four to eight hours in a town the
day of an away—from-home game is long enough.
Experience leads me to believe that one night
and one day spent in idling about the town of
your opponents is too long. Too many distract-
ing factors enter in to divert the players’ minds
from the real purpose of the trip, namely, the
game.
128 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Conduct of Team Away from Home—Meet-
ing fraternity brothers and former acquaintances
in the long interims before the game, mixes too
much pleasure with serious business. Keep the
minds of your players on the game to be played,
Do the pleasure seeking after the game is won.
All business and no “joy rides” before you
meet the enemy and make him yours, is a sound
admonition to those who are new in the game.
A team should plan to arrive in the town of
its opponents on the morning of the game, in
time to take a mile hike, to look the court over,
and to try a few shots at the basket, before noon.
Luncheon and a nap will take care of the after-
noon. There should be no leisure time for out-
side connections, or else your team may turn up
on the court minus its characteristic stride.
All-Conference Teams—Under a double round
robin playing arrangement, the all-star teams
are worthy of their places in the sun. The
patrons of the game all over the conference get
acquainted with the personnel of the various
teams and with the individual technical worth
of their all-star players; and they can, along
with the various sports writers who have
watched the games, intelligently pick the
superior performers whose names will be placed
on the mythical team.
No Official Championship Award—No con-
ference officially awards a championship. These
PREPARATIONS FOR THE SEASON 129
are always imaginary trophies. The news-
papers in their championship awards express the
fancies of the sports followers.
Comradeship of Mythical Team Mates—
When these star players are grouped together
in mythical array on the all-conference team
selection, a subconscious feeling Of comradeship
between the fortunate players of the schools
represented arises and interlinks the lives of
these men, in this one aspect at least, for all
time.
There is little danger of spoiling a man by
placing him on an all-conference team. He
has probably learned by the time that he reaches
there, through the ups and downs that have
brought him this distinction, that it has come
through chance as well as through merit. He
will probably realize, also, that this effort to pick
the winners is but a symptom of the inherent
spirit of competition that is so thoroughly in-
grained in each of us. -
We play games to emerge as victors. The
player has a right to try to make the best player
in his position in the conference. This ideal
will develop his highest sportsmanship as well
as his most perfect execution. The spectators,
whether friends or foes, will sit en masse to
pass judgment upon him as a player. He is
well aware of this and competes with every
player in his conference for the approval of
the spectators.
130 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
The World and the Winner—The world loves
a winner, and after the season is finished, con-
ference enthusiasts wait anxiously for the press
notices of the mythical all-conference teams.
They will be anxious to see how many of the
championship team will be placed, through public
opinion, on this imaginary super-team.
The Playing Season—Most conferences limit
the number of games their teams are to play.
If permitted to start a playing season by De-
cember 15, a team can easily play sixteen to
eighteen games by the first or second week in
March. And if some of the games fall on
week-ends, as they should, very little class time
will be lost.
Christmas Holidays—Most conferences permit
their teams as many as two non-conference
games. Do not let the players have too long a
holiday period. From the time school is dis-
missed for the holidays until the day after
Christmas is long enough. However, there may
be exceptional cases. This holiday period is a
splendid time for intensive training, and for the
playing of a stiff non-conference game. The
players will learn much from teams that are their
superiors. A defeat on this holiday trip at the
hands of a non-conference team will be useful
in strengthening the team for the conference
schedule. The different styles of attack and of
PREPARATIONS FOR THE SEASON 131
defense that your team will meet in a non-confer-
ence game will add to your team's versatility.
Shape Your Men for Just One Game Ahead—
A coach should shape the minds of his men for
just one game ahead, and that always the next
game, whether easy or hard. This will help to
avert mental staleness—the bugbear of all high-
strung teams. - - -
The Coach Often to Blame for the Staleness
of His Team—Indeed, a coach is much to blame
if he permits his team to get stale. If he is in
any way disappointed over the arrangement of
the playing schedule, he must not let the team
know it. If the hardships of the schedule worked
out by the committee are evident to the team,
and the players should mention this fact, as
they undoubtedly will, the coach should dwell
upon the fairness of the committee and its
desire to put the best interests of the conference
above the interests of any single member, and
thus quiet any uneasiness in the minds of his
men. A coach should remove the nervous irri-
tation of worry from his players, who are prepar-
ing physically and mentally for a long grind.
He must reflect courage and fine determination
in dealing with his men. Even when things look
darkest, he must conceal his worries behind a
grin. He should radiate confidence and opti-
mism, and thus talk himself and his men out of
much of that mental state called “staleness,”—
which is often more imaginary than real. /
132 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
OFFICIALS AND OFFICIATING
Basket-ball is demanding better officiating
every year. Although still in its infancy, this
little giant of sport is calling outstanding men
in the athletic world to act as professional
officials. Many college athletes after graduation
turn to basket-ball officiating as an avocation.
After their own game days are over, officiating
becomes their hobby. They are reluctant to give
up the old experiences altogether.
An enviable athletic record back of an official
is a fine initial background. It gives him the
prerequisites of success. Audiences will be for
him, unless they have pronounced reasons to be
otherwise. .
Officials Need Not Have Been Athletes—
But an official need not have been an athlete
previously in order to make good; for the
official’s lasting success is measured by his
ability to control situations. The handling of
this game, when going at top speed, is by no
means a matter of mild administration.
The field of basket-ball officiating is not as
yet overcrowded, and is always in need of keen
students of the game who have a well defined
sense of fairness and a quick vision—men who
are earnest in their efforts to develop and to
protect this sport.
Remuneration—At best, the official's job is a
thankless one, with Small pay for the responsi-
PREPARATIONS FOR THE SEASON 133
bilities that are assumed. However, with
schedules arranged for games throughout whole
weeks of the entire season as is now done in
various conferences, officials can work approxi-
mately six nights a week during an entire play-
ing season at an average remuneration of $15
to $25 and expenses for each game. During a sin-
gle season of two and one-half playing months,
it is possible for the basket-ball official’s remun-
eration to aggregate $1,200 to $1,500.
Official's Job a Lonely One—In round num-
bers, this financial compensation seems ample
for the services rendered. But when one takes
into account the concentrated traveling ex-
periences, necessitated by trying to keep up with
basket-ball schedules, the overland trips by car
in wintry weather in order to meet appoint-
ments, and the vague, indefinable loneliness of
heart of an official during the season, financial
remunerations, however pleasing, cannot wholly
atone. -
When traveling from one town to another,
an official frequently meets a team for whom
he will work that evening. He cannot con-
scientiously, nor consistently, fraternize with
either coach or players enroute. If they in-
dicate an unrestrained chuminess toward him,
much as he should desire this friendliness under
other conditions, he will be forced by the nature
of his mission to excuse himself from their
Company.
134 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
When the official reaches the town where he
is to work a game, he will be very unwise to
accept any hospitalities from the home team or
from their coach before the game is played.
At the gymnasium he must insist upon a
separate dressing room. It is imperative that
he not dress with either team.
A wary official, who is heedful of the back-
fire of games, will not discuss teams for whom
he is working, neither their merits nor demerits,
with anyone. His business is to run the games
on the court and not to render opinions off the
court until the season is over.
He must not permit coaches nor captains to
warn him of supposed illegal play of opponents.
An official can profitably inform such complain-
ants that he will watch every man on both
teams. This is his business—an unsociable one
at best.
Personality—An official must have a pleasing,
forceful and dominant personality. He must
be clean, courteous and courageous. He must be
a good judge of human nature and must have
an established reputation for honesty and fair-
ness. His personal, business and professional
life should be above whisperings. He should
be in tiptop physical condition so that he can
follow the ball closely during the entire game.
In short, he must at all times be able to com-
mand the respect of players, coaches and
PREPARATIONS FOR THE SEASON 135
audiences. While at his work, he should be
considered in the light of a high-grade specialist.
Spectacular Officiating Undesirable—A true-
bred official will submerge his own personality
into the play of the teams. He will not over-
shadow the play of the game by any of his
own spectacular gyrations, however versatile his
repertoire. A basket-ball audience goes to see
a basket-ball contest during the playing periods,
and not a vaudeville. However, an official, with
something out of the ordinary in stunts, might
display his talents, if called upon, between halves.
Appearance and Dress—An official must be
neat and clean in appearance. He should be
clothed in a uniform distinctive. White is no
longer a desirable color for officials to use, as
one team or the other is almost sure to use
white. In these instances, an official in white
confuses the team-passing. The official’s uni-
form should so stand out before the players that
the contrast will shout, “Don’t pass to me.”
In many conferences, the officials of the game
wear standardized outfits. This move is in the
right direction.
Knickerbockers, instead of long trousers
should constitute part of an official’s correct at-
tire. They do not bind at the knee, as do the
Exhibit
S-1
long trousers, and they give the referee a more
agile appearance upon the floor. Much of the
official’s hidden power lies in his appearance
136 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
on the court. He wants
to be able to get his
decisions across to the
audience and to have
them accepted in the
spirit of fair play. To
do this, he must muster
into service his every
available asset. His
court a pºp e a ra n cle
should be a studied
thing instead of an un-
important detail. In-
nately, an official de-
sires to please the
Exhibit S-1
Showing officiul in correct crowd.
officiating attire. The Umpire - The
umpire in a basket-ball game has a much easier
time than does the referee. The umpire's para-
mount duty is to keep the back court free. Play
and decisions are not so complicated there,
and the ball in its vagaries does not bother the
umpire much, unless he should be called upon
to give a decision to substantiate that of the
referee.
The Referee—The referee is the superior of
ficer of the game. Upon him depends the tone
of the contest. He can carry the game along
when it is dragging, by retrieving balls quickly,
and by pleasantly urging both teams to speed
up their game.

PREPARATIONS FOR THE SEASON 137
The referee must make quick, determined, con-
fidence-instilling decisions, when disputes over
the rules cloud the horizon. He cannot afford
to make a mistake in his interpretations; for,
aside from the wrongful loss of the game to
one side or the other, he would, by a mistaken
decision, suffer irreparably as an official.
Referee Must Know the Rules—It, therefore,
goes without saying that it is a referee's first
duty to know the rules—backward, forward,
and upside down.
Many times, referees have accepted the re-
sponsibilities of important games without first
mastering the rules. Such referees may have
played in many intercollegiate contests and, in
their day, may have played great games, without
ever having had a thorough knowledge of the
rules. No official should accept the responsi-
bilities that the work of officiating carries with
it without first having served an apprenticeship
of officiating in at least a hundred practice
games. He will then, if he has a fair amount
of native ability, be worthy to accept the fee
that goes with an important match. A serious
blunder in a referee's first game may forever
end his career as an official.
True to the laws governing development, of
ficials improve with experience. Tight decisions,
night after night, make officials more competent
as well as more confident. They rarely make
138 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
the same mistake twice. Year after year at
their regularly organized officials meetings, many
moot questions that have arisen during the year
are brought up for open discussion, and bring
decided benefit to all—especially to men who are
new in officiating and lack the confidence that
experience will bring.
For instance, if an argument over a score
should arise between the managers of the two
teams, and no official scorer had been previously
appointed, the referee must be so seasoned by
experience that he will immediately be ready to
decide in favor of the smaller score. Or if an
argument should arise over a difference in play-
ing time, the referee must unhestitatingly decide
in favor of the longer playing time. Whatever
the crisis, the referee must be seasoned enough
to meet it unflinchingly,–if he expects to make
good.
The Coach's Duty to the Referee—The coach's
first duty to his school and to himself is to select
a referee to whose judgment he is willing to en-
trust all the hazards of the game. The coach
must believe in the official he has chosen. It
then becomes his duty as host to protect this of—
ficial from all the invasions of a thoughtless and
sometimes hostile crowd. -
Due largely to the simplicity of the playing
rules and also to the close proximity of the play-
ers to the spectators, the average basket-ball fol-
lower is much better versed in the playing rules
PREPARATIONS FOR THE SEASON 139
than are the average followers of other sports.
Therefore, the popularity of the official who
makes an error of decision in this game, as he
undoubtedly will at some time, is in much greater
jeopardy than in any other sport.
The average basket-ball audience is not
schooled in charity. Spectators in their excite-
ment forget that there is no animosity in the
referee's mind, when he calls a foul on a man
for an infraction of the rules. Too often, they
take the referee's decision as a personal affront
to a player of the home team.
The only salvation for the sportsmanship of
many audiences throughout the country, lies in
a sort of an extension training course, wherein
sportsmanship can be ingrained while the
audience is unaware. -
Teach the crowd, in its saner moments, by
means of printed forms and otherwise, the real
meaning of sportsmanship. Programs, bearing
pictures of the stellar players of the conference,
will help to remove the altogether too provincial
aspect from the game. A game, instead of con-
tributing to narrowness of mind, should broaden
the point of view. Information concerning
changes in the rules can also be included in these
pamphlets. These changes will be scrutinized
by many patrons before the game starts.
Spectators Must Be Tolerant—When in a
fiercely contested game, play after play, travels
with such unchecked swiftness, decisions must
140 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
come equally as fast. This fact always carries
its chance for the best of officials to err.
Spectators must awaken to the difficulties con-
fronting referees in games; and, however dis-
heartening a break may be on account of an
official’s error, they must learn to make allow-
ances and to accept the chances that the game
may bring. The game and the sport that it brings
is the thing worth while, and not the winning—
especially, at the sacrifice of one's sportsman-
ship.
The coach or the director of the home team
is, to a great extent, responsible for the crowd's
courtesy to the officials. If discourtesies are
forced upon the official, the least the coach can
do is to ask that the game be halted and then
to take the floor in defense of sportsmanship.
The coach in such a position should inform
the crowd that this referee was selected to run
the game, by men who believed in his compe-
tency and fairness; furthermore, that his
decisions must be accepted as coming from a
man whose courage and judgment entitle him to
the respect and the courtesy becoming a college
audience.
It would be needless to discuss the possibility
of the unfairness of a seasoned official. He has
spent years in building his reputation of honesty
and efficiency. It would be foreign to all
processes of logical reasoning to think that he,
PREPARATIONS FOR THE SEASON 141
by one false act, would tear down what he had
been so long in building. -
Coaches, who find it hard to believe in the
integrity of officials and who, on this account,
find it especially difficult to select them, would
do well to work a few games themselves; and,
by so doing, strengthen their faith in the offi-
cial’s honesty of purpose.
The Duties of the Referee Before the Game—
If the referee is sure that the measurements of
the court are correct, and that the baskets con-
form to the requirements of the rules, it is best
for him not to appear on the court until about
two minutes before time for the game to start.
But he must be punctual. A tardy referee is
demoralizing to the game. He upsets the whole
works—players, coaches, and spectators alike.
In the early part of the basket-ball year a
referee who will be seen on the home court sev-
eral times during the season is justified in seek-
ing a friendly relationship with the crowd. It is
well for him, at such times, in a short pre-
game talk to discuss the changes in the rules,
the violations, and the penalties with the audi-
ence. An enlightenment of the crowd brings
about greater interest, and consequently greater
gate receipts. And if the official can indulge in
this bit of friendliness with the crowd the road
is made easier for him. Indeed, there is no
reason why an official should be considered an
142 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
enemy to either team, and every reason why he
should be considered a friend; for, throughout
the season's strenuosities, a true-blue official
forms whole-hearted admirations for many
players that he sees in action upon the various
COurtS. -
In the event that there are no pre-game an-
nouncements to make to the audience, about
two minutes before the game starts the Official
should go on the floor, designate the official
timer and scorer, and then call the two captains
of the competing teams together for final in-
structions.
The Referee in the Game—The referee must
announce his decisions in a clear, Snappy man-
ner. He should designate the player making the
foul by placing one hand upon the offender and
by raising the other high above his head. When
calling personal fouls, he should make the
spectators fully aware of the nature of the foul
by a gesture, which will simulate the foul.
Referee at the Tip-off—Both hands should be
used in throwing the ball up at center, as this
execution is much more accurate than if one
hand only is used. An alert referee will have
plenty of time to get out of the way of the
players after the toss-up, as the rule states that
the referee “shall blow his whistle when the
ball reaches its highest point.” This height must
be greater than either of the men can jump—
PREPARAtions for THE SEAson 143
after which the ball must be tapped by either
one or both of the center players. This gives
the referee time to slip behind the shorter of
the two jumpers (as the taller man will usually
control the tip-off) and be out of the receiving
lanes before the play comes his way.
At center, it often happens that one of the
players, just before jumping, steps back with one
foot out of the circle. This is a violation of the
rules. The referee, by lightly tapping the of
fender's tendon Achilles with the side of his foot,
can force the jumper into the circle before the
ball is thrown up.
Exhibit S-2
Referee standing in proper location to put a held ball near the
side line into play.
The Referee on Held Balls—The referee Exhibit
should always keep the inside court clear for




144 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
play. If a held ball is called near the side line,
the referee should slip through between the two
players and stand toward the side line This
act frees three areas in which the players can
tip the ball. If the referee tosses the ball while
he is one the inside, he would close one of the
most vital playing areas. Exhibit S-2 shows
the referee in proper position on this play.
The Referee and the Dribble—The referee
should not crowd a dribbler. The dribbler's pivot
and back pass to a trailer would throw the offi-
cial in an awkward position. Neither should the
referee be too far in advance of the dribbler; for,
if the team that is using the dribble is advancing
against a set five-man defense, the referee, while
watching the ball, will suddenly find himself
backed down against the first-line defensive wall.
Invariably, this act will block one of the de-
fensive men off and will give the offense an
advantage that they have not earned. In such
an instance, the referee should cut out toward
the side line and be ready to cut in behind the
defense when the attacking team takes a try
for the basket.
The Referee on Out of Bounds—When the
ball is out of bounds, the referee need not run
to the exact spot to order the ball played in. If
expedient, he can stand in the center of the
court, on a line with the spot where the ball
went out, and denote with his arm and hand the
PREPARATIONS FOR THE SEASON 145
exact spot where the ball is to be played by call-
ing out, for instance, “Play, Nebraska.”
In crowded halls where pandemonium reigns
and the official’s voice and whistle cannot be
heard above the din, ribbons which denote the
school colors of each team can be worn on the
referee's wrists to serve as signals. In this case,
the referee will signal the team that should
take the ball on the out of bounds, with the arm
bearing that team's color. In this way, much
delay and difficulty can be avoided, and much of
the official’s vocal power can be saved.
Final Hints to Officials—Many referees in
their travels acquire the reputation of being
“homers”—that is, of giving the benefits of
their decisions to the home team, and in this
way continuing in popular favor with home
audiences. There is no greater mistake made in
“officialdom” than for an official to do this, and a
“homer” cannot properly belong on lists of first-
class officials. Such seeking to win popularity
at the expense of one team or the other is utterly
unfair, both to other officials and to the teams
for whom he works.
There is another type of official who is a
menace to the game. He is the one who con-
sistently goes on the court looking for trouble.
He is always showing his teeth. He is the
file instead of the oil cup in the machinery, and
146 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
is never very popular with coaches, players, or
audiences.
The interest that such officials have in the
sport resolves itself into how much financial re-
muneration they can realize from it, and not into
how much fine service they can put into it.
The popular official is the one who devotes
himself cheerfully to his task, and, oblivious of
crowds or of comments, renders his decisions
decisively and fairly.
EQUIPMENT OF PLAYERS
The best in a player's equipment is none too
good. Neat, well-fitting and durable basket-ball
outfits enhance the players' chances of winning.
They look the part of champions. It is then up
to them to acquit themselves as such. Legiti-
mate competition in appearance is a natural and
desirable thing. Clean competition in athletics
is another.
We must not lose sight of the fact that the
patrons of the game are pleased at the spectacle
of two well-groomed, high-powered aggregations
struggling for Supremacy. The players are
the picture; the spectators, the background.
Two Sets of Uniforms Desirable—A team
should have two sets of uniforms—one for use
in practice, the other for use in games. This
separate outfit for practice helps to keep the
one used in the games new and clean, and
PREPARATIONS FOR THE SEASON 147
the men get the psychic effect of feeling well
dressed for the game. When soiled, these out-
fits used in the games should be dry-cleaned,
as tubbing will cause the vivid colors used in the
suits to run. -
Launder Practice Suits Once a Week—The
practice outfits should be laundered at least once
a week. Clean outfits keep up the practice
morale. If reporting for practice day after
day grows irksome, the odor of clean outfits
does its bit to make the grind easier. Remember
this. e
Cotton Gymnasium Shirts—For practice, I
have found it expedient to use a cotton gym-
nasium shirt under a white regulation wool
jersey. The wool used day after day chafes and
irritates the players. During games, the regu-
lation wool jersey is all right, as the player in
his excitement will forget small irritations.
Shoes—The basket-ball shoe is the first thing
to consider in selecting playing equipment. An
athlete is no better than his feet. He must
be correctly shod to give to the game what his
coach has a right to expect. A medium-weight,
Soft, rubber-sole shoe with a heavy canvas up-
per and a toe-lace is the most popular as well as
the most desirable. Let the men choose the
weight of their own shoes, as most players have
well-formed opinions of what weight shoe suits
them best, and you will be taking an unneces-
148 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
sary risk by trying to re-educate the foot-tem-
peraments of the players. -
Some coaches use an extra heavy shoe in
practice and a light-weight shoe in the game.
Efforts are being made now with several shoe
concerns for the manufacture of a specially
designed practice shoe, with a thin lead plate
in sections vulcanized into a heavy rubber sole.
The difference in the weight of such a practice
shoe and the light shoe used in the game would
make the player when in the game feel as if he
had wings. - -
Rapid strides have been made by manufac-
turers in the construction of basket-ball shoes.
Formerly, all basket-ball shoes were made on an
overshoe last. But along with the constantly
increasing interest in the game came new atten-
tion to shoe construction. Now they are made
on a specific basket-ball last. Even the heels
are brought down to fit.
The secret of proper construction lies in the
fit of the shoe around the arch of the foot.
When the player rises on his toes ready for a
quick shift, there should be no lost motion be-
tween the foot and the shoe. No shoe on the
market at the present time has entirely taken
care of this defect. But any standard brand
of shoe takes cognizance of the three important
features—lightness, adhesion and durability.
Sulphur is used in the manufacture of all
rubber goods, For this reason, the soles of the
PREPARATIONS FOR THE SEASON 149
shoes should be washed with benzine or gasoline
just before the game starts. This removes the
sulphur and other particles from the soles and
opens the pores of the rubber, so that the sole
can hug the floor and give the player the proper
foot-purchase.
Mat of Powdered Resin–Many coaches use a
mat of powdered resin at the side lines to obtain
proper shoe adhesion. Belt dressing is another
method employed to get this same result. What-
ever method is used, the captain must obtain
permission from the referee for his men to step
off the court to treat their shoes when time out
is called, or else the player will get a foul for
leaving the court.
Inner Soles—Do not use stock inner soles to
fill up the extra space in shoes. These inner
soles will not fit the lasted shoes. They will
pinch at the sides and will cause blisters and
calluses. Get a snug-fitting shoe, and if at any
time the foot shows symptoms of hard wear,
use adhesive tape liberally over the area in-
volved. Tape before the skin is broken. If
there is play in the shoe, use an extra pair of
light wool socks to take it up.
Stockings—Wool socks give life to tired feet.
See that the athlete has them. Use a cheap
white cotton sanitary stocking next to the skin,
with the footless stocking over it, and a short
soft wool sock over these. These two pairs of
150 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
socks will allow the friction to come between the
socks; whereas, if only one pair of socks is used
with the footless stocking, the friction will
come between the skin and the sock, and will
cause a blister. -
If the players’ feet show much tenderness at
the beginning of the season, it is even better to
use two pairs of thin white cotton socks with
the all-wool sock and the footless stocking.
It is not necessary to have a basket-ball stock-
ing as long as a football or a baseball stocking.
The better plan is to have them made six inches
shorter than they are ordinarily, so that the
unnecessary bulk around the knee guard will be
done away with. Emphasize the use of knee
guards and stockings. There has been a ten-
dency to do away with the footless stocking.
This should not be done. Men wearing stockings
have two chances to find their team mates; while
men without have but one. In close scrimmage,
the color in the stockings often shows more
readily than does the color in the jerseys. Men
learn to play to the color in the jerseys and in
the stockings. Take away the stockings, and
you lessen the power of your offensive.
By using both stockings and knee guards,
players are apt to show more nerve in diving
for a loose ball. But, by all means see that the
stockings are kept clean. Much foot trouble
can be avoided by this care.
PREPARATIONS FOR THE SEASON 151
Suspensory—Every player should wear a
jockey strap while practicing or playing. This
will prevent injury and varicocele.
Have the suspensory laundered at least once
a week in order to prevent “gym itch.” Warm
water and ivory soap will keep the suspensory
soft and pliable. -
If the abdominal wall is weak, use a wrestler’s
abdominal suspensory instead of the lighter
jockey strap. This precaution might avert a
hernia.
Knee Guards—The best knee guard is a light
felt one with a small leather cap on the outside.
This cap protects the knee from bruises. A
strip of elastic at the bottom of the guard
serves as a supporter for the wool stocking. Do
not use a guard with elastic around the upper
part. This pressure against the insertion of
the ham-string muscle interferes with locomo-
tion. Two strips of leather sewed to the sides of
the felt will hold the guard erect, and the elastic
at the bottom will keep it close to the leg.
Jerseys—A woolen supporter-type of jersey,
buttoning under the thighs and over the jockey
strap, is the most suitable. This fits more
snugly, and the wool, by retaining the heat, keeps
the body from cooling too rapidly. Choose a
jersey with roomy openings for neck and arm
holes. Such a style gives more freedom of
motion.
152 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Teams that can afford them should have two
sets of woolen jerseys—one set white, and the
other of some brilliant hue, signifying the colors
of the school. Exercise care in selecting your
colored jerseys. White or some bright color will
show better under artificial light than will the
more sombre hues.
Two Playing Outfits If Possible—When teams
can be outfitted in two separate sets of playing
suits in addition to the practice outfits, the set
in color can be used for the home games, and
the white away from home. If it works no
financial hardship, this plan of having two play-
ing outfits is ideal. Several school conferences
have this arrangement as a standing agreement,
and thus avoid the necessity of preliminary
correspondence in order to eliminate confusion
in the colors of the players' uniforms.
Misfits Used in Practice Improve Passing
Wision—Often, in practice, I use uniforms at
variance with the team's regular colors, in order
to make it difficult for the men to find their
team mates. Sometimes we use misfits in any
color, so that the men will be forced in passing
to look for something other than color. This
improves their passing vision for close competi-
tion in games. Freshmen often wear their tradi-
tional opponents' Varsity colors. This gives
atmosphere to the scrimmage and encourages
PREPARATIONS FOR THE SEASON 153
traditional rivalry between your school and your
friend, the enemy. "
Pants—Flannel basket-ball pants are better
than the regulation cotton pants, because they
retain the heat around the hips and back, and
display more class on the court. With light
removable padding in the hips, with short, wide-
cut legs, and with laces either at the front or
sides to insure a snug-fitting waist, they are the
ideal pants. However, regardless of the mate-
rial used, the pants should be white in color.
When the colored shirt is used, the white pants
break the monotony and will often relieve a
color that does not have all the advantages of
optic attraction. If color is used on the pants,
it should be only a thin silk ribbon trim around
the leg and down the side seams, the same shade
as the jersey. -
Warm-up Outfit—No player's outfit is com-
plete without the warm-up suit. A race horse
is always blanketed when warmed up. So
should the athlete be. We designated an outfit
for a knitting goods house with hood attachment
on a two-piece woolen pajama suit, which fulfills
all requirements of a warm-up outfit. The hood
protects the back of the neck. The brachial
plexus, which controls the nerve supply to the
arms and shoulders, arises in the region of the
neck and must be protected, for so much depends
upon the action of the shoulders and arms in
154 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
this game. A fleece-lined hood stitched to an
ordinary sweat shirt will serve the purpose as
well as a specially designed outfit. During
practice, all men who are not active in scrimmage
should wear warm-up clothing. Many stars have
failed to come through because they have stood
around unprotected after practice. Neuralgia
will settle in the arms and shoulders and so
stiffen players that they will lose their best co-
ordinations. -
The above-mentioned articles of equipment are
all that a player needs. Discourage the use of
too much equipment. Additional equipment en-
cumbers men, both mentally and physically. It
is better for them to have too little in equipment
than too much.
Property Man—In connection with the play-
er’s equipment, I am mentioning the property
man. So essential is he in caring for the
players' outfits and for athletic supplies in gen-
eral that in a short time he will save the price
of his salary.
After practice hours, the equipment should be
checked in to this property man, who should
hang each outfit on an individual coat hanger.
At the next practice the property man should
check out the outfits and exchange clean equip-
ment for soiled. These clean outfits keep the
men in fine spirits and help to ward off what
coaches may mistake for staleness. The players’
PREPARATIONS FOR THE SEASON 155
street clothing should be kept in their own lock-
ers in the Varsity dressing room, and should be
cared for by the players themselves. The squad
should assemble and dress together each day.
On trips, the property man should care for the
players' outfits in regulation army barracks bags.
For a squad of ten men, two such bags are
enough for all outfits and for two practice balls
in addition. When starting on a trip, each
player should wrap his own playing equipment
separately and turn it over to the property man.
Each man should care for his “personals” in his
own traveling bags. This arrangement will
avert any confusion at the end of the trip, and
you will have the satisfaction of knowing that
none of your players are going to turn up short
of equipment at dressing time. The new men
on the squad should assist the property man
with the team luggage. .
This plan of checking-in to the property man
should work away from home, just as it does at
home. After the game, each player should check
his outfit back, for the property man to dry in
the hotel rooms. - -
When possible, combine the duties of your
property man and your team trainer into one.
One man handling the combined jobs will justify
the expenses of his trips. He will know the
various peculiarities of the men—their idiosyn-
crasies—and will be well fitted to design their
156 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
protective equipment, when necessary. He is a
good moralizer, and, when situations arise that
cause incompatibility, he is often a handy inter-
mediary between the coach and the players.
PRACTICE AND CONDITIONING
Two weeks after school has opened, call a
meeting of all men who expect to come out for
the basket-ball squad.
Arrange for Medical Examinations of All
Candidates—At this meeting, make arrange-
ments for a medical examination of every man
expecting to try out for the team. Make this
examination compulsory. If the coach is qual-
ified to give these examinations himself, it is in
his favor, as he can by this personal contact
strengthen the players' confidences in him. This
is an excellent time to begin to train fear out of
the players’ minds. Immediately, the men will
begin to feel that they will not need to worry
about their own physical well-being—coach will
take care of that. This creates a splendid foun-
dation for the strenuous acquaintanceship that is
to follow.
Whoever the medical examiner may be, he
must see to it that the player gets a thorough
examination of kidneys, lungs and heart.
Outline Your work—At this first meeting
with the candidates, a general plan for the
year's work should be put before them. Three
PREPARATIONS FOR THE SEASON 157
one-hour practices a week should be held, from
about the middle of October to the close of
football season, that is, after the Thanksgiving
TeCeSS. tº
When the holidays are over, hold two-hour
practices six days a week. You cannot accom-
plish much in the short season if you do not
drive and drive hard. It takes patient, laborious
work to instill fundamentals. If the team should
show a mental slump from the grind on funda–
mentals or from overexertion in team play, lessen
the intensity of the practice periods, according to
your best judgment; and switch off on games.
that require little physical effort but give much
mental relaxation, such as Crow and Crane,
occasional basket-ball relays, and others that will
be discussed in Chapter V.
Afternoon Practices—Practices held in the
afternoon are better for the men than those held
in the evening. Afternoon practices give the .
men opportunity to eat regular meals after
strenuous exercise, and also a chance to spend
their evenings in study. By adopting this
practice schedule, the players can relax well
before going to bed; while men who practice at
night often find it impossible to relax. Every
athlete needs at least eight hours of sleep.
Night Practices—Some coaches ardently advo-
cate night practice sessions because they accus-
tom the players to shooting by artificial light.
158 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Occasional night practices are not mistakes, but
the advantage gained by making them the rule
is more than offset by the fact that the men are
forced to miss their regular evening meals.
Under such a practice-schedule the players will
soon show, in their playing efficiency, the effects
of irregular habits of eating and sleeping.
The Coach on the Practice Floor—A coach
should strive to keep physically fit. On the
practice floor he must be agile and able to
demonstrate corrections of errors. No coach
should come out for practice without a full
player’s uniform and sweat clothes. Then, when
errors are made, he can jerk off his sweat clothes
and go into the game like a player, to dem-
onstrate and to execute the play as it should be.
The eyes are twenty times stronger than the
ears. Therefore a coach in uniform can more
adequately demonstrate his theories than can a
coach in street clothes try to explain them.
If he goes on the floor in street clothes to
demonstrate and makes a difficult shot, the
players will look upon it as an accident. But if
he executes the same shot in player's uniform he
will “sell” it to the players, largely because he
looks the part of an athlete.
Football—Basket-ball Candidates—All basket-
ball candidates who are out for football should
not be permitted on the court until after their
PREPARATIONS FOR THE SEASON 159
football season has ended and they have had an
enforced rest of two weeks.
Spend Your Time Upon Eligible Men—A
depositor puts his money in a bank that he
thinks is secure. So should the coach spend his
best time upon the men who are likely to stay
eligible. Do all in your power to keep the men
eligible. The personal contacts that will bear
fruit in these instances are discussed in a
later chapter on inspirational coaching. The
majority of men are worth working with to
keep them eligible. However, there are some
few who have basket-ball ability, but not the
desire for an education. These men in college
competition are hopeless. Do not waste your
time upon them, but give more time where it is
worth while. These efforts in behalf of worthy
men will strengthen your hands for many crises
that are sure to come.
Setting-up Exercises—Start at the beginning
of your season with a definite program of Set-
ting-up exercises; for instance, (1) the heel and
toe; (2) the full squat and full bend; (3) the
push-up dip; and (4) the full-squat dip. Only
a few minutes will be consumed in the execution
of the entire repertoire. .
A player should spend about five minutes in
his room, daily, in the execution of these exer-
cises. Make the men feel that a failure to ex-
ecute these exercises daily in their rooms is a
160 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
violation of their training schedule. Let them
know why these exercises are important. Faith-
fully executed, they are the surest prevention
against Sprains and injuries due to weak liga-
mentous attachments. Consistently followed, they
will strengthen the fingers, wrists, ankles and
knees so that very few injuries will occur from
scrimmage. -
So important do I deem these simple exer-
cises that both our freshmen and our Varsity
take five minutes of their practice session daily
for such drill, in addition to the daily five-
minute drill in their own rooms. We limber up
with these exercises just before starting the drill
on fundamentals. By reducing our early in-
juries to a minimum, we feel well repaid for
the time spent on these exercises. “An ounce
of prevention is worth a pound of cure” is trite
but true. Directions for giving these exercises
to the players follow:
Heel and Toe—Rise slowly on heels and toes
alternately about ten or twelve times.
Full Squat—Assume an upright position with
the arms at the sides. Come slowly down to a full
squat, at the same time stretching the arms out to
the front. Rise to a standing posture with arms
slowly stretched above the head. Execute a full
body bend, with knees kept straight and the finger
tips touching the floor. Repeat this alternate
exercise slowly three or four times.
PREPARATIONS FOR THE SEASON 161
Push-up Dip—Get down on all fours with the
body extended parallel to the floor and with
fingers and toes supporting the body. Execute
a full dip without letting the abdomen, chest, or
thighs touch the floor. Then push up and dip
again. Repeat this exercise twelve times with-
out allowing the hips to Sag. -
Full Squat Dip—Stand in upright position.
With arms out to the sides to perfect the body
balance, extend the right leg to the front and
sink slowly to a full squat on the left foot.
Without touching the floor with the hands or
with the extended right leg, put entire weight on
left leg and thigh, and depend upon the strength
of the knee and the hip joints to bring the body
again to an upright position. Finish with a
rising skip. This exercise should be repeated
three times on each leg twice daily.
Stretch—All of these exercises should be
slowly stretched through, quite after the fashion
of a contented cat before a fire. Stretching and
plenty of it, keeps the spine supple and the body
agile and youthful. -
Players Should Toughen Their Feet—Players
should take care of their feet and guard against
trouble. They should dry well between the toes
to keep from softening the skin. If the feet
perspire too freely, a combination of boric acid,
alum, and talcum powder sifted into the shoes
is splendid for reducing foot moisture and
162 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
toughening the skin. Tanic acid solution, salt
and vinegar, witch hazel and arnica, alum water,
bichloride of mercury solution (one tablet to a
pint of water) are all good bath solutions for
this same purpose. Compound tincture of ben-
zoin applied with a paint brush is also a good
foot toughener. -
If unable to toughen the players' feet suf-
ficiently before the first scrimmage, use squares
of adhesive tape over the parts of the foot sur-
face that gets the most friction. Remove this
after the scrimmage, as it will, if worn too long,
make the skin very tender.
Indigestion Due to Cold Feet—Some players
will suffer severe cases of indigestion brought
on by getting their feet too cold. Such players
should wear heavy woolen socks, both on and off
the court, and should toast their feet well before
retiring. If a player is subject to acute attacks of
indigestion, and physicians are reasonably sure
of their diagnosis, see that he has an electric-
heating pad to keep at his feet during his sleep-
ing hours. The plantar nerves that supply the
soles of the feet have their origin in the spine
in close proximity to nerves which control the
blood to the stomach and intestines. Cold feet
interfere with the blood supply controlled by
these nerves and thereby contribute to the causes
of fermentation of the stomach.
PREPARATIONS FOR THE SEASON 163
Players Should Dry Thoroughly After Baths
—Many cases of severe neuralgia of the face,
head, neck and shoulders can be prevented by
thoroughly drying after baths. Athletes are es-
pecially careless about drying the hair and the
nape of the neck before going out into wintry
weather. Hot water in the showers should be
used very sparingly. Follow the warm water
quickly with a cold dash and a brisk, thorough
rub with a turkish towel.
Scales and Weight—Every dressing room for
athletes should be equipped with an accurate pair
of scales for men to weigh when going into
practice and again when coming out. The story
that the scales and their accompanying charts
tell from day to day gives the coach a pretty
good line on the physical condition of his men.
The medical examiner, when making the phy-
sical examination, should tell the player about
how much he should gain or lose to be in ex-
cellent playing condition. This information will
make the player faithful in his training and in
the daily postings of his weight chart; for he
will be anxious to arrive at perfection.
A player should not progressively lose weight
during the regular playing season. From two
to four pounds is considered a normal loss dur-
ing a single hard practice or during a game. A
heavy water drinker will lose much more weight
than the player who drinks but little. Many
164 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
men consistently gain weight during playing
SeaSO11. -
The Eye Symptom—The eye is a splendid in-
dex to a player's physical condition. The fatty
deposit below the lid is first to disappear when a
player is dissipating or growing stale. If such
a symptom becomes evident, lose no time in find-
ing out what is wrong.
Personal Hygiene—Talk freely with your men
about the different phases of personal hygiene.
Do not leave all of this for your deans of men.
Their territory is rather extensive, and some
valuable opportunity to help your men might
get by. Do not forget that there are many
moot questions that the college player has not
yet settled to his entire satisfaction. A coach
of clean type can help many a man find himself.
A respected coach's opinion goes a long ways
with the young men under his training.
Lewdness or Profanity—Permit no member of
your squad to indulge in lewdness or profanity
of any type. A coach should never forget him-
self. No matter how rough a player may pre-
tend to be, he wants to look up to his coach.
Team morale is in direct proportion to the
self-respect and manliness of the coach and of
his players. Clean, Self-respecting men com-
pose most of the school and college teams of the
country nowadays.
PREPARATIONS FOR THE SEASON 165
Answer Questions—When the men learn to
trust your judgments, you will be asked many
questions which seem trivial and unnecessary.
But nothing is unnecessary to men in the mak-
ing. Treat their every inquiry with considera-
tion. Some night they will show their apprecia-
tion to you, for these little intimacies, when
they fight their hearts out to win.
Eating—Coaches should see to it that men
in training do not eat highly indigestible foods.
But, how rapidly the player eats is of more im-
portance than what he eats.
Players who eat at fraternity houses and
boarding clubs do not have opportunity to
select special menus. But they can, to some ex-
tent, by omission, avoid things that would be
harmful. Fortunately, however, the tabooed
lists of foods of the old training table have
largely disappeared. Plenty of good wholesome
food is now the direction in general.
What to Eat—Oranges can be used indis-
crimately. They are my hobby for all athletes:
an orange in the morning one-half hour before
breakfast; an orange apiece for the players as
they leave the practice floor; and an orange be-
fore going to bed—three oranges a day, and
more, if the player can get them. They are ap-
petizing, stimulating and insure tiptop physical
condition. Athletes often confuse thirst with
hunger. The orange satisfies both and keeps
the player from overeating. -
166 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Mineral Salts in Oranges Aid in Preventing
Staleness—So important do I consider the use of
oranges in team training that every encourage-
ment is given the “pep” organizations of the
School to furnish each member of the squad,
when leaving the gymnasium, a large orange.
School “pep” organizations, wide-awake and
keenly interested, are more than anxious to do
their bit. They delight in furnishing the oranges,
and their co-operation fosters a healthy situa-
tion between team and school. The more they
are permitted to do for the team, the more they
will back the team. Through their sacrifices,
they have helped to build it; through their co-
operation, it becomes more truly theirs. They
can help in no more material way than this; for
it is my conviction that the mineral salts in the
oranges, freely and regularly used, will do more
to ward off staleness than any other single
thing.
Correct Way to Eat an Orange—Cut the end
out in conical shape. Use a heavy-backed spoon
to scrape or break down the cells rather than to
cut or pry the sections loose. When eaten in
this way with the cells broken up, the juice of
the orange covers the entire area of the taste
bulbs of the tongue—thereby stimulating the
gastric and the biliary flow. These juices aid
digestion and eliminate constipation.
PREPARATIONS FOR THE SEASON 167
Boiled, Broiled, and Baked Foods—These
should constitute diet fundamentals for the play-
er who wants to make no mistake in his eating
program. Explain to the men the relative values
of the fats, proteins, and carbohydrates, as well
as the tearing down process that is taking place
in their bodies, so that they will understand why
tissue-building foods should be eaten. Boiled,
broiled, or baked meats form a good base for a
training diet. Use no fried foods. If meat is
eaten before the game, arrange the meal for
three hours before game-time.
Milk, Eggs, Toast—Plenty of milk can be used
every day except the day of a matched game.
None should be used on that day, as it tends to
make the mouth and throat very dry.
Many trainers object to the use of soft-boiled
or poached eggs as a pre-game diet. This
opinion is justified if the players belch sulphur
during exercise.
Use toast to the exclusion of other breads. It
requires much chewing and reaches the stomach
in a state of predigestion.
Coffee, Cocoa, Sweets—Men should abstain
from drinking coffee and tea regularly during
practice seasons. The system should be so
thoroughly freed from stimulants during playing
season that coffee, when used to pull the men out
of a hole, perhaps at the end of a long, fatiguing
trip, will bring results. A system thoroughly
168 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
freed from the stimulating effects of coffee will
respond to it quickly, but a man who has his
coffee regularly fails to find in it the same
degree of stimulation, in crises. -
Chocolate or cocoa is splendid for players if
enough apples or oranges are eaten to offset its
constipating effects.
The old-fashioned trainer absolutely prohibited
sweets for the players—possibly without under-
standing why. Now the general trend of train-
ing is toward discretion and not toward total
abstinence. Candy eaten discriminately after
meals does not injure the players’ physical
prowess. In fact, it, being an energy producer,
has a definite place in the athlete's diet.
Water—An athlete should drink, on the aver-
age, a glass of water every hour except on match
game days, when he should cut down to four
glasses during the day. Plenty of water taken
into the system stimulates the gastric flow and
eliminates any tendency toward constipation. A
player should drink as much water after practice
and before retiring as is consistent with comfort.
Between Meals—Advise the nervous hungry
type of athlete who never gets enough to eat and
wants to eat between meals to drink a glass of
water every time he wants to eat. It is difficult
to analyze the condition of hunger. A glass of
water at such times will appease it.
PREPARATIONS FOR THE SEASON 169
Each Bite of Food Should Be Masticated
Fifty Times—Stress the thought of the mastica-
tion of food. Suggest that each player masticate
or chew each bite of food fifty times before
swallowing it. One is, by nature, always more
interested in himself than in anyone else. There-
fore, this little mastication-counting game prac-
ticed on one's self will be conducive to one's own
welfare. The player in the act of masticating
each bite of food will get an object lesson in his
eating habits that he could not acquire by having
someone constantly saying to him, “Slow down.”
This plan can be used as a favorable introduc-
tion to further hints at health control, and, con-
sistently followed (even though in modified
form) will avert much indigestion caused by
rapid eating after the fatigue of hard practice.
A Pre-Game Ment—This meal should be
eaten at least two and one-half hours before
the game.
Menu — Sliced oranges, sprinkled with
Sugar. -
Two slices hot dry toast and butter.
One-half baked potato. .
One cup of weak tea, with sugar, no cream.
Sliced peaches, no cream. ..
ºf: If the team has been subjected to a hard trip,
air small piece of broiled T-bone steak (two
inches square) can be added to this menu.
170 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
A diet for Staleness—Sleep, rest, a daily light
workout in the gymnasium, followed by a tepid
bath and a brisk alcohol rub, together with a
suitable diet, will bring the worst case of stale-
ness back to normalcy in a week or ten days.
Many coaches will not let a stale man come
around the gymnasium for two weeks. I believe
this is wrong. Keeping a stale man away from
the gymnasium is like keeping an old fire-horse
out of his stall. He will chafe under the re-
striction and begin to fear that something is
radically wrong with him. Let him come around
the gymnasium, get into a suit, and take easy
workouts and baths for about ten days. He is
accustomed to his daily shower and will miss it
if he does not get it. It is also better for the
team to have him come around the gymnasium.
If he is a regular, as he undoubtedly will be, as
“subs” seldom go stale, the team will miss him
and wonder what is wrong. The psychology of
the situation is this: When he is away the team
morale is weakened. The mass (the team) feels
more secure and more satisfied if its practice
personnel remains intact, even if some do nothing
but sit on the side lines.
Head lettuce, creamed onions, fresh spinach,
butter, eggs, nuts, plenty of cereals with a short
diet of meats can all be included in the coming-
back diet of the stale man.
PREPARATIONS FOR THE SEASON 171
Orange Eggnog—An orange eggnog is a
splendid tonic for a languid man with no appe-
tite. Recipe: Squeeze the juice of an orange
into a bowl. Beat the white and the yolk of the
egg separately. Mix the Orange juice with the
beaten egg yolk and fold into the beaten white
of the egg. Flavor with a pinch of salt and (if
desired) a sprinkle of sugar. A slice of buttered
toast eaten with this eggnogg makes a delicate
and nourishing diet for a stale athlete.
Contentment—Bear ever in mind the value of
contentment. A contented mind never grows
stale. Utilize all of the vocal and instrumental
talent on your squad. Group singing is a fine
thing to harmonize minds and to develop com-
radeship.
During the last meal just before a hard game,
whether at home or away, it is splendid for the
team to have music. The athlete does not derive
much game strength from this last meal. His
biggest benefit is in the contentment that it
brings.
CHOOSING THE MEN
A real coach is a true democrat. He will not
let family, fraternity nor personal favor enter
into the choosing of his men. He will choose
players of ability, who have a real desire to win
a Varsity letter, rather than men who have
been touted as high school stars and are cock-
172 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
sure of a place on the team, but who have only
a vague idea of what a 100 per cent effort
11102.11S.
A good big man is always better than a good
little man. Aim to pick a rangy, shifty outfit.
In the selection of guards, height and weight
play a most important part. The rear guard
must of necessity be a tall, powerful fellow with
good foot work. This type of guard is abso-
lutely necessary for rebound work. Taking the
ball from the backboard is the work cut out for
the rear guard. The floor guard need not have
so much weight, but he must be an excellent
dribbler, a good passer and a sure shot.
Many coaches sacrifice height for a good
scoring floor center. This is all right, if the
rest of the team is weak on goal shooting.
However, if the other men are well up in
scoring power, it is decidedly to the advantage
of a team, both on offense and on defense, to
use a rangy player at center.
The forwards do not seem to be so handi-
capped by being small as are players in other
positions. Some of the best forwards I have
ever seen in action have been little men. A
small player is easier to guard under the basket
than a rangy one; but when it is a question of
covering floor area, the advantage lies with the
speedy little man.
PREPARATIONS FOR THE SEASON 173
High-spirited fellows are the men you want.
You can appeal to these chaps in critical mo-
ments, and they will invariably respond. Phleg-
matic men never over-reach themselves. Few of
this kind of men are needed on a team.
Select men, on the whole, who do not dissi-
pate in or out of season. The player who ob-
serves training laws in season only and who
“runs loose” out of season is lacking in some
respects. There has been no transference of his
athletic training. His team experiences have
failed. Athletics viewed from this angle are an
end in themselves and are not, as they should
be, a means to an end. -
CHAPTER III
Individual Offense
The ideal type of basket-ball player is the lithe,
rangy fellow with an athletic swing. . His body
must be so schooled in stopping, starting, and
reversing that there will be not one lost motion.
He must be aggressive and courageous. He
must be a hard, clean player, ever ready to fol-
low the lead of his captain, as well as always
able to think for himself.
No player should be given the option of
executing a basket-ball fundamental in his own
way. A coach who gives this option to a player
makes a mistake. In practice, drill the player
in one style of execution until he has mastered
it. Then, if necessary, let him practice another
style of execution for the same fundamental.
After he has carried out to your satisfaction
these instructions on specific technique, permit
him, under observation, to choose the type of
execution that is best adapted to his native style.
By earnest, consistent, gruelling practice,
practice, practice in fundamental drills, any
player of moderate ability has a fine chance to
“come through.” In fact, there has been many
a man with practically no outward evidences of
becoming a great player except the desire to be
one, who has “arrived,” because he was willing
to stay with the job and to make the attendant
sacrifices.
INDIVIDUAL OFFENSE 175
The offensive game as now played calls for
men of strategy as well as for men of physical
perfections. It needs players who can, in their
offensive drive down the floor, lose themselves
from the defense. By rushing swiftly down, the
court and suddenly coming to an abrupt stop,
using a squatting back step, and then, by cut-
ting off sharply at right angles, a player may
literally, as well as figuratively, lose his guard.
An ability to execute such fundaments of
basket-ball successfully determines the floor
wise or finished player from the man who is
still in the process of making. Men with such
finish are integral parts of great machines.
ZONING THE BACKBOARDS FOR BASKET
SHOOTING PRACTICE
It is a splendid idea in early shooting practices
to work with diagrammed backboards upon
which you have outlined shooting zones; this is
to assist the players in locating the exact areas
on the backboard from whence rebound work
will be effective.
Every basket-ball player has in his early ex-
periences located certain spots on the back-
board at which he could aim when shooting a
carom shot, and from which he could score con-
sistently. Out of such experiences has evolved
the theory of zoning the backboards as an aid to
the player in visualizing the “hot spots” in the
Scoring zones.
Diagram
176 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
The method of marking off these zones fol-
lows (See Diagram 1): Outline a box, 18
inches square, directly back of and on a line
with the basket rim. Instruct the men who are
practicing basket shooting to arch their shots
high enough so that the ball, if overshot, will
drop against this box and rebound for goal.
DIAGRAM 1
Diagramed backboards for basket shooting practice.
Mark off two additional lanes diagonally from
the corners of the backboard to the basket from
whence shots made from angles will rebound
into the basket. The more acute the angle, the
higher in these diagonal scoring lanes will the
ball have to strike in order to go into the bas-
ket on the rebound. Also the more acute the

INDIVIDUAL OFFENSE 177
angle, the more delicate will be the english put
upon the ball in releasing it, until, when al-
most in line with the edge of the backboard, the
touch will be very delicately shaded. •- ºr
Now add two 15-inch squares to each side of
the 18-inch box, as shown in Diagram 1. All
lanes and zones should be laid out exactly ac-
cording to the dimensions worked out in this
diagram. These two smaller boxes will aid the
men when they are closer in to the basket in
locating the “hot spots” on the backboard.
A board correctly diagrammed should have,
at least, these five zones outlined upon it, or else
the players will not get a complete drill in locat-
ing the proper spots for rebounds when using
the underhand english and the push arch shots.
When we think of the success of basket
shooting in terms of the delicate shadings of
the wrist and finger movements required to make
these shots accurate from every angle of the
court, we can appreciate the wonderful art
of this game.
METHOD FOR TEACHING CORRECT ARCH
# IN SHOOTING
Some coaches, in their efforts to help the men
estimate the necessary height of the arch before
the descent of the ball on its way to the back-
board, fix an imaginary spot approximately
twenty-five feet in the air and twenty feet out
in front of the basket. The player, when shoot-
Diagram
2
178
MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
*
DIAGRAM 2
The locus
o
th
M.
% of ball in a Tºp
Scole i-10%
ſºloor

Air paths for high arch
shot.
INDIVIDUAL OFFENSE 179
ing, can imagine a line described by the course
of a ball from this spot in the air to the basket.
The ball which describes this imaginary line
deflects into the basket on a carom shot. __ ––
This line should be the locus of the highest
points of all arches used for rebound shots from
any ordinary scoring distance directly in front
of the basket. The ball. in its arch after it
leaves the player's hands describes a curve simi-
lar to a parabola, the highest point of which
intersects the imaginary locus. The distance of
the shooter from the basket determines the point
of intersection of the crest of the parabola with
the line. The closer-in the shots are made, the
farther down on the imaginary line will be the
points of intersection.
It is good pedagogy to teach the men to shoot
for a direct looping hit into the basket. And
this scheme of describing the imaginary line
from a spot in the air is a means of stressing
upon the players’ minds the importance of shoot-
ing high. Most players shoot too low and too
short. Should they overshoot, by correctly
arching the shots, they will always have an extra
..chance for a goal on the rebound. -- - -
THE TIP-OFF
Much of the success of a game depends upon
the tip-off. At the opening of the game, after
every free throw, field goal, and held ball, the
tip-off is used. Forwards, guards, and centers
180 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Exhibit
R-1
should be able to execute this play perfectly.
When the referee throws the ball into the air
at a height greater than either man can jump,
he blows his whistle and puts the ball in play.
Jumper in Air—Exhibit R-1 shows a jumper
in the air. to meet the ball coming down.
has anticipated the
rapidity of its de-
scent and has es-
timated his ability
to go up and tip it.
He has met it with
the cushions of his
three middle fin-
gers in order to
push it off in the
direction that the
signal indicates.
The fingers must
meet the ball at the
right spot or the
ball can not be
placed where the
jumper wants it.
Note the full ex-
tension of a 11
parts of the jump-
er's body—shoul-
der, elbow, wrist
and fingers, as well
as the trunk and
-
He
º
º
Exhibit it—1
The tip-off. Jumper in air.

INDIVIDUAL OFFENSE 181
limbs. The arm is at the back, and there is no
doubt as to the legality of this jump.
Jumper's Arm—By the rules of the game, the
jumper's arm must be kept in contact with the
small of the back until the ball has been tipped
by one of the men jumping. Some coaches
have their players hook their fingers in a loop
of elastic attached to the trouser band. This is
an evasion of the rules. On account of the
“play” in the loop of elastic, the jumper might
bring his arm around to interfere with his op-
ponent. It is better to have the player hook one
finger—the index finger—in the trouser band
at the small of the back. This method gives
great advantage to the jumper, as the use of
this particular finger, and no other, allows
greater rotation of the arm and shoulder in
propelling the body upward. The index finger
should be used in this instance in preference to
any or all of the others, on account of the
peculiar attachments of the muscle, the flexor
corpi radialis (Spalteholz).f. Nature endowed
this digit only, with a private group of muscles.
The other flexors of the forearm are attached
conjointly to its fellows. The pronation of this
index finger muscle shortens the fibres and thus
frees all the other flexors of the arms and fin-
gers—thereby giving more freedom to the body.
in the jump.
fHand Atlas of Human Anatomy, Werner Spalteholz, Vol. II,
Page 308.
182 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Arching the Ball—On the tip-off, a player
should tip the ball up and over. This gives
the team mates an opportunity to time their
thrust and to drive through with more ac-
curacy. In this play, one should never try to
slap the ball, as this causes a partial flexion of
the forearm and wrist, and, thereby, a sacrifice
of several inches of much needed reach. And,
too, a player at tip-off in the act of slapping a
ball might miss the ball, strike the opponent's
arm, and cause a needless foul.
Playing the Ball—A player should watch the
ball at all times. He must play the ball and
never the jumper. Some players, when being
outjumped, think it foxy to strike their op-
ponent's wrist. Officials soon get on to this and
will begin to watch the offender for stunts that
he does not intentionally “pull.”
“Outfoxing” an Opponent Who is Driving
Too Close—If an opponent drives in too soon
and closes the path where the tip was supposed
to go, the other jumper can tip the ball two or
three inches in the air, reverse his wrist, and
tip it behind him for a safe recovery.
If an opponent is jumping across to the other
half of the circle and using the chest block, the
jumper can shift to another position in the cir-
cle and use a corkscrew jump. In this way, he
can present the back-arm and shoulder to the
INDIVIDUAL OFFENSE 183
opponent's chest, and offset the advantage he is
trying to gain by this illegal jump.
Alighting From Tip-off—A player must learn
to alight from the tip-off with knees well, bent,
feet well spread and slapped Smartly to the floor.
After alighting, he can step one step backward
from the center circle, ready to dart off in either
direction. This keeps his opponent from block-
ing. In this retreating position, he should bring
the feet reasonably close together, so that he will
be prepared for any emergency. If two op-
ponents should come in to block him, a quick
start and then a reverse, followed by a slashing
drive to the side lines, would draw his opponents
after him and leave a hole into which a crafty
team mate might swing.
SHOTS AND PASSES
THE FREE THRow or UNDERHAND SHOT
1oo Free Shots a Day—The free throw, both
from the field and from the foul line, has been
responsible for more victories than any other
two shots combined. Since the rule covering
free throws has been changed to give each of -
fended player a free toss when fouled, it is up
to every man on the team to become an adept
at free throws. Each player should throw at
least 100 free throw shots a day and keep a
daily record of his tries.
184 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
* Practice-Fundamentals—Exhibit C-1 shows
the player balancing the ball. This form is
C-1
º
Exhibit C-1
Player balancing the ball.
used only in the practice of
fundamentals, and not when
a pºp ro a ching the free
throw line in a game to
make the throw. It should
be used as the first step in
teaching the execution of
the free throw. The player
is using his index fingers as
an axis and is rotating the
ball toward his body. The
lace, being the heavier part
of the ball, gravitates down-
ward. The ball should be
in this position (lace down-
ward) when the free throw
shot is made. Have the
player, in this position, spin
the ball around many times to develop nimble-
ness and deftness of the fingers. In the actual
execution of this shot, by developing and using
the finer accessory groups of finger, forearm,
and wrist muscles, instead of the heavier body
axial groups (those of the humerus and the
trunk), the player will get a more delicate co-
ordination and will develop a more accurate
shot.
Exhibit First Step in Execution—Exhibit C-2 shows
C-2
the player approaching the free throw line. He



INDIVIDUAL OFFENSE 185
is, as he should be, looking at the ball, rather
than at the basket. This gives him an oppor-
tunity to relax. He balances the ball lightly in
his fingers while his vision takes in the floor be-
fore him. The ball should never rest against
the palms of the hands but lightly in the finger
cushions—much the same as does a baseball
when the baseball player is in the act of throw-
ing. The position gives the “zip” to a baseball
or the tonic snap to a basket-ball.
This player in Exhibit C-2 also shows the
correct preparatory position of the fingers upon
the ball, before the exe-
cution of the shot. By
the proper pressure of
the cushions of the
middle, the ring, and
the little fingers upon
the ball, he gets the ex-
yº. act touch. Just how
- much “stuff” he desires
to put upon the ball is
determined by the life
directly upward that he
gives it and by the
pressure that he exerts
in its release.
The left or front
Exhibit C-2 foot of the man getting
* Hººſor free ready to make the free




186 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Exhibit
C-3
throw should be placed about two inches back
of the free throw line. He should place the foot
so firmly into this position that it will be pushed
more securely toward the toe of his shoe. With
this assurance that the foot is back of the foul line
at the time of the shot, the player will feel more
confidence, and the pseudo-suggestion from some
opponent to “watch his foot” will not affect his
shot. .
The rear foot should be brought forward to
an easy walking position, usually with the toe at
a right angle with the forward heel—or the
rear foot about one-half step back of the for-
ward foot. As a jumper measures his take-
off, so should the free thrower carefully per-
fect his stance.
At this step in the execution of the shot, per-
fect relaxation of the entire body is necessary.
During the game, exertion has overtaxed the
player. Here is an opportunity to save up. If
the player who will execute the shot is panting
and his heart is beating like a trip-hammer, he
should take a full deep breath and hold it for
six or eight seconds. By this act, the pressure
of the diaphragm will slow the heart down
perceptibly.
Second Step in Earecution—Exhibit C-3 shows
the player coming down for the shot. Just be-
fore starting down, he catches a full deep
breath. This sets the diaphragm and contracts
INDIVIDUAL OFFENSE 187
the other muscles of the thorax. Tonic con-
traction is very necessary now. The player
should hold his
breath until after
the shot has left
His hands. In mak-
ing the final ad-
justment of the
ball for the shot,
he should careful-
ly feel the ball into
its place among
well-relaxed finger
muscles. You will
note that his arms
swing naturally at
the sides as he
Exhibit C-3 comes down for
Player coming down for the shot. the shot. T h 1 S
position aids him
in maintaining his body balance while in the act
of shooting; and is an argument in favor of
using this shot for making free throws, instead
of using the push arch or chest shove shot,
which is likely, if the thrower leans too far for-
ward, to upset the balance. In the free throw
or underhand shot, the weight of the body rests
upon the balls of the feet and remains stead-
fastly there as the shot progresses, while in the
push arch shot the initial movement pulls the
body forward. The arms extended high above





188 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
the head and coming down and forward at full
extension in the execution of the push arch shot
are very apt to upset the player's equilibrium.
In the underhand shot, the ball is dropped
down from the waist-line until the back of the
left hand rests lightly upon the front of the
left thigh. As the ball is brought upward, the
player must use a quick quarter-squat and rise
high on the left foot with follow-through of
the hands and arms. When rising in the air,
the balance of weight must be carried fully on
the ball of the forward foot.
* Final Step in Free Throw Shot—Exhibit C-4
shows the final position of the body after the
ball has left the
hands. With a
well-poised body
and a care ful
glance at the bas-
ket, the player
“lays” the b a 11
high in the air.
He aims to drop
it clear of the bas-
ket rim. The
m O V en ent em-
ployed should be
a slow, unfolding,
leaning high-jump
º". instead of a for-
ward, slow broad-

INDIVIDUAL OFFENSE 189
jump. Should the player overshoot the basket,
the reverse given the ball by the player's lift will
“kill” it when it strikes the backboard and prob-
ably will pull it back into the basket.
The player in this movement has used full
extension and carry-through. As the center of
the basket is only 13 feet and 9 inches from the
free throw line, this carry-through allows the
ball to leave the player's hands much closer to
the hoop than if he should use an underhand
snap throw. *
Confidence has much to do with a successfu
shot. The player in the act of making the
shot; should shut everything out of his mental
field except the confidence that he can make
the shot good. He has made hundreds of suc-
cessful tries before. Why not again? The first
aim is best, and it needs only confidence to
back it. -
Underhand Shot Better for Free Throw—
This underhand or loop arch shot that has been
demonstrated is preferable to the push arch shot
for free throws. It is a more natural scoring
shot, for the reason that man uses his flexors
much more than he does his extensors. The
flexor groups of muscles are the ones employed
in this shot; therefore it is an easy shot for
most players to make.
Push Arch Better in Field of Play—But in
the field of play, this underhand free throw shot
is unsafe when an opponent is within ten feet of
*
190
MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Exhibit
G-1
the man who is to shoot.
It is more easily
blocked than the push arch or chest shove shot.
However, this underhand free throw shot can
be used advantageously when rising to shoot
from a running dribble or after pivoting away
from an opponent near the basket.
THE PUSH ARCH OR CHEST SHOWE SHOT
Player Shown in Earecution of Third Step—
In Exhibit G-1, the player is shown in the third
movement of the push
arch or chest shove
shot. In his initial
move, he took one step
forward. Then, in the
second movement, by
thrusting the ball out
in front much after the
manner of a boxer’s
feint, he described a
half circle downward,
the half circle ending
at the waistline. This
circular movement of
the ball was wholly for
| Exhibit G-1
Push arch shot. Player shown
in third step of eacecution.
the purpose of relaxing
the muscles used in
making the shot.
In this third step,
which is demonstrated
in Exhibit G-1, the

INDIVIDUAL OFFENSE 191
player has brought the ball upward along the
abdomen and chest and will be ready to release
it with a tonic snap when it reaches a height in
front of and above his eyes. His fingers are
distributing light but equal pressure upon the
ball. His thumb serves as a bracket to keep the
ball from falling out backward. It also enables
the ball to rest lightly in the finger tips.
Tactile Sense—The tips of the fingers are the
sensitive areas. In the present game of basket-
ball, in which so much of the finer technique
depends upon the quality of the touch, this field
of tactile sense is woefully neglected.
If a blind person can read raised type by
developing the tactile sense, one can readily
see how, by training, a basket-ball sense can be
developed in the player's finger tips.
Neither Hand Should Be Under the Ball—
In this shot, neither hand should be under the
ball, as this brings the heavier muscles into use
and slows up the shot. In a shot-put, this
position of the hand under the ball is necessary
on account of the weight of the shot. It takes
the heavier muscles of the arms to handle it.
But the basket-ball is light and does not need
heavy lifting. It needs only the use of the
lighter accessory groups of muscles—these to
give it accuracy and tonic snap.
Thrower Must Keep His Eyes on the Ball—
You will note that the player while the ball is
f
192 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Exhibit
G-2
in his hands has his eyes fixed upon the basket.
He will not aim just to clear the rim, but will
arch his shot a foot above it. After the ball
leaves his hands he will keep his eyes glued
upon it throughout its course. Failure to watch
the ball after the shot leaves the hands is a
common fault among players. Thus, they lose
many a good chance at a rebound. No player,
whether on offense or defense, should ever take
his eyes off the ball for one instant.
Practicing This Shot—In teaching this shot
to beginners, have the players make a full squat,
with the foot position the same as in Exhibit
G-1. They should not stand more than two
feet from the basket. In this crouched position,
have them loop the ball over the rim, endeavor-
ing to get as high an arch upon it as possible.
This act will demonstrate to the players the
necessity of getting the ball high in the air,
It will also develop splendid co-ordination.
Possibilities of Push Arch Shot—This shot,
when handled in the proper way, makes
numerous feints and easy pivots possible when a
charging guard confronts the player. In Exhibit
G-2 the guard has rushed the forward while still
in the stance shown in Exhibit G-1. By throw-
ing the weight on the rear foot, the offensive
player has sprung upward and backward,
shooting a high arch shot over the Outstretched
hand of the attacking guard.
INDIVIDUAL OFFENSE 193
Exhibit G-2
Charging guard confronts player who is in the act of making a
push arch shot.
Observe Leg Movements—Please observe the
natural leg movements of the offensive player
when shooting this push arch shot. The for-
ward's left leg and foot are prohibiting the
guard from leaping directly into him while
shooting. This leg can be dropped downward,
thus presenting the knee. This will keep the
guard off a little longer and will give the for-
ward more time to shoot before contact ensues.
Some players obtain their balance better by this
latter method of dropping the leg and presenting
the knee.
Double Spring Jump-The forward executing
this shot uses a double spring jump on the rear


194 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
leg. The first jump comes when he short-steps
backward to avoid the guard; and the second,
when he makes the spring in the execution of
the push arch shot. These jumps follow each
other in rapid succession. Notice in Exhibit
G-2 that the guard is ready to leap off his front
foot; but the forward, by shifting back on the
pivot foot, has arched the shot over the guard’s
outstretched arm. This shot can be used when
an opponent is nearly on top of the man with
the ball.
Push Arch a Versatile Shot—A player that
is proficient in this style of shot can make the
defense charge-in to block, and, by a feint to
shoot, can use a floor bounce, a pivot, or a
hook pass as the occasion demands.
THE UNDERHAND LOOP SHOT IN SCRIMMAGE
tº: Guard Blocks Underhand Loop Shot—In Ex-
hibit G-3, with several feet in the clear, the
player on offense is attempting an underhand
loop shot; but the guard makes a quick lunge
and projects his arm into the path of the ball.
By using quick head and handwork, the forward
retains possession of the ball; but in such an
emergency he must quickly change his attack.
The play previously shown in Exhibit G-2 could
be used advantageously here. Due to the fact
that the guard is between the forward and the
basket, the one-hand english shot could not be
INDIVIDUAL OFFENSE 195
Exhibit G-3
Guard blocks underhand loop shot.
used. But if the forward did not think the push
arch shot expedient, he could use either a pass
or a pivot.
Forward’s Team Mate Works Into the Play
—In Exhibit G-4 the forward's team mate (not
shown in picture), by cutting in behind the
guard and getting near the basket, has enabled
the forward to use the cross chest, shoulder
bounce pass.
Guard Forces Passer’s Hand–As the for-
ward draws the ball across the chest to bounce
the pass, the guard retracts his forefoot, which
brings him to a crouch, ready for any defensive
emergency. He may now block the floor bounce



196 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
º
º
* * | < |
Exhibit G-4
- Guard forces passer’s Hand,
sº - º - -
by using his arms, or by kicking either foot
laterally.
As soon as the forward’s team mate behind
the guard is taken care of by another defensive
man, the guard can advance and force the
passer's hand. In this case, the forward can
do either of two things—pivot or hook pass.
By dropping the forward shoulder slightly
backward, he can easily effect a natural pivot.
In the pivotal position, the head should be
carried well back in order to maintain a more
perfect balance.
-




INDIVIDUAL OFFENSE 197
THE ONE-HAND ENGLISH SHOT
The game of basket-ball has been likened to
the game of billiards—the backboards being the
cushions and the fingers of the players, the cue.
When using a reverse or follow shot against
the backboard, the same type of skill is em-
ployed by the deft and artful use of the fingers
on the ball as is employed by the billiard player
when using the cue successfully.
Use of One-hand English Shot—In the one-
hand english shot, the ball is always played
against the backboard. This shot, although one
of the fundamental shots, is not used so much
as the other two; namely, the underhand loop
arch shot and the push arch shove shot. This
english follow shot is used only when the other
two are impractical.
Execution of Shot (First Step)—In Exhibit
O-1, the player is demonstrating the proper
execution of this shot. He is using his outside
arm (the arm away from his opponent). The
outside arm is always used to spin the ball, as
this procedure throws the ball farther away
from the defense and allows a full pronation
of the hand and wrist.
Using Inside Hand to Adjust the Ball—The
inside hand (the hand next to the opponent)
has been used by the player to properly adjust
the ball in the outside hand. When teaching
this shot, I call the ball the “dry leather” and
Exhibit
0- |
198 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE --
Exhibit 0-1
Eacecution of one-hand english shot
(First step).
the cushions of
the fingers against
it, the “green
leather.” Mo is t
leather against
dry leather makes
good contact. If
the ball is pressed
firmly against the
finger cushions, it
gets more contact
surface and more
english can be put
on it. After the
inside arm has
performed this
service for the
shooting arm (the
outside arm) the
player can drop
the inside arm
down and away
from the ball so
that it may serve
as a legitimate barrier to an onrushing opponent.
Note that the player's hand is turned so that
he is looking directly into the palm of his cupped
digits. The ball is raised until the upper arm
is horizontal. The cushions of the upturned
fingers and thumb act as supports for the ball.

INDIVIDUAL OFFENSE 199
Notice that the little finger is brought around
to full inversion. This helps to close the gap
ordinarily existing between the thumb and the
little finger.
The Shot—The player must relax the muscles Exhibit
of his hand as much as possible. He should "
then pronate his
wrist, hand, and
fingers with a
quick tonic snap;
and in the same
act shade into full
extension upward
of the shoulder,
arm, for e a r m,
hand, and fingers.
This movement
puts the proper
english on the ball.
The shot in its
final step is dem- ||
onstrated by the
player in Exhibit .
O–2.
Much of the
success of this
*/
shot lies in a high-
ly developed tech-
nical use of the
fingers, wrist, and
*
Exhibit 0-2
The one-hand English shot (final step).

200 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Exhibit
J- |
arm. It should be practiced with either hand.
It will not take long to learn the scoring zones
On the backboard, if lanes are diagrammed (see
Diagram 1) to indicate where a ball with the
proper english will score.
This shot naturally follows a hook or a
bounce pass under or near the basket. By turn-
ing on the left foot, the player in Exhibit O-2
could present his hips and left shoulder to a
guard, who might be almost on top of him, and,
simultaneously, could execute this shot to the
right with such speed that it would be practically
impossible to block.
THE ONE-ARM OVER-SHOULDER HOOK PASS
First Movement—The passer in Exhibit J-1,
except that he is facing in the opposite direction,
is in a position identical with the passer who is
demonstrating the initial step of the one-arm
underhand pass in Exhibit A-1. While the
initial stances in the execution of these two
passes are identical, this one-arm over-shoulder
hook pass is much more difficult to execute cor-
rectly and is also, on account of the presentation
of the passer’s hip and thigh to his opponent,
much the more difficult to block. Another strong
point in favor of its use is that the guard in
an attempt to block it will be drawn out of his
position. The greatest difficulty in executing
this pass is in directing it accurately. This is
INDIVIDUAL OFFENSE
—
Exhibit J-1
One-arm over-shoulder hook pass (first step).
due to the fact that (on account of the required
pivot and pass while in the act of turning) the
player has no base from which to execute the
DaSS.
Guard Rushes the Passer—Observe in this
exhibit that a guard is rushing the passer, who
has advanced his left foot to the side-front
and has presented his hip and thigh to the
guard. The passer is watching for an opening
to pass to a team mate and is simultaneously
timing the rush of the guard. He can still
pivot to the right if he decides not to use the
hook pass.
Pass Completed—In Exhibit J-2, the forward *
has just completed a correct execution of this
hook pass. In executing the pass, he rolled


MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
the ball back on his
right hand against the
wrist. At the same
time, he turned on the
toes of his left foot,
high-jumped into the
air, and hooked the
pass high over his own
left shoulder. Practi-
cally the full weight of
the forward's body was
thrown on his left foot
v. as he jumped into the
air. The passing arm
was kept straight with
the fingers cupped and
spread over the top of
the ball. The other
arm, by the very nature of the play, was brought
around in front of the body, blocking off the
guard. In this pass the arm should act as a
flail. The shoulder should rotate in the socket.
The ball should be a high floater, clearing the
jumping guard's hand by more than a foot.
* Passer and Guard Alighting—Exhibit J-3
shows the forward and guard both alighting
from this hook pass play. In this pass, the
right arm, having been crossed over the left
shoulder when the passer jumped off the left
foot, the passer has turned his body around to
Exhibit J-2
Pass completed.



INDIVIDUAL OFFENSE 203
Exhibit J-3
Passer and guard alighting after pass is completed.
face his team mate to whom he is passing. A
left-handed passer will use the reverse order in
making this pass. The passer in J-3 has hooked
the ball high over the head of his opponent.
This act throws the passer in a favorable alight-
ing position. He will come down while the
guard has gone up to try to block the ball.
When he hits the floor, the pass will be well on
its way. In such a play, the guard will always
be at a disadvantage, as his back will be to the
ball while the passer will be facing it. Upon
alighting, the guard will try to block the passer's
progress. He has probably been told, “If you
cannot get the ball, get the man.”
Guard's Use of Right Arm Legitimate—In
J-3, the guard is using his right arm, extended to

204 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Exhibit
J-4
the side, as an aid to his equilibrium and also to
serve as a barrier for the forward when he
alights. The guard is entitled to this position,
and the passer, when he alights, will have to
shift out and around the guard's outstretched
a1-111. -
Exhibit J-4
Showing passer's correct alighting position.
Passer's Alighting Position—Exhibit J-4
shows the passer's alighting position. Note the
position of his hands on his knees. He alights
ready to push off in either direction. By watch-
ing the guard's eyes, he can determine which
way to shift. A firm, quick, downward pressure
of the hands upon the knees gives the proper
shift to a passer when he wants to get away
from a blocking guard. -

INDIVIDUAL OFFENSE 205
If the guard should rush him to make bodily
contact, a Snappy reverse with a quick dart
away will force the guard to hold or body-check,
either of which is illegal, and the offended man
will get a free throw. - -
After the hook passer has succeeded in getting
the ball to a team mate he should follow in and
become the trailer for the man who has just
received the ball.
Hook Pass a Good Basket Try—This style of
hook pass, when the passer is under or near the
goal, can be used artfully for a basket try. He
can actually lay the ball up against the back-
board. -
THE ONE-ARM UNDERHAND PASS
One of the first things to learn on the offen-
sive is that the man with the ball must pass to
a member of his team who is in an open or
unguarded position—the passer then moving
automatically to an unguarded spot.
There is a marked tendency on the part of
the average passer to loaf after making the
pass. He should always follow his advantage
by moving to a strategic position. Even though
the pass does not come back to him in a more
advanced position, he has drawn the defense in
his direction and has thus made it easier for
his team mates to rush to uncovered spots. In
this way, the passer can aid his team's drive
down the floor. - .
206 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
* Initial Step—In Exhibit A-1, the player is in
the initial step of a one-arm underhand pass—
a stance identical
with that of the
initial step of the
| hook passer in Ex-
hibit G-1. He has
caught the ball in
both hands and has
then come to the
| crouched half-squat
| position that you
| see in the exhibit.
He is preparing to
roll the ball back on
| his wrist for the
pass. His left leg
-
-
-
2 s.
Exhibit A-1 is advanced one
One-arm underhand pass (initial
step).
regular step with
the toe straight
ahead. The weight of his body is resting equally
on both feet. This puts him in position to pivot
either way on the rear foot. When a pass for-
ward is made, he will shift his weight to the
forefoot.
Arm Position Versatile—Notice the arm posi-
tion in this exhibit. The arms are extended
beyond and to the inside of the front knee.
This is a versatile position. The player in
this position, instead of finishing the execu-

INDIVIDUAL OFFENSE 207
tion of the one-arm underhand pass, could do
any one of many things. He could, by shifting
his forward foot, very easily make an across the
chest shoulder bounce or pass to a team mate.
He could make a hook pass over his left
shoulder. By drawing the ball back to his
abdomen and then forcibly snapping it forward,
he could use a floor bounce or a direct push
pass. Or, by executing with his left arm, he
could use a one-hand underarm pass.
Second Movement, a Lower Crouch—Or, as Exhibit
shown in Exhibit A-2, he can continue with the A-2
one-arm underhand
pass. In this ex- |
hibit he has drawn |
his arms back and |
has rolled the ball ||
on the rear hand |
against the wrist. ||
He has placed the
ball with the for- |
ward hand. His |
crouch is now lower
than in Exhibit
A-1. His present
crouch is much like |
that of a bowler Exhibit A-2
ready to deliver the A lower crouch (second movement).
ball down the alley. His rear knee is carried
well forward by the swing of his body.

208 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Exhibit
A-3
Knee Position Protects the Pass—This knee
position splendidly protects the pass when the
ball, less than a foot from the floor, skims by the
legs of the passer. Should an opponent present
himself in front of a passer in this position, the
passer, by shifting his front leg across to the
right and thus presenting his hip to the defense,
could convert the play into a hook pass over
the left shoulder. .*
Alternatives—If the defensive man is too
close-in for the forward to make a successful
hook pass, he could, by pivoting on the rear
foot, turn the play into a pivot to the rear and
present his retreating back to the defense. He
could then easily execute a two-arm underhand
pass. Or, if the defense were not in his way,
he could, in his reversed position, use his left
arm instead of his right for a one-arm under-
hand pass. The pivot presents many possibilities
to a versatile player. The only hazard a pivoter
takes is, by drawing the rear or pivot foot out
of position, the risk of getting a penalty.
The Follow-Through—In Exhibit A-3, the
player demonstrates the follow-through of the
one-arm underhand pass. This pass is good
from 15 to 40 feet, and is, in my opinion, the
most accurate pass of any used on offense.
Note that the player has now straightened up
from the squat maintained in the passing posi-
tion and is in a charging pose. The shoulder
INDIVIDUAL OFFENSE 209
swing of the pass
carries the player
forward into the
next play. With
his right foot ad-
vanced one ful!
step, he starts on
the run for the fol-
low play. Should a
defensive opponent
suddenly present
himself in the path
of this pass, the
passer could recover
before the release.
Exhibit A-3
The follow-through.
THE ONE-HAND UNDERARM PASS
A Time Saver—This pass is a convenient time
saver and works well in pinches. It is a quick
snap pass and can be used advantageously in
positions where a half second's delay or a move
for a better pass would mean the tightening of
the defense and the loss of an opportunity to
score. This is the pass to use when the passer
has his back to the basket and is crowded by the
defense, but has an uncovered team mate, within
ten or twelve feet, who is in a scoring position.
Player Has Completed One-hand Underarm
Pass—The player in Exhibit A-4 has just exe-
cuted this one-hand underarm pass. In the exe-
cution of the pass, he held the ball to the front
Exhibit
A-4

210 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Exhibit A-4
The one-harid underarm pass. A time-saver.
with both hands much the same as was done in
Exhibit A-1. The other man in this exhibit is
the passer's team mate who is to receive the
pass. When the team mate calls for the ball,
the passer raises his left hand and cuts the ball
on an underarm snap to his team mate who is
in position to score. In this play, the passer's
eyes should be on the man to whom he is direct-
ing the pass and not on the ball.
Note the position of the receiver's hands. As
soon as the ball falls into his relaxed fingers,
he uses a still further relaxation of the hands
and wrists, downward. This act puts him in
position for a shot or a dribble.

INDIVIDUAL OFFENSE 211
Other Plays Possible—The passer making the
one-hand underarm pass could easily use a
floor bounce from this same position, but he
seldom does, as the more direct route is not by
way of the floor. This pass is standard and
not like the old chestnut play of flipping the
ball around behind your back and taking a
chance on where it would land. -
RECOVERING A HELD BALL
Officials on Held Balls—When two players
come to a clinch with a held ball, it is generally
the more clever of the two that obtains posses-
sion of the ball. There are many ways to
extricate a ball thus held. No player should be
satisfied merely to hold his own with his op-
ponent until the referee blows his whistle. In-
stead, he should use all of the cunning at his
command to extricate the ball from an op-
ponent's grasp before the referee declares the
play a “held ball.” Some officials, if the play
is spontaneous, permit two opponents to test
their mettle in this play. Others believe that
they do away with the “backwash” of the game
by calling a held ball immediately after the two
opponents place their hands upon it. It never
costs anything to play “heads up” on all occa-
sions. A player should be ready for every
emergency and play for every break. He makes
his own luck. -
212 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Exhibit
E-1
Exhibit E-1
Plauers striving for possession of the ball.
Striving for Possession of the Ball–It is not
necessary to hold the ball in the hands. There
is no rule against using the arms in hugging
the ball; but on account of the more deft muscles
being in the fingers and hands, it is a good idea
to use the hands.
In Exhibit E-1, the players are striving for
possession of the ball. They have a perfectly
natural stance, feet spread and left legs well
advanced. Note the position of the players'
hands upon the ball. The forward, with his
hands at the sides of the ball, has it in a shoot-
ing position. The guard has not charged the
opponent back; therefore, there is no bodily
contact. The forward, in his effort to retain
the ball, will draw the guard close enough to

INDIVIDUAL OFFENSE 213
him for the guard to work the following play.
The guard, in trying to obtain possession of
the ball, has placed his left hand on top of it
to aid him in his shoulder drive; and has placed
his right one on the lower surface of the ball
to give it a quick rotary jerk upward. By giv-
ing the ball a snappy reverse, which is immedi-
ately succeeded by a forward lunge downward
in which he pushes his left shoulder against the
opponent's chest, the guard forces the ball down-
ward almost against the opponent's left leg.
Such a drive literally pries the ball out of the
opponent's hands.
Guard Blocks Forward's Vision and Executes
Final Twist—Exhibit E-2 shows that the guard
has beaten the forward to this downward drive,
Exhibit E-2
Forunard loses sight of the ball.
Exhibit
E-2

214 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
and, by this lunge downward, has completely
blocked the forward’s vision from the ball.
The guard then quickly swings the ball around
to the right, breaks the forward’s hold and
throws him away from the play. In this final
twist of the scrimmage, the extricating pry on
Exhibit
E-3
the ball is not made by the hands and arms but
by the shoulders, legs and hips. As the guard
pivots away with the ball, his hips rotate against
the forward and aid further in the block. In
this rotary body swing, the hands of the player
now in possession of the ball (former guard)
are used merely as conveyors of the ball. Push-
ing off on his left foot, with his shoulder and
hips still blocking the helpless forward, the
guard completes a right quarter-pivot, steps off
to the right with the left foot, and is free. His
rear or pivotal foot remains in position.
Pivoter Protects the Ball–In Exhibit E-3,
you will note that the pivoter's left leg is well
advanced. This leg, together with the hips
thrown backward and the arms at full ex-
tension forward, blocks off and keeps the at-
tacking man from regaining possession of the
ball. Now, the only opportunity that the former
offensive player would have to get a held ball
would be to dive for it. This he will hardly
do, as it would be easy for the pivoter to
rotate farther to the right on his pivot foot,
and thus take the ball still farther away from
INDIVIDUAL OFFENSE 215
Exhibit E-3
Forward pries guard loose and protects the ball.
the attacking man. Too, the attacking player
might lose his balance and fall, and thereby put
himself completely out of the play.
Man on Defense in Awkward Stance—The
apparently awkward position of the man now
thrown on defense, as shown in Exhibit E-3,
is caused by his continued desire to again
get possession of the ball. However, if the play
is executed as demonstrated, the more deter-
mined the man now on defense is to regain
the ball, the poorer will be his position on the
floor at the end of the play.
Pivoter in Good Stance for Hook Pass—The
pivoter who is now in possession of the ball has
his hands and feet in splendid position for a
right-hand hook pass over the left shoulder.




216 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Exhibit
E-4
Exhibit E-1
Pivoter in good dribbling position.
Pivoter in Position for a Dribble—Or, as
demonstrated in Exhibit E-4, the pivoter is in
perfect position for a dribble. By pivoting to
his right, he could easily dart down the floor,
clear of the attacking man who is now behind
him. If confronted by a smashing defense while
in this low crouching position, he could quickly
change direction. However, he must smash off
from the defense at an angle that will throw
him as deep as possible into his own scoring
territory. If all progress forward should be
stopped, a pivot and a back pass to a trailer
would be the order. The trailer might then
employ the same method of advance until he
would be deep enough in his scoring territory
to shoot or to pass. -




INDIVIDUAL OFFENSE 217
Three Seconds to Recover a Held Ball—The
time consumed in these four steps demonstrating
the recovery of a held ball should be not more
than three seconds. The execution of this play
should be so lightning-like that officials who
are, as a rule, quick to call held balls would let
it go by as a regular play.
FUNDAMENTAL DRIBBLING .
Perhaps the most discussed play in basket-
ball is the dribble. Many coaches do not use
it. They contend that it is practically useless as
a play—first, because the hazard taken with
the ball is too great; second, because four men
remain idle while one man plays the ball.
Other coaches maintain that, if the dribbler
is proficient in stopping, starting and handling
the ball, and is unselfish in his attitude toward
the game, the dribble presents more opportuni-
ties than any other play in basket-ball. But a
dribbler who cannot recover the ball when an
opponent drives for it, is worse than no dribbler
at all.
Dribbling Low—Some coaches maintain that
the upright position is the better one for the
dribble, as it enables the player to see the field
more clearly. I agree with other coaches who
believe that a player in the act of dribbling can
control both the ball and his own body better
when he is dribbling low. The crouched posi-
tion—the accepted form in starting the sprints
218 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Exhibit
M-1
—should be the correct form for starting the
dribble.
Dribble Practice – This crouched position,
ordinarily so difficult to teach beginners, has
been handled very successfully in the method
demonstrated by the “M” series of exhibits.
Line up 24 men on each side of the court and
work by squads of 8. At the commands of “On
your mark,” “Get set,” “Go!” start each squad
separately. As shown by the dribbler in Ex-
hibit M-1, each man at the start should keep the
ball on the floor in front of him, while he him-
self maintains the same body position as does
a sprinter at the start. A successful dribbler
Exhibit M-1
Dribbler ready for first step in fundamental dribbling (practice
form). “On your mark.”

INDIVIDUAL OFFENSE 219
should get under way quickly. He should, dur-
ing all the vicissitudes of his dribble, be able to
protect the ball, or, if necessary, to recover it
instantly. Instruct these apprentices in dribble
practice to take short, quick, shifty steps, keep-
ing the feet well under the body. This foot
position will provide for a sudden shift in any
direction.
Direct the men to dribble so low that the ball
on the bounce does not rise more than ten to
twelve inches from the floor. Have them keep
their knees well bent, hips down, and the head
and neck drawn in well between the shoulders.
Player Demonstrates Correct Dribbling Form
—The player, in Exhibit M-2, is demonstrating
^.
Exhibit M-2
Player demonstrating sºond stºp...in
dribble (practice form).
Get set, Go.”
Exhibit
M-2





220 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
the “Get set” step of the dribble in correct form.
He will soon learn to approximate the proper
distance of each drive to the front. If he
is dribbling too close to his feet, the ball will
Strike his knees; if too far out in front of him,
he will lose control of the ball.
Dribbler Must Push the Ball With the
Cushions of His Fingers—At first, permit the
dribbler to use the hand that is easier for him.
Then have him alternate. See that the ball is
kept well out in front and that the dribble is
maintained by pushing the ball downward with
the cushions of the hands and fingers each time
as it arises from the floor. The muscles of the
forearm and hand must be kept relaxed during
the rest periods between each dribble.
Pivots, Stops, Starts, Turns—The technique
of starting and stopping should receive careful
attention. Much practice time should be spent
in the mastery of the art of these steps. A
successful change of pace is vital. Shadow
dodging and stopping is good practice in shifty
footwork.
First Lessons in Stops, Starts and Pivots—
These lessons in stopping, starting and pivoting
can also be learned early in one’s experiences
by chasing playful dogs. The dog will feint in
one direction to draw his adversary’s body off-
balance; then quickly shift the weight of his
INDIVIDUAL OFFENSE - 221
body in the opposite direction and bound away.
The boy, in his efforts to evade the animal,
learns to emulate his shifts. The dog depends
upon these instinctive reactions for his food
and existence, and he makes few mistakes.
Many a finished basket-ball player has had his
first lessons in stops, starts, pivots and turns
in this way.
An Athlete Will Continue in His Initial Drive
—As a rule, an athlete, regardless of his feints
and shifts, will continue in the direction of his
greatest body impetus, which will be in the
direction of his initial drive. His feints are
but momentary shifts, intended to throw his
opponent off-stride and to give himself a change
of pace. Such feints and shifts do not ma-
terially affect his body impetus.
Pivoting—When pivoting, the head, and the
shoulder located on the same side as the pivot
foot, should be brought back and down. Then
the weight of the body will naturally give in
that direction. The extended foot and leg
should swing around circularly to any turn that
is necessary to evade an onrushing man. The
pivoter should carry the ball directly out in front
of his leg and very low—almost to the floor.
This crouched position protects the ball from
recovery by an opponent. It also protects the
player from shock and gives him an oppor-
tunity to scan the court for team mates. -
222 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Exhibit
M-3
Exhibit M-3
Player demonstrating correct stop at end of dribble.
Stop at End of Dribble—The stop at the end
of the dribble is demonstrated in Exhibit M-3.
The foot is clapped down forcibly, with the toes
pointing straight to the front and the shoe
hugging the floor. The arms and hands are
extended full to the front with the ball clearing
the floor from four to six inches.
Dribbler Safe in His Position—If a guard
should charge in from the front toward the
halting dribbler, he (the dribbler) could
straighten his front leg and thigh and pivot
away—thus presenting his hips to his opponent.
If the guard should continue in his advance and
make contact with the buttocks of the dribbler,
the dribbler could, by quickly shifting the weight

INDIVIDUAL OFFENSE 223
of his body backward, offset the impact of the
guard's charge and pivot on around in another
direction and possibly try an underhand or a
hook pass from his new position.
Improper Stopping—In Exhibit M-4, the
player is making an improper stop after a
finished dribble. He has his foot turned to the
side, causing the force of the stop to be directed
against the ankle. Sometimes the weight of the
body will cause the ankle to roll and a sprain
will result.
Player Easily Charged Off-Position – A
player in this position is easily charged “off-
balance” by his opponent, and the ball is more
Exhibit M-4
Player demonstrating incorrect stop at end of dribble.
Exhibit
M-4

224 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
accessible for an underhand cut by the guard.
A player must learn to stop, both on offense and
On defense. Even though he may be able to
properly judge his stopping distances, unless he
has been properly coached in his foot-positions,
trouble is in store for him. The big idea in
stopping should be to get the maximum ad-
hesive qualities out of the footwear and at the
same time to protect the feet and ankles from
undue strain and injury.
Further Dribble Practice—Good practice in
handling the ball and the body while dribbling
can be had in the following way: Put a guard
out in front of the dribbler with instructions not
to charge in. This plan is to teach the dribbler
to judge distances without being attacked.
Later, let the guard advance and attempt to get
possession of the ball. This will force the
dribbler off at an angle—either on a pivot or
O11 a. #". the right or left—but always to-
ward the side lines, for the reason that the guard
is playing between the goal and his opponent.
By pivoting toward the side line, , the pivoter is
in unguarded territory. The guard does not
dare to get over there to block, for if he did he
would leave the goal unguarded. Continuous
and persistent practice in dribbling fundamentals
is the only road to success; but when once ar-
rived, the dribbler can win games and fascinate
audiences by the perfection of his art.
INDIVIDUAL OFFENSE 225
THE DRIBBLE IN PLAY
Passing the Guard With a Dribble—The
dribble, the pivot, the side step, and the dodge
have revolutionized the game of basket-ball.
Before the pivot was permitted, the player could
advance the ball only by passing it or by batting
it forward. Now, the game is not unlike
checkers. But instead of jumping over the
man, as in checkers, a successful basket-ball
strategist legitimately draws the guard out of
position, then pivots and legitimately blocks
him off.
The Dribbler Under Way—In Exhibit N-1,
with the ball well out in front and the body
under control, the dribbler is under way. In
this crouched dribbling position, the player must
Exhibit N-1
The dribbler under way with the defense obstructing his path.
Exhibit
N-1


226 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
not only watch the ball but must survey every-
thing in his visual field, both to the front and
to the sides, for a distance of fifteen or twenty
feet.
Dribbler Plans to Pass on Left—The dribbler
is planning to pass on the guard’s left. He is
dribbling with his right hand. When within
a distance of about twelve feet from the guard,
he starts a sharp dribble toward him, then splits
off to the guard’s right. This draws the guard
over, for he knows that he must follow the
ball. The dribbler also knows that he has the
power to exchange shocks with the guard if
necessary. But he intends, if possible, to cross-
up his opponent by the strategy of a feint to the
guard's right on his ultimate drive to the guard's
left rather than to smash into physical contact.
Whatever the hazard, he means to keep the
ball. -
A dribbler who plans such a situation intends
to change his pace, for, by taking short choppy
strokes at the ball and by progressing with
quick shifting half-steps, he will confuse the
guard as to the speed he is making. -
º Dribbler Passes on Guard’s Left—As shown
T in Exhibit N-2, when the guard's weight shifts
to the right, the dribbler changes his pace and
comes across with his left hand on a right-
angle smash and drives the ball with lightning-
like speed to the left—the weak side of the
INDIVIDUAL OFFENSE 227
Exhibit N-2
Dribbler passes on guard’s left.
-
guard and out of his path of approach. At
this point, the dribbler throws his body in be-
hind the ball so that he can continue dribbling
with his right hand. His left arm remains in
its extended position to protect the dribble from
the advancing guard. Now, changing his pace
and quickly swinging into a long low stride, he
can accelerate his drive and bring the ball to his
objective sooner than the defense has anticipated.
Guard Recovers From Off-balance—By this
time, the guard has partially recovered from his
off-balance position and lunges backward, en-
deavoring to block the path of the dribbler. It
is now up to the dribbler to sidestep the guard.
By a quick short step forward with the right
foot, followed by a long driving tackle swing
(across the front and away from the guard)

228 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Exhibit
N-3
with the left foot, he can accomplish this. By
this quick shift, he will suddenly present his
shoulder, hip and thigh to the guard.
Guard Again Charging the Ball–From the
position in Exhibit N-1, where the dribbler is
using his right hand, to the position in N-3,
where the dribbler again takes up his work with
his right hand, the ball should have progressed
about four feet.
At this juncture, the guard has regained his
balance and is charging the ball. The dribbler,
by directing his dribble into a right circular
swing, has an excellent chance to drive around
the guard. He is still using his extended left
arm on blocking duty to protect the ball. By
extending this arm, he has also projected his
shoulder as an additional barrier to the guard
Exhibit N-3
Dribbler in right circular suing tries to go around the guard.

INDIVIDUAL OFFENSE 229
who is trying to block the dribbling arm. The
forward’s arm is not, and should not, push the
guard away from the play.
When the guard rushes in to break up the
dribble, he is almost sure to make bodily contact
unless the dribbler by a final circular lunge
throws himself around and beyond the guard
for a spurt, deeper into offensive territory.
There is splendid opportunity in this play for
a pivot and a back pass to a trailer.
Dribbler Plays for a Back Pass to Trailer—
In Exhibit N-4, the dribbler is trying to circle
out and around the guard’s left side. The
trailer, who should be used in all dribble plays,
follows about ten feet behind. The trailer’s
chief functions are to receive reverse pivot
passes from the dribbler, and to recover fumbles
Exhibit N-4
Dribbler plays for a back pass to trailer.
Exhibit
N-4

230 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Exhibit
Exhibit N-5
- Dribbler trying to force his drive past the guard.
when a charging guard upsets the dribbler's
calculations. The trailer is always cautious in
his advance and diligently watches for his
breaks to come. The dribbler in Exhibit N-4,
by swinging out and around the guard, draws
the guard out of position.
Dribbler Continues to Force Drive–In Ex-
hibit N-5, which is a continuation of this play,
the dribbler continues to force his drive to the
guard's left and has intended to circle around
him, but the guard shifts over to run the
dribbler to the side line and upsets the dribbler's
previous plan.
Dribbler Forced to Pizzot—The dribbler, after
driving as deep into his own scoring territory
as possible, is forced to pivot. Note the foot-
work of the dribbler in this exhibit. He ad-

INDIVIDUAL OFFENSE 231
vances his left leg and thigh to the guard as
he recovers the ball. In his effort to get
possession of the ball, the guard works into the
dribbler's scheme. The dribbler, when forced
to pivot, attempts to pull the guard around after
the ball; and the guard follows as the dribbler
has planned.
Ball Looks Erposed—The ball looks much º
exposed in this exhibit, but it is not; for, as the
guard reaches out to bat the ball, the dribbler
in pivoting gives the ball a long, low swing to
the right and brings his left leg around to
follow it as a protection.
Guard Blocked Off–Now, as shown in Ex-
hibit N-6, the advancing guard, having followed
the ball around in its pivotal swing, is com-
pletely blocked off; and the pivoter is ready to
Exhibit N-6
Pivoting dribbler succeeds in blocking guard off.


232 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Exhibit
N-7
pass backward to his advancing trailer who
sees the direction that he should take to avoid
the defense. In this case, the trailer should go
to the pivoter's right, as it is obvious that the
guard is on the outside.
Observe the low crouch of the trailer. Just
as a half-back in football runs low to split
through the line with a driving attack, so
should the trailer in basket-ball drive through.
Pivoter Pulls Away From Guard–In Exhibit
N-6, note again the position of the pivoter's
left leg. Compare this position with the suc-
ceeding step of the same player in Exhibit N-7.
The pivoter, by moving his left leg forward one
quick step, has pulled himself away from the
guard, and thus makes the back pass to the
trailer more secure.
Exhibit N-7
Pivoter pulls awau from guard.

INDIVIDUAL OFFENSE 233
Pivoter Passes to Trailer—The passer's arms
are at full extension; his hips are thrown back,
and his trunk stretched—all of which removes
the ball farther from the guard's reach. The
passer lobs the ball on a two-hand underhand
pass to the fast charging trailer. The guard,
awakening to the new situation, makes a quick
attempt to shift back and cut off the trailer.
The guard has been drawn away from the
direction of his own basket, but may by some
rapid footwork still succeed in protecting his
territory. This angle of defense will be dis-
cussed in the next chapter.
Running Interference—As shown in Exhibit º
N–8, the chances are against the guard getting
back into the play as the pivoter has completed
his rotation to the right and is driving low and
Exhibit N-8
Pivoter aids new dribbler by running interference."




234 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
hard in the same direction as the former trailer
(now the dribbler) is going. With perfect in-
terference, the dribbler can now drive deep into
scoring territory. The man running the inter-
ference makes no personal contact; therefore,
his act is legal. -
Guard Using Thigh and Leg to Stop Revolv-
ing Interference—Note, in Exhibit N-8, that, al-
though the guard is using his leg and thigh in
an effort to stop the revolving interference, he
is likely not to have much success, as the trunk
of the player on offense is in a good driving
position. .
Two Men to One—However, if the pressure
of the guard becomes too severe, the pivoter can
reverse to his own left—thereby letting the
guard smash directly at the ball. The dribbler,
after this pivot, can by using a hook across the
shoulder pass, practically lay the ball into the
hands of his team mate. This play should be
worked so that there are always two men to one.
This handicap is too much for the best of guards.
There is no set blocking in this play. The
guard merely gets into a pocket trying to re-
cover the ball. By the use of a backward pivot
and a back pass, combined with a low, smashing
and driving dribble, the offense can smash to un-
covered sectors. By driving hard at these
angles, the offense can push deep into the
enemy's territory.
CHAPTER IV
Individual Defense
THE THEORY OF GUARDING
The guard is the watchdog of the basket. His
chief business is to keep his enemy from mak-
ing goals; but he should also, when thrown on
the offensive, be able to go down the court on
a dribble or to score on a long shot with the
same success as do the forwards and the cen-
ter. There have been many splendid guards who
have been very low in their scoring average;
but there have been many better guards whose
Scoring average has been high. The fact that
a guard can score should not (as Some guards
who are weak on offense console themselves by
thinking) in any way lessen his defensive
strength. A winning team needs five good
guards and five good forwards—the ten em-
bodied in a team of five. The more threats a
man has, the more he is to be feared.
At least one of your guards should be a big
rangy fellow with an aptness for taking the ball
off the backboard on the rebound and getting it
to the team mate who is in the most strategic
position to advance it toward the goal. A guard
must think quickly enough to determine in the
fractional part of a second whether to pass,
pivot, dribble, or reverse. He has the field be-
fore him and can well choose an opportune
thrust. He must also be able to dash into the
236 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
offensive territory instantly for either a pass or
a shot; but cautious always not to go so deep
in on the offensive that he will leave his goal
undefended. A wary guard will not sacrifice
two points of his team's score by getting out
too far. He will realize, that by holding all op-
ponents to low scores, his team will reap the
benefit of the psychic effect that this fact will
have upon the opposition. The word will go
out that his team has an air-tight defense, which
thought continued and prolonged from game to
game, will put the opponent in an uneasy frame
of mind. Such uneasiness on the part of the
opponent will be conducive to defeat.
A wily guard will never let the opposition
slip in behind him. He will see that neither of
the offensive forwards locates in the corner for
a pot shot at the basket. He will meet a versa-
tile dribbler, who has succeeded in getting past
the forwards and center, out in front of the
basket. In short, a skillful guard will be the
general of his team when on defense, contin-
uously advising his men, who cannot on account
of their floor positions always scan the court, just
when to advance or to retreat as new situations
arise. -
Finally, a real guard will play the ball in-
stead of the man. He will thereby reduce block-
ing to the minimum and will get very few fouls
for illegal guarding. The practice of playing
the ball instead of the man ends in body check-
INDIVIDUAL DEFENSE 237
ing, holding, and eventually in a wrestling bout,
and leaves the ball loose upon the floor.
THE PRACTICE OF GUARDING
CORRECT GUARDING STANCE
º
º
s
3.
Exhibit H-1
Correct guarding stance.
Correct Stance—In Exhibit H-1, the guard Exhibit
is in correct stance for any emergency. He can *"
advance, either to the front or to the side as
conditions might indicate. In this position his
feet are set too close together for combat play,
but, in the flash of an eye, he can shift to meet
any style of offense that might be thrust at him
from any direction. For this reason, the feet
are in this close-up position—flat upon the floor
with the weight of the body well distributed.
This also gives partial relaxation while in posi-

238 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Exhibit
.H-2
tion. The knees are well bent to throw the
whole body into a crouching attitude. The arms
are extended out to the sides but are kept bent
at the elbows. This makes possible a quick cut
of the forearm, either up or down. With the
arms in this ever-ready position, it is easier to
get complete flexion or full extension quickly.
The abdomen is drawn in. The head is drawn
back and in, so that the guard in correct pre-
liminary position resembles an animal standing
on his hind legs. If a guard should try to imi-
tate a kangaroo in an aggressive position, he
would get the idea of proper equilibrium.
In this exhibit, the player is mentally alert;
he is conscious of the fact that he is the de-
fender of his team's goal and that “they shall
not pass.” -
Lateral Guarding—In Exhibit H-2, the guard,
moving laterally after a floor bounce, is using
the boxer’s or the first baseman's step. This is
the fundamental step for the guard to learn
when acquiring his art. He has thrust his left
foot to the side, with the toe pointing diagonally
outward. Most of his weight is resting upon
this foot. He has carried his knee over and
out. His left arm and shoulder are extended to
their limit to block a low pass out to the side.
His right arm is carried in a free position to
be ready for any attempt to pass directly over
his head. If he should be forced to advance
farther to the left side, he would bring his
INDIVIDUAL DEFENSE
Exhibit H-2
Correct position in lateral guarding.
right foot up to the side of his left. He would
then step off to the left again as he has done
here. This same movement of the feet should
continue as long as the player progresses to the
left. In shifting to the right, the order of the
footwork should be reversed. It is natural for
most players to advance with the left foot, but
if the right comes more natural for some, let
them use it; but never let them alternate steps,
as in walking. A guard should neither progress
nor retreat by using alternate walking steps; for
he could too easily become overbalanced and
too slowly regain his equilibrium. If the guard
should desire to go forward, he should bring
his left foot back to the position shown in the
preliminary movements in Exhibit H-1.

MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Exhibit
H-3
- -
- - -
& “s.
Exhibit H-3
Guard in correct retreating position.
Guard Ready to Retreat—The guard is now
ready either to step off to the front to attack
or to retreat. He is using the same footwork
as that of the boxer. As shown in Exhibit
H-3, in retreating, he brings his rear foot back
in an eighteen-inch half-step and his forward
foot back within six inches of the rear foot.
So long as the guard retreats, he continues to
duplicate these steps. With practice in these
steps, a defensive player can cover a lot of
territory in a little while and can change direc-
tions more quickly by this method than by any
other that has been used. When the guard
travels with his feet close together, he, by
taking a single step, will be well balanced and
well-poised for a dart in any direction.



INDIVIDUAL DEFENSE 241
While either advancing or retreating, the
guard should carry his left arm above his head.
Note the arms of the demonstrator in Exhibit
H-3. He is in position to block a quick shot
over his head. He is carrying his right arm
down and to the side to aid his equilibrium and
at the same time to block a diverted pass to
some near-by opponent.
Guard Advancing—In Exhibit H-4, the guard
is advancing with the left foot forward. He
will, as stated previously, bring the right foot
up to the rear of the left foot, and, on the next
step, will advance the left again and so on until
he reaches his objective. A guard while ad-
vancing should use his head, mouth, and feet to
s
* *
Exhibit H-4
Guard in correct advancing stance.
Exhibit
H-4






242 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Exhibit
H-5
good advantage. He should talk his opponents
out of all thrusts or tries at the basket that he
possibly can. A shout, combined with a smart
slap of the foot on the floor and a feint to leap
into the air, will act as a deterrent to many play-
ers on the offense. The guard should call out to
his team mates his ideas of the next offensive
plays. This confuses the offense and many
times keeps them from carrying out their pre-
vious plans and, at the same time, keeps the
guard’s mind alert and develops in him good
leadership. .
In this continued confident frame of mind,
a guard will initiate many plays that may stand
him in good stead when he is thrown on the
offensive. He must keep his body moving all
the time, in a threatening aggressive manner.
A guard can get into a play quicker when he
is alert and active than when he is standing
practically still. A guard should get the maxi-
mum efficiency out of his anatomical machine,
without a sacrifice of position.
Guard Blocking a Feint—As was shown in
Exhibit H-4, the guard was advancing to at-
tack the offense. In Exhibit H-5, he has met
the enemy. The player on offense, by extending
the ball to the front just out of the apparent
reach of the guard, has endeavored to feint and
get the guard out of position.
Without taking an extra step forward, the
INDIVIDUAL DEFENSE 243
s
º-
Exhibit H-5
Guard blocking a feint.
guard leans his weight to the front and wholly
on his left foot. By the full extension of his
left arm, he takes a long underhand cut at the
projected ball. If he succeeds in striking the
ball, he will drive the player on offense back
without sacrificing one foot of defensive terri.
tory. At the same time, he will turn the tables
on the crafty offense; for the guard's move in
touching the ball will cause the offense to feel
quite insecure when close to this style of guard-
ing. This type of defense will drive the op-
ponents farther out of reach and thus keep the
territory behind reasonably safe.
Whether the guard's try in Exhibit H-5 has
been successful or not, he should settle back on
his rear foot and continue in the same position
as shown in Exhibit H-4.


244 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Exhibit
H-6
Incorrect Guarding Stance
Exhibit H-6
Guard advancing in incorrect walking position.
Incorrect Stance—In Exhibit H-6, the guard
is shown in the incorrect guarding walking-posi-
tion. He has walked over to the left to block
a floor bounce or a lateral pass. His footwork
is wrong. Such footwork weakens his defense
against the floor bounce, both on the left and
on the right sides. Nor can he cleverly jump into
the air to block while in this position. The of:
fense can easily catch him off-stride and get
around him.
Practicing Correct Shifts—A great deal of
time should be spent in perfecting these shifts
with the correct forward and lateral advance
and the retreating foot-movements. Shift!
Shift" | Shift!!! Practice the shift to the front,

INDIVIDUAL DEFENSE 245
to the side, and to the rear. There are many
ways to develop agility and lightness in the
shifts. Boxing is the best method, but skipping
the rope, stationary running, and handball will
also improve the footwork of the guard.
BLOCKING OR GUARDING THE HOOK PASS
Guard Advancing to Block—In Exhibit J-1,
the guard is advancing cautiously to the left to
block a pass by the forward to a team mate.
The forward is apparently intending to use a
hook pass, but should the guard rush up too
soon to block the play the forward might pivot
to the right. The guard must play this position
expectantly. This is his only hope; for he
Exhibit J-1
Guard advancing to block a pass.
Exhibit
J-1
(Guard-
ing)

246 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Exhibit
J-2
(Guard-
Ing.)
must also be on the lookout for an across-the-
chest shoulder pass or perhaps a one-hand un-
derarm pass.
Guard Rushes the Forward–In Exhibit J-2,
the guard, now being sure that the hook pass
will be used, rushes the forward. In his effort
to block the pass, he leaps into the air with
his left arm high above his head. He has cor-
rectly used only one arm in the extension, as
the use of one arm only gives him a further
extension of his shoulder. Since a pass can
not be curved, the guard can block a ball going
over on a straight line
with one hand more
easily than with two.
The other arm kept
down at the side aids
in maintaining his
equilibrium. This arm
position will also help
the guard to get a
quicker start in an-
other direction, when
necessary. Or, if a
blocked pass or a fum-
_ \. ble should come his
- way, he would, with
- |, this other arm kept
down, be in better
guardº ºrara position to recover it.

INDIVIDUAL DEFENSE 247
Forward Presents Corkscrew Offense—The
forward, by the mechanics of the pass, has pro-
truded his left shoulder and arm into the on-
rushing guard's face and chest. The guard, by
crossing his right forearm over the forward's
advanced left arm or free arm, will protect him-
self against the forward's advance. But the
guard must drive hard and fast against this al-
titudinous corkscrew offense.
Exhibit J-3
Guard fails to block the pass.
Guard Fails to Block the Pass–In Exhibit Exhibit
J-3, we see that the guard has failed to block gº.
the hook pass. Now all that is left for him to "9)
do is to stick to the passer. He must alight
ready to dart off in any direction that the for-
ward indicates. He must watch the eyes of

248 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Exhibit
J-4
(Guard-
Ing.)
the forward to discern his contemplated direc-
tion. He must always keep between the forward
and the forward's goal.
Correct Alighting Position—There is only
one way for both guards and forwards to alight.
This is with the legs spread well apart, the
knees bent to a half-squat, and the hands resting
easily upon the knees.
In Exhibit J-4, the guard has just alighted
and has raised his hands from his knees. Ac-
cording to the rules of the game, a player is
entitled to his own position on the floor. The
forward does not now have the ball. When he
changes his position, should the guard change
his stance and continue to face him, he (the
guard) would be fouled for illegal blocking.
Exhibit J-4
Guard ready to meet offensive shift.

INDIVIDUAL DEFENSE 249
The forward can now circle outward and
get back into the play. Since the guard, by
rule, may neither shift over in front of the
forward after he has made a move to escape,
nor place his hands upon a man who does not
have the ball, his (the guard's) only hope lies
in his ability to cut the forward off on his way
to the basket or to force him to the side line.
A guard should never turn his back on the bali.
“One eye on the basket and one eye on the man,”
is a good slogan for a guard to follow.
GUARD IN BAD POSITION TO EXTRACT HELD BALL
Guard on Right, Forward on Left – In º'
Exhibit E-1, let us now, for defensive reasons, *
Exhibit. E-1
For defensive discussion, guard is shown on right—forward on left.
Guard in bad position to eartricate held ball.


250 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Exhibit
E-2
(Guard-
ing)
think of the player on your left as the forward
working into an offensive play; while the player
on your right is the guard trying to retain pos-
session of a held ball. He is in possession of
the ball when attacked by the forward.
Guard Has Three Ways to Extract the Ball—
While the guard has his hands on the ball, he
should use all the cunning at his command to
offset his opponent's advantage. He might use
any one or all of three methods to extract the
ball from the guard.
He could, by a quick jerk or twist of the ball,
pry it loose; or by a lunge in one direction
quickly reversed to another, get possession of
the ball. If these efforts failed, he could, by
charging the ball and the opponent as far
backward as possible, and then by quickly
changing his thrust to a lateral downward lunge,
twist the ball with a snap, and jerk away.
If, in this play, the guard sees that he is los-
ing the ball, he should use a quick underhand
upper cut of the ball, with fingers and hands
cupped, and with the shoulder and body fol-
lowing in closely. •
Guard Must Use His Weight to Advantage—
The guard should know how to use his weight
to advantage without committing a foul. He
should try at all hazards to get a held ball, by
using his thighs and arms as well as his hands.
Guard in Hard Straits—In Exhibit E-2, the
INDIVIDUAL DEFENSE 251
Exhibit E-2
Guard in hard straits.
guard is in a bad way. About all he can hope
to get out of the situation is a held ball. Al-
though the forward has him blocked off with
his shoulder and knee, the guard must not ac-
cept the situation. He still has his left hand on
the ball. By swinging his right arm and his
right leg under the forward's left arm and left
leg, he can upset the forward and get the benefit
of the breaks by having a held ball called by
the official. The guard should not try to extri-
cate his head; for if any relaxation is made even
for a second, the forward will pivot away.
Forward Pries Guard Loose—In Exhibit E-3,
the forward, by the use of his arm and knees.
has succeeded in prying the guard loose. The
Exhibit
E-3
(Guard-
ing)

252 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Exhibit E-3
Guard throun in awkward position.
forward in his pivot pulled the guard around,
broke his final hold, and put him completely out
of the play.
The Guard's Only Chance—Now, the only
chance the guard has, is to leave his feet and,
with his right arm forward, dive for the ball.
However, if the ball is in the offensive zone, this
play is dangerous. In any case, it is a difficult
try, as the forward has correctly advanced his
left thigh and leg. This blocks off the guard.
The forward, by a right lateral shifting of the
ball, has closed all of the guard's possibilities
of recovering the ball. But, at all hazards, the
guard must keep on his feet. A guard on the
floor is a man out of the play.

INDIVIDUAL DEFENSE 253
*
...”
Exhibit E-4
Guard to save the play must rush for the basket.
Guard Must Make a Direct Line for Basket— *
The guard must now neither waste time nor (guard.
lose his head. The guard should expect the
pivoting forward to dribble. In Exhibit E-4,
you will see that the forward has pivoted around
and started off on a long, low, sweeping dribble.
The guard should not attack from the rear, but
should strike up a fast pace and endeavor to cut
the dribbler off or force him to the side line be-
fore he reaches the basket. Most forwards count
on swinging into the basket at the side. In this
case, the guard could make a direct line for
the basket and save time, and there present him.
self in proper guarding position to the forward
traveling toward the basket.
ing)


254 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Exhibit
N-
(Guard-
ing)
Exhibit N-1
Guard advancing to meet dribbler.
GUARD BREAKING UP DRIBBLE
Guard Advancing to Meet Dribbler — In
Exhibit N-1, the guard in his crouching stance
is advancing in correct guarding form to meet
a dribbling forward. When the forward drib-
bles to the right side of the guard, the guard
takes as many regular boxer’s steps to his own
right as are needed.
In an effort to confuse the dribbler, the guard
should slap his forefoot to the floor simultane-
ously with a yell and a feint to drive forward;
but, in the same instant, he should shift to the
right instead, and strive to break up the drib-
ble. But he must move cautiously for he sees
(Exhibit N-1) that the dribbler is using his in-
side arm to propel the ball. In other words, the

INDIVIDUAL DEFENSE 255
guard should expect the forward to spring a
surprise, as good form in dribbling requires the
use of the outside hand so that the ball may be
removed as far as possible from the opponent.
The guard, with his right knee well bent and
his right hand close to the floor, has the weight
of his body shifted in the direction of the ad-
vance but is ever ready to quickly change his
stance with any shift of the dribbler.
Guard Drawn Ozer Too Far—Exhibit N-2
shows that the guard has been drawn over too (guard.
far to the right, and consequently has permitted
the forward to change dribbling hands and like-
wise to change direction. The guard now sees
why the inside hand was being used. If the
outside hand had been used in this style of play,
the change of direction as it was executed would
Exhibit
Exhibit N-2
Guard drawn over too far.



256 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Exhibit
N-3
(Guard-
ing)
have been impossible, as the forward could
not have changed the angle of direction quickly
enough to have avoided being blocked. The
guard should always keep this in mind and
watch for the inside dribbling hand.
A guard caught, in this way, off-position,
should shift back about three steps, then charge
laterally (to the left in this exhibit) as quick-
ly as possible, for the dribbler will try to cir-
cle around him. He should strive to cut the
dribbler off by driving him to the side line. In
such a position, this is the guard's only play.
Guard Tries to Prevent Dribbler From Going
Around Him–In Exhibit N-3, the guard is try-
ing to prevent the forward from dribbling
around him, by using his outside (left) hand in
Exhibit N-3
Guard charging the ball. Tries to prevent dribbler from going
around him.
º

INDIVIDUAL DEFENSE 257
a full underarm swing at the ball. As the guard
fights the ball along, he keeps his right hand
upon his knee. He must maintain this crouched
position to be able to meet the shock of a fast,
low-dribbling opponent.
A hard drive by the guard will make the
forward pivot or at least divert his progress
toward the basket. If the forward should pivot,
the guard, after a slight shift in the same direc-
tion, should use an underhand cut at the ball
and thus drive the forward farther way from
the guard’s area of defense.
Guard in Versatile Position—In Exhibit N-4, Exhibit
the guard is in correct guarding stance to meet, tºº.
on his left, a dribble, a bounce, or a pass. He "g)
is in fine position to slash either hand up or
down to block a pass which might come to the
Exhibit N-4
Guard in versatile position.


258 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Exhibit
N-5
(Guard-
ing)
side or over the head. He can, in this stance,
kick either foot laterally to stop a floor bounce.
His left foot is ready to advance. It is within
his guarding province to stamp his feet, feint,
or yell as he sees fit in order to rattle the man
making the dribble. He is, true to training,
watching the dribbler's eyes carefully for some
hint of anticipated direction. His vision encom-
passes the ball only in a secondary manner. His
primary motive is to watch every move of the
forward's eyes, hands, and feet. Through fear
of a fumble, the forward is handicapped. He
must watch the ball, first; the guard, second.
However, the guard must play the ball, and
not the man, although he does not know what
direction the ball will take in the hands of the
dribbler. He, too, is handicapped. Both men
in this play are playing for breaks that will come
to the headiest strategist—be he guard or for-
ward. -
Guard Forces Forward to Pivot—In Exhibit
N-5, the guard, by driving the dribbler to the
side line, forces him to pivot. As the forward
pivots, the guard makes a low underarm swing
at the ball. The guard has advanced his left
foot one regular step. His weight rests upon
this advanced foot. He is now in splendid posi-
tion to feint a charge forward. He should,
however, at all hazards keep the forward in
front of him so that his own team mate may
INDIVIDUAL DEFENSE 259
Exhibit N-5
Guard forces dribbler to pivot.
get better set. A heady guard will never rush
this play; for if he does, the forward will pivot
and draw the guard out of good defensive posi-
tion.
If, in this play, the forward is too far from
his goal to try a shot, it is better for the guard
to shift back two steps and be ready to block
any attempt at a floor bounce or a pass.
The guard had better not attempt to capture
the ball on this threatened dribble, as he is very
likely to be drawn into a trap that has been set
for him by his opponent.
Guard Falls Into Trap Set for Him—In
Exhibit
N-6
Exhibit N-6, the guard has fallen into the trap (Guard.
set for him. He has attempted to recover the
ball from the dribbler and has been sucked-in.
When he sees the pocket that he is in, he tries
ing)


260 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Exhibit
N-7
(Guard-
ing)
Exhibit N-6
Guard throun into pocket.
to break up the forward's pivot pass. By using
the underhand drive, the guard tries to bat the
ball out of the pivoter's hand before he can
pass it to the trailer who is starting on a dead
run to receive the pass.
At this instant, the guard charges the for-
ward and tries an underarm drive at the ball.
In his next move he intends to shift back about
a yard behind the pivoter and then to cut off
the trailer.
With his right hand resting upon his right
knee and his forearm against the pivoter's hip,
the guard is in correct position to make this try
at the ball and also to make an easy shift.
Forward Legitimately Body-checks—But, as
demonstrated in Exhibit N-7, the forward, by
throwing his left thigh and hip outward and


INDIVIDUAL DEFENSE 261
Exhibit N-7
Guard drawn away from direction of opponent’s basket.
backward and his arms forward, has deflected
the movement of the guard's arm away from
its original swing. In other words, the forward
offset the guard’s charge for the ball by throw-
ing his hips back against the guard's trunk and
thigh and by extending his arms full length to
the front. This is what is called legitimate body-
checking, and the guard must now get out of
this pivot pocket quickly, or the trailer will have
the ball for a drive into defensive territory.
The guard has been drawn away from the
direction of his opponent's basket. By some
rapid footwork, he may, by shifting to his rear
and then again to his right, still succeed in pro-
tecting his territory.
Guard Must Now Rely on Speed and Weight
–In Exhibit N–8, the guard is trying to get
Exhibit
N-8
(Guard-
ing)



262 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Exhibit N-8
Guard must now rely on speed and weight to get back into the play.
over and turn the dribbler out to the side lines.
The pivot man, after delaying the guard with
his pivot-pocket block, has turned to the right
and is running legal interference for the new
dribbler.
As a pitcher in baseball runs across the first
base line to back-up the first baseman when a
runner is going to first, so the pivot man turns
and angles off in the direction of the dribbler.
In both instances, legitimate blocking is the aim.
The pivot man makes no contact with the guard
but keeps giving ground slowly.
The guard's success now largely depends upon
his speed and weight. He must charge in front
of the pivot man and cut off the dribbler. But
he must exercise care in his rush toward the
dribbler in order not to be drawn out too far


INDIVIDUAL DEFENSE 263
if the dribbler is near the basket; for the drib-
bler may reverse, turn, and cut off in a circular
swing to the goal. He could easily quarter-turn
left, away from the rushing guard, and hook
pass to a team mate who might be in position
to score. A guard must always bear in mind
that the dangerous shots are those near the
basket. Instruct a guard to force a player with
the ball away from the goal and allow the
player in possession of the ball a pass to a team
mate in the field, rather than permit a close-in
shot as a result of the guard being drawn out.
Note, in Exhibit N-8, that the guard is using
his thigh and leg against the man running in-
terference to force him out of the way. The
guard in this exhibit has made a fatal mistake.
He is too high, and is now in such position that
it is impossible for him to get low. He should
have crouched and charged low when he shifted
over, instead of shifting with his head and arms
so high. ... • -
But now, by stepping back and crouching
for a low charge he would gain nothing, as the
time he would consume in this change of posi-
tion would give the dribbler a chance to drive
to his destination without interruption. Visibly,
by his own mistaken charging position, the
guard is blocked off and can hope only to re-
trieve himself in the next play, but not in this.
264 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
GUARDING A PIVOTING OFFENSE
Many of the theories on proper guarding ad-
vanced by various authorities have been too
general. “Beat them to the ball and get it if
you can” has been the sum and substance of
much coaching along this line.
When an opponent has the ball, specific
guarding technique is necessary—a definite re-
sponse to a definite situation. But one general
theory on guarding is too true to be disre-
garded; that is, that the guard should always
be found between the opponent and the basket.
There is no instance in basket-ball where this
should not hold true.
Exhibit K-1
correct guarding of a pivoter (right side).

INDIVIDUAL DEFENSE 265
Correct Guarding of Pivoter—In Exhibit K-1,
if the guard recovers the ball from the offense,
he will be forced to employ all of the technical
skill that he has. His head, his hands, and his
feet must work clearly, quickly, and accurately.
Well executed footwork is the first requisite
in clever guarding. For this reason a boxer
ordinarily makes a good basket-ball guard. Be-
cause of his previous training, he picks up the
art more quickly than do other athletes.
The forward, in Exhibit K-1, is being closely
pressed by the guard. Not having the proper
opening to pass or to shoot, the forward
chooses to pivot, as this will throw him out of
the path of the guard.
The guard is preparing to give the ball 'an
underhand cut. He has directed his eyes to the
side of the body of his opponent so that he may
get sight of the ball. His left arm is in splendid
position to keep the forward from pivoting
away to the left. As you will see, his left
hand is resting on his left knee. This closes
the gap between the guard’s body and the
forward’s buttocks. The guard’s left forearm is
resting between the forward’s tuberii ischii
(pelvic bones). This position makes it almost
impossible for the forward to pivot around the
aggressive guard.
Now, with the ball in full view, the guard
can use the underhand cut that he has con-
templated. He can use a full extension arm
Exhibit
K- |
266 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Exhibit
K-2
swing at the ball under the forward's right arm,
without losing his balance.
If he should strike at the ball over the for-
ward's right arm, as many guards do, he would
probably get a foul for holding. If he should
escape the foul, he would accomplish nothing
in the play; for if the forward should try a
pivot to the left, the guard’s overhanging arm
would pull the guard off-balance and free the
forward to dribble toward his own goal.
Note, in this exhibit, the position of the
guard’s feet. He has stationed himself so that
his right foot is outside of the forward’s right
foot. His left foot is back of and in line with
the forward’s advanced left foot. After either
a feint to strike or an actual follow-through of
the guard’s extended right arm, the forward will
quarter pivot to the left. Then the guard
should shift to the other side to repeat these
same tactics there.
Shift Completed; Play on Other Side—In Ex-
hibit K-2, the shift has been completed, and we
see the play continued on the other side of the
forward. In making this shift to the opposite
side, the guard, by pressing heavily on his left
knee, simultaneously with a shift of the right
foot backward and across to a landing hop, has
succeeded in blocking the forward off again.
It would have been easier for the guard to
have made this shift directly across with his
INDIVIDUAL DEFENSE 267
Exhibit K-2
Pivoter completes his shift. Exhibit shows guard correctly
guarding a pivoter (left side).
right leg, instead of drawing the leg backward
and across as he did. But the forward has
intentionally projected his rear leg and hips as
far back as possible to hold off the attack of
the guard. As a result, the guard was forced
to shift the right foot forward to clear the
offensive player's rear foot.
The guard, then, as shown in Exhibit K-2,
has brought his left foot to the side front and
stationed it close to the outside of the forward's
left foot. Now, in his reversed position, the
guard’s right hand rests on his right knee. The
stance of the men in this exhibit is identical
with that of the men in Exhibit K-1, except
that the play has changed sides.

268 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Exhibit
K-3
The guard is now set for any emergency.
The forward cannot throw him off-balance by
a backward charge because, as explained pre-
viously, the position of the guard’s left arm
against the forward’s buttocks will prevent this.
The forward is carrying most of his own
weight on his front foot. By straightening this
knee, he can drive his force backward and off-
set any charge from the rear. He can legiti-
mately block the guard off and at the same time,
by extending his arms farther forward, can
keep the ball away from any possible danger
from the guard. Come what may, a guard in
this position, who is versatile with this shift, has
good guarding technique and a splendid oppor-
tunity to get the breaks at any moment of the
game. *
INCORRECT GUARDING OF PIVOTING OFFENSE
Inc.crrect Guarding of Pivoter—Exhibit K-3
shows the guard when he has not shifted over
far enough to guard the pivoting forward.
Unfortunately, this is not an unfamiliar guard-
ing posture on many basket-ball courts.
In this exhibit, the guard’s left foot has not
been shifted far enough forward and laterally.
The rear foot is too flat upon the floor. True,
the brace should come from this foot, but the
heel should be raised off the floor, and the
weight should rest upon the toes, which must
be kept in a push-off position.
INDIVIDUAL DEFENSE 269
Exhibit IV-3
Incorrect guarding of a pivoter.
The guard's head is back too far. He has
also left too much space between his knees and
thighs and his opponent's body. There is too
great distance between his left foot and the
forward’s left thigh for the guard to make a
quick underhand thrust at the ball.
As stated before, the guard's forearm, instead
of his humerus (upper arm), should rest be-
tween the forward's pelvic bones. This par-
ticular contact gives more agility to the guard's
shift and closer contact with the opponent's
body.
Guard One Short Shift Off Correct Form—
In short, the guard's whole body is one short



270 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
shift off correct position. In this incorrect
and insecure guarding stance, the forward can
sense the uncertain movement of the guard and
pivot away before being attacked. But, by
taking a short shift forward, the guard can
improve his position. This short shift should
advance the guard's left foot one-half step and
bring his right foot to position just outside the
forward's right foot. Now, with the arms
brought up to proper positions and the head
swung downward and forward into full view
of the ball, he can, by a feint to strike at the ball,
make the forward pivot in the other direction,
and thus continue to worry the forward and
watch for breaks.
|
-
- -
- -
- - - -
Exhibit R-4
Guard in correct position aims to bat ball out of pivoter's hands.



INDIVIDUAL DEFENSE 271
Guard in Correct Position Aims to Bat the
Ball Out of Opponent's Hands—In Exhibit K-4,
the guard is in correct position. He has, fol-
lowing the forward’s last pivot, shifted back
to the right side. The guard is now driving
the arm forward with full extension. His aim
is to bat the ball out of the Opponent's grasp.
Exhibit
K-4
Bear in mind that the guard's forearm only, is
resting against the forward’s hip and thigh and
that his left hand is firm on his own left knee.
Therefore, his position is legal, and he will not
be fouled.
Should the forward again attempt to pivot,
the guard can again shift. There is decided
advantage gained by the underarm cut, and
advantage lost by the overarm thrust. In the
underarm cut, the extensors are brought into
full play; while in the overarm thrust, the flex-
ors execute the play. By the use of the flexors,
there is increased tendency to hold the for-
ward's obtruding arm and, incidentally, to foul.
Guard Committing a Common Foul–In Ex-
hibit K-5, the guard is committing a common
foul. He has gone too far to one side to re-
cover the ball; therefore, he must anchor him-
Exhibit
|K-5
self by hanging on to the man with the ball.
Thus, by putting his left hand on the opponent's
hip, he commits a foul. -
In Exhibit K-4, the correct way to avoid
making this foul was discussed. In short, the
272 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Exhibit R-5
Guard committing a common foul against the pivoter.
guard demonstrated how to play the ball instead
of the man.
FOOTWORK IN RECOVERY OF BALL
* Guard Feinting for the Ball–In Exhibit K-2,
the guard is shown feinting for the ball by using
an underhand cut, in order to force the forward
into a pivot to the right. In Exhibit K-6, the
guard, in making his shift, is using footwork
identical with that in Exhibit K–2. But, instead
of making the underhand cut with the right
hand as before, he leans slightly backward and
to the right and drives forward with his left
hand. By forcing his left arm and shoulder
under and through the offensive player's out-

INDIVIDUAL DEFENSE 273
Exhibit K-6
Guard, after shifting, drives forward with left hand and follows
through on ball.
stretched arms, he drives his hand through to
the top of the ball. He leans against and into
the player as he forces the ball downward
against the floor. The guard should never at-
tempt this inside-hand undercut until he has
forced his opponent into an off-position.
Guards who can properly execute the foot-
work employed in Exhibits K-6 and K-7 have
reached high perfection in their art. The guard
in Exhibit K-6, with his inside hand on the
ball, is in splendid position to recover possession
of it. The rest depends largely upon footwork.
Guard Blocks Forward's Progress—In Ex-
hibit K-7, with the same firm pressure against
Exhibit
K-7

274 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Exhibit K-7
Guard blocks intended progress of the pivoter.
the ball, the guard takes his left foot from be-
hind the forward and puts it down to the side
front of the forward's right leg. Here, he
establishes a complete and legitimate block of
the forward's progress.
Jointly with this forward movement of the
left foot, the guard brings his right arm into
the play. Now with an outward swing of the
arms at full extension, together with plenty of
pressure against his adversary's body, the guard
masters the situation. In this final sweep of
the arms, the ball should not be raised off the
floor more than six inches. The guard's
shoulder, thigh and leg have forced the forward
completely out of the play. The more he tries

INDIVIDUAL DEFENSE 275
to hold on to the ball, the worse will be his
position when the play is through. His only
chance to recover the ball will be to dive for it.
Guard Masters the Play—For, as shown in
Exhibit K-8, by a continuation of the circular
pivot to the right, the guard gets complete con-
trol of the ball. He is carrying it low (not
more than six inches from the floor) and out
in front of him. His legs are still protecting
the ball, and he is getting into excellent position
to start a dribble. Or, from this position, he
could execute a hook pass, a two-hand under-
hand pass, or a shove-shot floor bounce.
Exhibit K-8
Guard masters the play.
Exhibit
K-8

CHAPTER V
Team Offense
THEORY
When a team is in possession of the ball, it is
on the offensive. When it loses possession of
the ball, it is thrown on the defensive. A team's
ability to get from one to the other quickly is
often the deciding factor in its success. Theo-
retically, the offense is much stronger than the
defense.
At present, there are but two types of basket-
ball offense that function. These are the four-
man offense and the five-man offense. But
there are countless variations of these offensive
styles, as is evidenced by the hundreds of
different plays that can be worked out from
them. Teams that are most versatile in reper-
toire, often use both styles of offense, or a com-
bination of both in the same game.
The Four-Man Offense—In the four-man
offense the rear guard does not try to score and
seldom goes past the center circle. This is the
generally accepted offensive style in many
schools. In fact, most of the larger conferences
employ only the four-man offense. The main
reason for this choice of offense is that it
eliminates the possibility of leaving the goal
unguarded at any time during the game.
TEAM OFFENSE 277
In the four-man system, the rolling offense
formation works well. This rolling offense
possibly bewilders a team which is unacquainted
with its method of execution more than any
other style of play.
The Five-Man Offense—While the team is on
the aggressive, the five-man offense does not
recognize floor positions. It operates on the
shuttle plan, the guards working back and
forth—one guard, down, and one, up. Any com-
bination of four may carry on such an offensive.
Sometimes it will be the center or one of the
forwards who will drop out of the play and
become the rear guard, and again, on signal,
the rear guard will go down on the offense and
another team mate will take up the place vacated
at guard.
This style of play calls for experienced and
versatile players, and is much more hazardous
for both the offense and the defense than is the
four-man offense; because, if there should be a
flaw in the workings of this five-man offensive
machine, the defense might intercept the ball
and break through to an inadequately defended
goal.
This style also brings more hazard to the
defense pitted against it than does the four-man
offense, for the reason that the five men in the
play are much more difficult to spot and to
cover than are the four men in the other style.
278 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
The five-man offense is, in reality, always a
Surprise attack; and the combinations of plays
that can be worked out from it are almost
without number. This is not so true of the
four-man offense, from which comparatively
few surprises can be sprung, because there are
five men on defense against four on offense.
In short, the five-man offense is the foster child
of surprise and chance; but if a team never
takes a chance, in the end it never gets far. Be .
sure of your team’s merits and of its founda-
tion, its groundwork in fundamentals; then
sanely open up on every chance that the game
offers.
It is usually the more daring team—a team
willing to take outside chances—that plays a
five-man offensive. If executed properly, it is
brilliant and scintillating and far superior in
point of results obtained than any other style
that has as yet been used. However, regardless
of the style of offense used, there are many
ways in which to work the ball down the floor.
The most popular methods are the short pass,
the long pass, and the combination of both.
One of the first teams in America to use the
short pass and to stick patiently to it was the
Buffalo, New York, German Y. M. C. A. aggre-
gation, which, in addition to making a phenome-
nal record, succeeded in winning the Pan-
American championship at Buffalo in 1900 and
TEAM OFFENSE 279
annexed the Olympic title at St. Louis in 1904.
This team swept all opposition before it for a .
period of twelve years.
Following the date of these conquests by the
Germans, the pivot rule was made more liberal,
and a thoroughly revised game gradually
evolved. With this evolution of the game, the
players were permitted to start a quick smash-
ing dribble up the floor, with one hand only, and
to recover the ball just before the defense was
able to get it; then, by quickly pivoting on the
rear foot, the player could reverse his position
and present his back to the onrushing guard.
A trailer followed about ten feet behind the
dribbler so as to be in position to receive the
ball, on a drive. The dribbler then reversed
and passed to the onrushing trailer, who sliced
off in an open zone. The trailer, then, either
continued this style of play, or shot for a basket
as the occasion demanded. These are some of
the principles that have made the short pass
game the dominant style of the present day.
There is nothing mysterious about the short
pass, short shot game. It has been a natural
growth—the real success of it lying in the fact
that it makes legitimate blocking possible. True,
it is complicated, and it takes many hours of
patient, laborious effort to get a smooth work-
ing outfit. However, it is not necessary to
have a team of star players to work this style
280 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Of game; but it does take a mechanical team
well drilled. The main point in its execution is
the development of footwork so that the men
may be able to command a maximum area of
floor space in which to pass by pivoting and
reversing.
The dribble, the bounce pass, the short pass,
and the long pass worked in with a revolving
triangular or rolling offense, together with the
reverse and the pivot, serve to complicate the
playing and to bewilder the defense. The pivot
has made it possible for a player to pass to
anyone on the entire court without being
pocketed or blocked-off by the defense.
The short pass game keeps more men busy
all the time than does the long pass game. The
short pass game keeps every man active mentally
and physically during every minute of play.
There can be no loafers on a short pass team,
but there is an opportunity for men to loaf on
a long pass team.
The long pass was one of the first passes to
be used in basket-ball. It worked, in its earlier
days, better than it does now; for, in those days,
it was easier for the “sleeper” to evade the
guards, because the guards were so intent upon
watching the ball in the hands of their own
team-mates that they would neglect their jobs.
A long pass team always employs a “sleeper”
who stays around under or near the offensive
TEAM OFFENSE 281
basket, and either receives the ball and tries for
a set-up at goal, or receives it and passes to
one of the forwards who cuts down the side
line and in, toward the basket. This style of
play has some very evident weaknesses. One
is that, on account of the distance that the ball
must travel On the long pass, the defense can
easily gage and either cover the man or inter-
cept the ball. Another is, that it is a difficult
matter to get the fifth man into the play quickly
enough to be of much use to his team-mates
down the floor. It is practically impossible to
get more than four men into the immediate
long pass game.
Still another weakness of the long pass game
is that, should the ball on a long pass be inter-
cepted by the opponents and a quick thrust be
made into their own territory, the previous
Offense, now suddenly thrown on the defense,
would be left widely scattered and could not
assemble quickly enough to present an effective
defense. .
Spot Basket-ball—This style of basket-ball is
played by teams that work on the theory that
basket-ball should, in its execution of play,
operate on the same general plans as football.
In this style of game, every player on offense
moves to a designated spot on a certain count.
The signal being given, the play immediately
goes into operation and functions exactly as
282 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
planned, regardless of the defense. In other
words, the offense plays the designated spots,
and figures that, by so doing, the ball will have
been so well-timed that it will reach the spot
as scheduled and that a certain player will be
there to receive it.
The weakness of this style of play is obvious.
When the offense rushes to apparent places of
advantage with little concern as to the possibil-
ity of losing the bail, it has utterly ignored the
cardinal principle of passing, namely, that a
player should pass to an unguarded position.
The pass in spot basket-ball is apt to arrive at
its destination just in time to find an opponent
playing that spot and ready to receive the
pass. It is an unsafe style and is used prac-
tically not at all in this section of the country.
Team Strategy—Taking decided advantage of
strategic moments during time out periods de-
termines the success of versatile teams. Ath-
letic battles are as truly won in these hasty
heads-together conferences on the court, when
time is called out, as are military engagements
decided, by small details despatched to precarious
duty, under the protection of their own strategy.
Often in the heat of the game, a team does not
obey the instructions given in the dressing
room, regarding offensive play. The team may
have an off-night and not be going well. It is
TEAM OFFENSE 283
then that the captain should ask for time out
as soon as he gets possession of the ball.
In these time-out periods, after the applica-
tion of wet towels to necks and faces and
vigorous rubs with dry towels, the men should
be receptive to constructive suggestions by their
captain. Probably the most efficient method of
presenting such suggestions is for the captain
to ask direct questions.
“Center, are you timing your tip-off so that
the men driving through are receiving the ball
at the designated spot?
“Are we leaving our feet and driving high and
hard into the air when we receive the tip-off P
“Are we breaking rapidly on the offense?
“Are we playing for every break?
When forced on the defense by the loss of
the ball, “Are we covering hard and fast?
“Are we changing pace at will or do our op-
ponents set our pace for us?
“Are we talking enough during the game?
“Men, are we fighting our hearts out, for our
school? Let's go, gang.”
Such “get togethers” during time-outs en-
courage the men and make them more sure of
their play. -
It is good team strategy to work a “sleeper”
under the basket when the defense is absorbed
with up-court activity. It is also good team strat-
egy, if the men are overwrought, for the captain
284 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
to order the back-court or held-ball game as soon
as the ball is put into play and possession is
obtained.
The offense, when not overwrought, should
keep the ball constantly in motion, as there is a
psychological point involved which must not be
underestimated. By such offensive strategy, the
defense is unconsciously made to feel the loss of
the possession of the ball. Possession of the
ball is the main object of the game. The sub-
conscious feeling accompanying prolonged lost
possession of the ball grows into the feeling of
the loss of the game and often results in a
breakdown for the team that is thrown con-
stantly on the defensive. This possession of
the ball by the offense can be obtained only by
cleverness on the part of five wide-awake men
skilled in swift accurate passing along certain
definite passing lanes and angles, where they
will keep the ball constantly in motion. A team
that can successfully carry this program through,
will display many of the essentials of winning
basket-ball strategy.
FORMAL OFFENSIVE PRACTICE DRILLS
Purpose—Drill in teaching mass or team
fundamentals must be followed with the same
earnestness as is drill in teaching individual
fundamentals. In these drills that follow, your
aim as a coach should be to acquaint the entire
TEAM OFFENSE 285
squad with all necessary fundamentals. Drib-
bling, pivoting, reversing, feinting, passing, and
goal shooting, all comprise a part of these drills.
This means that ultimately out of them will
evolve a combined team-offensive. -
Any number of practice drills can be worked
from the following set-formation: Work the
men in Squads of five. Line up the forwards
and centers in a row in the middle of the court,
and facing the basket. The floor guard and the
rear guard should be in line with the center, and
in their own half of the court. The guards
should not move up until the primary three start
the execution of the play. Then the floor guard
advances, followed by the rear guard. The eight
dril's that follow are worked from this formation.
OFFENSIVE DRILLS WITHOUT OPPOSITION
Drill I—Coach off to the side and near the
corner floor-bounces to the center, who always
advances to meet the ball. Center starts fast
dribble toward basket. No. 2 (right forward)
cuts across in front of dribbler while No. 1 (left
forward) swings in behind and on around to
basket. Center passes to either of the two for-
wards near the basket. No. 4 (floor guard)
acts as trailer for center who is dribbling. No.
5 (rear guard) comes up, on the play, to the po-
sition vacated by floor guard. The ball is played
until a goal is made. There should be no oppo-
Diagram
3
286 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
DIAGRAM 3
PRACTICE DRILL
h
^ º * *
O
Drill 1, without opposition.

TEAM OFFENSE 287
sition. In this drill, the center sometimes drib-
bles on and in to the basket and “lays” the ball
over the rim for a goal.
Drill 2–Coach floor-bounces to center who
always advances to meet the ball. Center drives
forward on short dribble. The two forwards
crisscross in front of center. Center floor-
bounces on outside of No. 1 (left forward).
No. 1 receives the ball on the bounce and swings
on around, dribbling in to the basket for a shot.
No. 2 cuts in on the opposite side for rebound
work. Center drives on toward basket for re-
bound if needed. Floor guard drives on down
center of court on follow-up to position vacated
by center. Rear guard comes up to position
vacated by floor guard.
Drill 3—Coach floor-bounces to center. Cen-
ter short floor-bounces to No. 2, who cuts across
in front of center and dribbles to the left and
around toward the basket. No. 1 cuts in behind
No. 2 and No. 3 in the direction of the open
right side for a follow shot. No. 3 trails No.
2 on the outside. At a given point on the
goal zone line eight feet from the side line and
sixteen feet from the center of the court, No. 2
pivots out toward the side lines and passes to
No. 3, who swings on around, dribbling in to
the basket for a shot. After the pivot by No. 2,
the right forward reverses and cuts in toward the
basket for rebound work. No. 4 follows drive
Diagram
4
Diagram .
5
288 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
DIAGRAM 4
PRACTICE DRILL
\ y
O
—º
Driii 2, without oppositiºn.

TEAM OFFENSE 289
down center of court for follow-up. Rear guard
moves up to position vacated by floor guard.
Drill 4—Coach floor-bounces to center. Cen-
ter short floor-bounces to No. 2 (right forward),
who dribbles across and around toward basket.
Left forward cuts around behind right forward,
and No. 3 (center) trails No. 2 on the outside as
in Drill 3. At a point in the middle of the court
near the back of the foul circle, No. 2 pivots
out towards the side line and fakes a pass to
No. 3, who continues on his way to the basket.
No. 2, after the feint to pass, makes a back pass
to No. 4, who comes down the center of the
floor and dribbles directly in front of the basket
for a shot. No. 2 now reverses and cuts in to
the basket for rebound work. No. 5 advances
to the position formerly occupied by No. 4.
Drill 5—Coach floor-bounces to center. Center
dribbles down to region well back of free throw
line. Both forwards crisscross behind dribbler
on their swing toward the basket. As No. 2
comes around behind the dribbler, he (the
dribbler) pivots out toward the side line and
fakes a pass to the right forward. This for-
ward reaches out for the ball much the same as
does a half back in a fake pass from the quar-
ter, but continues on his way to the basket. The
center now turns and fake-passes to the floor
guard who drives by, faking to take the pass
from the center. The center now back-passes
- Diagram
6
Diagram
7
290 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
DIAGRAM 5
PRACTICE DRILL

º \
º
26
*
xf
26.
sº .*
Ske 26.
DS3 ×
*.x
X. @
! --. F w tº-RP
3 -C
}%
4-
Wy
Q
Drill 3, without opposition.
TEAM OFFENSE 291
to the rear guard, who has already moved up to
the floor guard’s position and is in good shape
to dribble on in for a shot directly in front of
the basket. The center cuts out and around to
the left for a follow shot on rebound work.
Using the rear guard on a play of this sort
would not be attempted in a match game, but
in drill work it is splendid to keep up interest
and to teach team fundamentals while they are
not so expensive to learn. Every man who
figures in such a play will develop initiative.
Drill 6—Coach floor-bounces to center. Center
dribbles down to right side of court, allowing
the right forward to cut in front and the left
forward to cut behind. Center pivots and fakes
to pass to left forward, and then passes to the
floor guard, who comes down, receives the ball,
and hook-passes to the right forward, who has
swung around to the basket. The center re-
verses and drives in to the basket for rebound
work and thus assists the forwards. The rear
guard follows down the field and takes up the
position that the floor guard formerly occupied.
Drill 7–Coach floor-bounces to right forward,
who in turn chest-shoves on a floor bounce
across the floor to left forward. Left forward
chest-shoves with floor bounce to right forward,
who has advanced diagonally across floor toward
the basket. Right forward floor-bounces to
center, who dribbles toward basket, while the
Diagram
8
Diagram
9 *
292
MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
DIAGRAM 6
PRACTICE DRILL
//#!,
ſº -
º
#
\l
1:lf.
4.
\ ,
O
Drill 4, without opposition.

TEAM OFFENSE 293
left forward continues around toward basket
also. Left forward crosses over behind center
to open right side for follow work. The floor
guard drives toward the basket to receive a
back pass from center and dribbles in to the
basket and shoots. The center, after pivoting,
reverses and cuts toward the basket for rebound
work. The rear guard follows down the court
and takes up the position of the floor guard.
Drill 8—Coach floor-bounces to left forward,
who dribbles over toward side lines and then
swings in toward the basket. The right for-
ward swings across the court in front of the
center and also in front of the dribbling left
forward. The center swings over toward the
left side of the court, then back to the right side
in a circular fashion and finishes by coming up
under the basket on the right side. The floor
guard drives straight down the center of the
court and receives a back pass from the left
forward who has pivoted. The floor guard now
hesitates for a moment, ready to shoot or to
pass. As the left forward by a legitimate pivot
has the floor guard protected from attack, the
guard can now practice on his footwork. By
maintaining a crouched position, the floor guard
steps forward and backward with his left foot
while the right foot is kept in position. After
several feints to shoot or to pass to a team mate,
he tries a high push arch shot. All players drive
Diagram
|0
294
MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
DIAGRAM 7
PRACTICE DRILL
(i)
z-R.F.
W-y
O
Drill 5, without opposition.

TEAM OFFENSE 295
in for the rebound. The rear guard has again
followed down to the floor guard's vacated posi-
tion. The left forward, after letting the floor
guard shoot, quickly reverses and cuts out to
the left side of the basket for rebound work.
OFFENSIVE DRILL WITH OPPOSITION
In the preceding practice drills, all work was
done without any opposition. After much prac-
tice on these drills without opposition, place one
guard, only, directly under the basket and in-
struct him to harass the offensive advance as
much as possible. This will give the offense its
first taste of defense. -
When the offense scores regularly with the
one guard opposing it, add a second guard.
Then as conditions warrant, add a defensive cen-
ter. These three men on defense should cause
lots of worry to the advancing quintet.
Now, make a rule that the ball shall be twice
in possession of each offensive man before the
offense can attempt a goal against the defensive
trio. This is good practice in learning to evade
the defense by passing. tº
Finally, add the two defensive forwards, and
send the offensive five against the regular de-
fensive line-up. You will soon see, with full
opposition thrown into the play, how well the
men have mastered their fundamental drills
without opposition. .
296
MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
DIAGRAM 8
PRACTICE DRILL
/
§
\é
Q
/
Drill 6, without opposition.

TEAM OFFENSE
297
DIAGRAM 9
PRACTICE DRILL

£y
!-LP 3-C 2-R.F.
O
Drill 7, without opposition.
298
MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
DIAGRAM 10
PRACTICE DRILL
*
*
*
.*
X’
ſº Dº x *
x *
ſ Ar
Af
** X”
X’
|x
}*** \
!-- F P’3.c 2-R.F.
4.
O
Drill 8, without opposition.

TEAM OFFENSE 299
When a violation or a penalty is committed
by either side, call the ball dead, and start the
play again. Each time after the ball is called
dead, put it again into play by a floor-bounce to
the offensive team.
Offensive Rear-Guard-Signal Drill Against a
Set Five-man Defense—In the previously dis-
cussed drills where full opposition was grad-
ually thrown in, there was no well-defined
offensive formation that could be changed after
the men had started their advance. In this
drill, if the offense suddenly finds itself con-
fronted with a defense drawn out of position,
a rear-guard signal is used to divert the plan of
attack.
For instance, the offense is sent against a set
five-man defense. The offensive running (floor)
guard, if conditions should suddenly warrant it,
is in a splendid position to call out a numerical
signal and, in a flash, change the offensive style
of attack even after the offense is deep within
the opponents’ territory.
Many times this little trick will give an intelli-
gent and versatile outfit the advantage of a
break which will win a game. Because the
floor guard, while facing his own basket upon
which his team mates (forwards and center) are
advancing, can survey the weaker spots in the
defense. He is in vantage ground to shout out
a signal which will designate the most versatile
300 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
offense to use in the event of a sudden change
in the defense. * &
If this late signal drill should show up well
in practice, by its continued use the team might
find it expedient for games. Personally, on ac-
count of the confusions of sounds and on ac-
count of the danger of this vocal signal being
drowned in the noise of the crowd, I hesitate to
recommend its unqualified use in a game. There
is too great a danger of “balling up” the team.
INFORMAL GAME DRILLS FOR TEACHING
MASS FUNDAMENTALS *
Twenty-one—This game of “Twenty-one” is
another drill that will stimulate the men to their
best efforts. In this game, a premium is put
upon accuracy, as direct hits count 3 points,
rebound hits count 2 points, and a follow shot
counts 1 point. The team that first gets a total
of 21 points wins. This is also a splendid drill
to teach the men coolness under pressure of
competition.
Directions for the drill: Use five men on
each competing squad. Work two squads (one
at each basket) at a time. Restrain each team
by a line twenty-five feet from its respective
basket. This distance can be advanced or re-
tarded as conditions warrant. Give each squad
a ball and instruct the men on both squads to
shoot in rotation. There is no rule that the two
TEAM OFFENSE 301
teams must take an equal number of shots but
the men on each squad must shoot in rotation;
and each man must shoot until he makes a goal,
—on a direct hit, a rebound, or a follow-
through. Of course, the more accurate shoot-
ing team will win, as seven direct hits will de-
cide a contest. The player that shoots and
misses either a direct hit or a rebound must fol-
low up and score his one point unaided. After the
goal is made, the player making the goal passes
the ball to the next man in the shooting line.
There are no restrictions on any of the men
as to the kind of shots they use to make their
goals. So they will naturally employ the ones
with which they are most proficient.
Make a list of the kind of shots that each
man uses under the stress of this desire to
score, and later, specify that each man shall
use a shot different from the one used in the
last contest. In this way, the players can read-
ily see how weak they are on the shots that they
seldom use, and they will then be in a receptive
mood for the fundamental drills in the teaching
of the various shots, so concerned will they be
about their scoring power.
It is a good plan to bring the element of time
into this game. Put a watch on the players
each day and see if the winning team can score
its 21 points back of the twenty-five-foot line in
three minutes or less. -
302 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
- DLAGRAM 11
INFORMAL GAME-DRILL
% =========º R *======= =%t,
- O
100% game.


TEAM OFFENSE 303
100% Game Drill—This drill is designed to
teach versatility and accuracy, the stress being
placed upon versatility in the use of funda-
mentals. Directions and rules for playing fol-
low: Play this game the first thing after the
squad reports for practice in the afternoon. It
gives the squad a good limbering up and develops
the players' floor technique.
The men work in squads, preferably five on
each Squad. Each squad uses its own basket
and all squads that are working compete for the
highest team score. Each man competes for his
squad on the scale of 100 points for a perfect
individual score.
Outline for each squad ten positions on
the floor, as shown in Diagram 11, from
whence ten specified fundamentals will be
executed by each man on the squad. Conse-
quently, each man gets a try at a different shot
or play from each of the various positions. Each
try counts ten points toward his perfect score
and ten points toward his team's total score. A
violation or a penalty incurred by one of the
competing men will take ten points off his indi-
vidual score. Practically all of the essentials of
basket-ball can be taught from such drills as
this. -
In starting this drill, pass the ball to the
player who should, in his various tries, swing
into positions that simulate every possible game
Diagram
| |
304 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
condition. After the player has executed each
try, he should throw the ball back to the coach
or to the director of the drill before he begins
his new try. In this drill, the player must
never, between plays, carry or dribble the ball
from one position to the other, for, by so doing,
he would not be simulating game conditions. In
games, men do not dribble away from the basket
and then turn and shoot toward it, because in
this event the guard would be between the
player and the basket; neither do men in games
run with or carry the ball. Each man, when in
position to score, must shoot at least by the
time he hears the count of three. A violation of
technical play during a try invalidates that try
at goal, even though the try has been successful.
Therefore, the score for this try would be zero.
An outline of a tentative program for an
afternoon of the “100% Game Drill” follows:
The crosses used (see Diagram 11) indicate the
specified areas on the floor from which the
players will work, and the numbers indicate the
order in which the plays will be made.
The tentative shooting program is outlined
here only for the purpose of setting forth a
practical outline that is subject to change as
conditions warrant.
1. Player standing in corner of court within
3 to 5 feet of the end and side lines receives the
TEAM OFFENSE 305
ball and chest-shoves or push-arches a shot for
the basket. -
2. Player standing in court on the left side,
between corner and free throw line, uses an
underhand loop arch carom against backboard.
3. Player standing back of free throw line
makes a free throw try for goal by using the
underhand loop arch shot.
4. Player standing back of the center of the
court receives a bounce pass from coach and
dribbles without opposition down the court, to
the side of the basket. As the player nears the
basket, he uses the one-hand english follow shot
against the backboard in a try for goal.
5. The player stands near the free throw line
ready to break up an opponent's dribble. This is
his task from this location at point 5. He can
advance or retreat to keep the dribbler from
scoring. If the guard prevents the dribbler
from scoring, ten points are added to the guard's
score. Merely dribbling past the guard does
not make his try a failure. The dribbler must
also cage the ball before the guard has lost his
chance to increase his score.
6. Player, standing in position in opposite
corner from which try No. 1 was made, makes
a push arch shot for basket.
7. Player repeats his play No. 2 on the oppo-
site side at the same relative angle but farther
out in the court. .
306 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
8. Player, standing about 20 feet from the
basket and at an angle of 45° with the sur-
face of the backboard, push-arches his shot
for the basket. He does not aim to play the back-
board, but intends to make a direct hit if possible.
9. Player takes the ball from the coach on
bounce, back of the center circle. The player
reverses the conditions in play No. 5. Instead
of breaking up the dribble, as in the play just
mentioned, he is now forced to attempt a suc-
cessful dribble past a guard who has been
stationed near the goal zone line.
10. The player, again receives the ball on a
bounce pass back of center. Station the guard
on the free throw line with instructions not to
advance too far to meet the dribbler. The
dribbler advances down the center of the court.
When he gets within shooting range, yet still
far enough in front of the basket so that the
guard on the free-throw line cannot block the
ball, the dribbler rises on one foot, and with
a long, two-hand underhand loop arch shot
raises the ball high in the air for a floater. He
then cuts around the guard for rebound work.
The guard will resist him in this effort. Either
the direct hit or the goal from the follow shot
will count as a perfect score on this try.
Players striving to outdo each other will work
hard on these events in off-hours. The events
can be varied to suit the needs of any squad.
TEAM OFFENSE 307
Always conduct these competitive drills as
team or squad events and not as individual con-
tests. If handled in this way, the stronger
members will coach the weaker ones in shooting
So as to improve their own team percentages.
The commanding desire is to win, and this
desire is the first incentive toward co-operation
or teamwork.
Pepper-Passing—Line up the men informally
in squads of five. Give each squad a ball and
instruct the men to see which squad can make
the most passes in one minute. On the com-
mand, “Ready,” they will start. Every fumble
will lessen the chances of the squad making the
highest score, as only completed passes will
count. The speed used in the execution of the
completed passes is the deciding factor in the
competition. - -
In the presentation of work in fundamentals,
it is easy to provide many practice games of
this nature. The love of competition is one of
our most dominant appeals, and keen competition
makes the grind of practice easier.
“You Know Me, Al”—The purposes of this
game are to whet the wits and to improve the
passing accuracy of the players; to develop the
dribble, the quick stop, the pivot, and the re-
verse; and to stress the fundamental use of the
low one or two-hand underhand pass; and to
308 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
especially emphasize the use of the hook over
the shoulder pass.
Instructions for playing: Divide the court
into two equal parts, and the players into two
Squads of five each, each squad occupying one-
half of the court. -
Arrange the men in a circle and direct them
to note particularly the name of the man stand-
ing next to them on their left; for, in the game,
this will be the only player to whom they will
be permitted to pass. For instance, if the men
are standing in the order of Bill, Charles, Tus,
Bob, and Verne, Bill can pass to Charles only,
Charles to Tus, Tus to Bob, Bob to Verne, and
Verne to Bill.
Each squad must have its own ball and must
play the game in its own allotted floor space.
The men on the respective fives should be se-
lected with the idea of using them later upon
the same team. This will acquaint the men with
the offensive tactics of each other and will grad-
ually develop an esprit de corps.
Upon the command, the squads should begin
passing, dribbling, and pivoting. The player in
possession of the ball must locate his man and
call his name before passing. Keep the men
constantly on the move, crisscrossing and re-
versing, for they must endeavor to partially lose
themselves from the passer.
This drill places an added responsibility upon
TEAM OFFENSE 309
the dribbler, who must observe the playing rules
on violation. However, when the man to whom
the dribbler is to pass is difficult to locate, the
pivot gives him easy access to the entire court
and a chance to hunt his man. But in this
game, the hook over the shoulder pass possibly
presents more opportunities for its user than
does any other play.
“You Know Me, Al,” implies no competition
whatsoever. It is more of a prank game in
which the direct interest lies in the ability of
the receiver, by crisscrossing and reversing, to
evade the passer; and also in the ability of the
passer to find his man and to refuse to be evaded.
Crow and Crane—If the thought of competi-
tion in practice drills is cross-graining the men
so that they are showing symptoms of irrita-
bility in practice, here is another game that
will lessen the strain for a time. The day after
a gruelling scrimmage, it is well to make things
less severe. This game was designed to relieve
stress of mind. -
Instructions for playing: Any even number
of men can play “Crow and Crane,”—fifty as
well as ten. Command the men to line up in
the middle of the floor, lengthwise of the court.
Then have them count off by twos to the left.
Number ones then cover off with number twos,
backs to each other, and two yards apart. Des-
ignate which side will be crows and which, cranes.
310 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
In a brief instruction to the men, announce
that on account of the similarity of the first
sounds of the words “crow” and “crane,” close
attention to commands will be necessary.
The areas outside of the side lines are the
safety zones. When the coach shouts, “Crow,”
the crane must turn and tag the crow before he
escapes to the side line, and vice versa.
When giving the commands, “Crow” and
“Crane,” the first parts of the words should be
long drawn out and the last parts snapped at the
players, as, “Cr-r-r-r-r-r-row ! Cr-r-r-r-r-r—ane!”
When a man has been tagged, he is out of the
game. Play should continue until one side is
entirely eliminated. Such time will not be long;
for, through trickery by calling the same name
three or four times in succession, such general
confusion will result that both sides will be
rushing to a clinch in the middle of the floor.
Having failed to interpret the commands in-
stantly, the men suddenly will find themselves
unable to make their correct decisions quickly
enough to get started. This game, by keeping
the men in both lines mentally on their toes,
develops alertness of mind and agility of body.
But its big purpose is to help the men to forget,
temporarily, the season's grind. As stated in
an earlier chapter, this game is a fine antidote
for mental staleness.
TEAM OFFENSE 311
If the humorous confusions that it will pro-
mote succeed in bringing unqualified jollity for a
time, they have accomplished much in the build-
ing of your team, and, after five or ten minutes,
you can turn to your day’s order of events with
the men refreshened mentally and ready for
their setting-up exercises and the day's routine.
5 or No Count—This game drill is designed
to develop shooting accuracy in the push arch or
chest shove shot. Instructions: Beginning on a
line with the basket, one yard from each side of
the outer rim, paint a row of five white three-
inch circles on the floor one yard apart and on
each side of the basket. If your court should be
equipped with more than two baskets, it will be
well to use them all in this drill, and thus
accommodate as many men at one time as is pos-
sible. In this drill, six baskets would serve
twelve men at one time. Six are mentioned, be-
cause many courts are equipped with this num-
ber.
Each player on the squad must begin his
shooting campaign on the first of these circles.
The two rows will accommodate two players at
a time. Each participant in this drill must
make five consecutive direct hits before he can
move back one yard to the next circle to repeat
his first performance.
By a direct hit is meant a hit wherein the ball
is dropped clear of the rim. It must sink
312 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
through the netting without touching any part
of the rim.
To basket-ball players, this assignment of five
direct hits from each circle before progressing
to the next, sounds very simple indeed, but in
actual execution it is much more difficult.
When a player succeeds in executing five per-
fect tries from each of the five circles in either
row in a single afternoon, he has the privilege
of graduating permanently from this funda-
mental routine. This means that a player using
the push arch or chest shove shot shall have
made twenty-five consecutive direct hits in a
single afternoon. Regardless of how near
perfect a previous score has been (even if a
player has a perfect record up to the twenty-
fifth try and then fails), he must begin all over
the next afternoon. Nothing short of perfect
COuntS. -
This is an effective drill for the men who
report at the gymnasium in early fall and insist
upon getting into mid-season trim “right off the
bat.” This drill, both effective and profitable,
holds such players in check and keeps them
from getting hold of the ball and recklessly
shooting in a harum-scarum manner. It gives
the player a definite aim, and the coach, a splen-
did opportunity to halt the men for special zone
and court instruction.
The quiet way in which the fundamental drill
TEAM OFFENSE 313
goes on eliminates the possibility of raising too
great a sweat, thereby decreasing the risk of
catching cold when halted for instructions in
making the shots.
Impress upon the men, from time to time,
that, unless they can carefully poise their bodies
and shoot clean goals when there is no opposi-
tion, they certainly will not be able to when
crowded by opponents. Players can profitably
employ their early afternoon practice hours on
this drill during the entire competitive season.
The only touch of competition given to this
drill is to see how many men can graduate from
it in a single season. t
Have no fear of your men completing this
drill too soon, for some of the best shots on
a team are seldom able to get beyond the three-
yard circle during an entire playing season.
Hot Point Tripple Tipping Game—This game
is intended to increase the efficiency and accuracy
of the men in tipping the ball into the basket
from scrimmage. With six baskets available,
thirty men in squads of five can work at one
time.
Instructions for playing: Line up the teams
under their respective baskets; then toss the
ball up in the air near the rim of the basket.
The five men in the game will immediately rush
in to try their individual luck at tipping or
batting the ball into the basket.
314 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
The ball must at no time during the play
momentarily rest in the hands of any player,
as this would give the advantage of a semi-
toss to this particular player. In an effort to
develop finger tipping technique, see that the
ball is clearly batted into the basket by one or
both hands. -
Should a goal be scored by a toss or a semi-
toss, the score does not count; and the game goes
on without interruption, just as if no illegal
play had been made.
The player who first tips three balls into the
basket can drop out, and so on until the last man
has completed three successful tips.
A good volley ball player is generally a tipping
specialist. His form in volley ball is good for
this phase of basket-ball. The player, in the
act of tipping the ball, should raise one or both
arms high above the head and throw the palms
of the hands far back, ready to strike the ball
when the opportunity comes. The ball should
be struck with the cushions of the fingers in a
slicing manner, thereby giving a reverse english
to the ball when it strikes the backboard or the
rim of the basket.
Competition is strong in this game. Every
man wants to be the first to finish. Especially
does no one desire to be the last to finish his
three successful tipping tries.
TEAM OFFENSE 315
This is a splendid drill for keeping the men
constantly at work on essentials of the game
without them quite realizing the routine of it all.
If you should keep a record from day to day
of the men who are most proficient on the tip
under the basket, it will give you valuable in-
formation for your regular season's games. In
planning your plays for such games, you will
then know who of your men are most expert
on the tip. Many goals can be scored in this way
by a player who is adept in the finger manipula-
tions necessary to artful tipping.
MASS DRILL WORK IN EXECUTING AND IN
BREAKING UP THE DRIBBLE
No play, matter it not how cleverly planned,
has ever won a game for any team on its own
merits alone. The success of plays is in direct
proportion to the ground work of fundamentals
employed in their execution. The best plays in
the hands of teams unskilled in fundamentals
are worse than no plays at all.
The following mass dribble drill cannot be used
too consistently in practice; for the dribble, bril-
liantly used with its attending pivots and re-
verses, opens up more possibilities for a wide-
awake offense than does any other method of
attack.
This drill can be worked about fifteen or
twenty minutes at each practice time without
becoming tiresome to the squad. It presents
Diagram
12
316 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
the great advantage of teaching necessary funda-
mentals in mass drill. The large number of men
involved increases the interest and raises the
squad morale. -
Instructions for handling the mass dribble
drill: If necessary, as many as thirty-two men,
or eight squads, can be worked at one time.
Station the men in rank and file. Run four
ranks lengthwise of the court so that each rank
is twelve feet apart and the men in each rank are
twelve feet apart. Each file of four men consti-
tutes a squad and works together as a unit. The
men in ranks 3 and 4 face the men in ranks 1
and 2, and vice versa. One set of men facing the
same direction goes on the offense, and the other
facing the opposite direction goes on the defense.
The dribbler and the trailer in each file consti-
tute the offensive pair, while the two guards
constitute the defensive pair.
As shown in the diagram, in the initial move,
x1 and x2 represent the two offensive dribblers,
and D4 and D5 the two defensive men, who, at
the start, act as obliging guards for the dribblers.
Instruct these guards, in the earlier practices,
to offer only passive resistance to the dribblers.
But in later practices, when the dribblers grow
more proficient in their execution, the guards
may put up a more rugged resistance. In short,
the defensive men should wait to put forth gen-
uine resistance until the dribblers have developed
#
DIAGRAM 12
Mass drill formation for dribble practice.

318 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
good judgment of distance, more skillful han-
dling of the ball, and more agile ability to shift,
pivot, and reverse.
Assume that there is a side line halfway be-
tween each file. Each file executes the drill
simultaneously. On the initial play, x1 dribbles
toward one of his imaginary side lines and
thereby pulls the guard over and away from
the center of the drill floor. As the guard makes
a passive attempt to secure possession of the
ball, x1 pivots away and back-passes to x2,
who is acting as the trailer for x1. x1, after
executing the pivot and pass, reverses and
becomes the trailer for x2. x2, who received the
pass, then changes his direction and dribbles
toward his opposite imaginary side line and
continues on down the floor until forced to this
side line by the rear guard. He then pivots
toward this same side line and makes a back
pass to x1. x1 receives the back pass and
dribbles toward the side line opposite x2. x2
reverses and follows around to become trailer
to x1. -
With the ball now at the other end of the
drill floor, the play should be reversed, and the
guards should become the dribblers, and the
dribblers, the guards. The execution should be
continued as before. This plan of alternating
the men on dribbling and guarding gives the
entire squad a chance for instruction in every
TEAM offensE 319
phase of the dribble,_dribbling, breaking up the
dribble, stopping, starting, turning, reversing,
pivoting, and passing.

KEY TO OVAGPAMS
D Daſonsive Playºr
Sº 'Oſſensiva Plaqar
| Loſt Forward
a Right Forward
3 Cantºr
4. Floor Guard
5 Røar Guard
—- Path of Plaqer
-e-e-ee- Pol\h of Dribblor
e-ee-ea pivot aſker Dribble
———— Dirackion oſ Paes
--------- Path of Tipp2d Ball
++++ Palh oſ Floor €ounco.
—-—-— Path oſ Hook Pass
===== Sho! ſor Goal
e-ee-ey-Pivd withfeint aſker,
© bribblo
Note: All Diagrams (excz
l+2) are drawn +o scale
of 1*=2O4}.
320 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
HOW TO BREAK THROUGH A SET
FIVE-MAN DEFENSE
whºm Passing Lanes—Before the days of the five-
man defense, there was no such thing as a pass-
ing lane. Every player was assigned an
opponent to play, and it was his job to prevent
this man from receiving the ball or from scor-
ing after he had received the ball. In these
days of five-man defense, playing the position
is more important than playing the man. This
modern trend of playing the position instead of
the man has produced certain definite passing
lanes along which the offense can operate with
comparative success.
Many players still think of the court, merely,
as a place in which to roam. In other days this
was true. But now there are passing and re-
ceiving lanes as definitely defined for players
On a basket-ball court as there are separate traf-
fic lanes, designed for pedestrians and for auto-
mobiles, on a city street.
These lanes, as generally used, are created by
the positions of the set five-man defense. They
should be visualized on the court as they appear
in Diagram 13.
In baseball, when a team is lined up on de-
fense, the batsman (on the offense) will drive
a safe hit out of reach of the defense.
In basket-ball, the passing and receiving lanes,
leading from the offensive territory through the
TEAM OFFENSE 321
very heart of the defense and on to the bas-
ket, are as clearly outlined for the traffic of
the basket-ball offensive as are the lanes on the
diamond clearly tracked for the progress of the
baseball on its way to a safe hit. As surely
as the batsman will hit safely if he drives the
ball into one of the batting lanes, so surely
will the basket-ball player pass the ball safely
through the five-man defense if he works it
astutely through these basket-ball lanes.
In order to craftily and successfully advance
the basket-ball through these passing lanes, the
offense, in working the ball down the court, must
flank the defense in much the same manner as a
military detail would flank a machine gun nest.
In other words, when the offense is attempt—
ing an advance beyond the defense, the ball
must be zigzagged or passed diagonally across
the court. The basket-ball player who does not
pass across the court to a team mate moving to
proper position, is as much of a “jay” passer,
as the pedestrian moving aimlessly across street
intersections, heeding no traffic rules, is a “jay”
walker.
The purpose of the player, in his zigzag
passing, is to draw the men on defense out of
their regular positions. Then a pivot or a floor
bounce to another player who crisscrosses will
enable the offense to work toward the basket
along these definite passing and receiving lanes.
322 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
If an opponent should be between the passer
and the receiver, the passer should not pass
lengthwise of the court. This applies especially
to a long pass. The reason for this admonition
is, that, if the opponent should be in a direct
line with the passer and the receiver and the
ball on a pass should come to the side he would
have to move laterally only a few steps to inter-
cept it; or, if the ball on a pass should come
over his head he would have to drop back only
a few steps and leap into the air to intercept the
pass. Whereas, a pass, if made across the court,
would draw the opponent much farther away
from his position. Then a pivot followed by a
backward pass would enable the offense to
smash through the position just vacated by the
player on defense.
The Play—When the five-man defense is set,
the dribbler (x4), by progressing laterally as if
to go between [13 and D2, forces these two
front rank men together. Then the dribbler
(x4), rises on one foot and hook-passes into
the center of the five-man defense to x1 who
comes from under the basket to the center of
the set five-man defense to receive the ball. In
this way, the forward can retain the ball far
within the five-man defense. The receiver of
the pass (x1) upon alighting can either pivot
and dribble toward the goal; or he can pivot,
crouch, and shoot for the goal from the posi-
TEAM OFFENSE 323
DIAGRAM 13
PASSING LANES
How to break through a set five-man defense.

324 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
tion where he receives the ball; or he can
pivot and pass to a team mate who is in a
more advantageous scoring position. If he
should choose to dribble on into the basket, he
could score with a one-hand english carom
follow shot; or, if opposed by the guards, he
could pass to x3 who has camped midway along
the side line between D2 and D5; or, he can
hook-pass to a team mate who has dashed from
the corner to the position vacated by either
guard; or, if closely covered, he might hook-
pass to a player who is still in a corner position
from whence a successful shot might be made,
as the man in the corner will always be in an
open position. This corner position, disregarded
for so long, is at last finding consideration. It
offers exceptional advantages to a man who uses
the push shot with accuracy.
By crafty passing down these lanes, an offense
can so penetrate and suck together a set five-
man defense that it will suddenly find itself open
for a shot within the very shadow of the basket.
If, on the try for goal, the ball should miss the
basket and take a rebound, see to it that the
offense has the men placed in strategic positions,
close enough to the backboard to be able to
score.
Many other possibilities for advancing the ball
to scoring positions can be developed by stressing
this fundamental idea of lanes.
TEAM OFFENSE 325
OFFENSIVE SIGNALS
The most simple signals are the best. If you
have a center that can control the ball, five plays
are enough for any team. Signals enough for
five plays and their variations should not be
complicated or hard to follow. If the center
cannot control the ball, signals are worthless.
In arranging a signal code, the tip-off lanes at
the sides of center might be designated as lanes
1, 2, and 3. These tip-off lanes could be num-
bered from the center of the court toward the
side lines, or vice versa. Divers ways of giving
signals are used. In fact, the codes should be
so easy to follow that the boy down in the
grades could understand them.
It would be useless to reiterate the many ways
that signals can be given. However, regardless
of the signal code, one hand of the man giving
the signals could be used to designate the num-
ber of the play and the other hand to show the
receiving lane. In order to conceal the authentic
signals, every man on the field could give them
by raising his hands and using his fingers. This
will so confuse a team watching for the oppon-
ent's signals that they would fare better by
forgetting that their opponents had signals. -
Or, if more than five plays are used, these
additional plays can be designated by enlarging
upon the hand plan—by showing the closed fists
326 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
for a smash play, and the two wide open palms
for a surprise play.
It is good basket-ball strategy to try to make
your enemy pay attention to your signals. This
will take their mind off their game and, conse-
quently, make them more vulnerable. It is well
to have a couple of clever players call the num-
ber signals aloud while the rest of the players
are giving finger signals. This stimulates the
opponents’ auditory senses as well as their visual,
and a general confusion results. While they,
perhaps, know that these are not bona fide sig-
nals, it will be difficult for them to inhibit such
stimuli.
Either the forwards or the center may give
signals with equal success. If the center gives
them, he should not enter the jumping circle
until he has finished giving the signal, as the
referee can start the play the moment both
jumpers are in the circle. Also, since the rule
provides that the jumper when in the act of
jumping must have one hand touching the small
of his back, if the center used both hands to
execute his signal, he might have some difficulty
with violations. But, regardless of who gives
the signals, they should not be telegraphed to the
opponents by any movement which might reveal
the authentic signal given.
TEAM OFFENSE 327
FLOOR PLAYS FROM REGULAR SCRIMMAGE
Every coach has his own theory of the best
style of offense. Briefly, the best style of
offense is the one that will bring the most grati-
fying results. Few plays, complete mastery of
fundamentals, and plenty of team-Sense is my
idea of a winning offense. The success of a
season is in direct proportion to individual and
team mastery of fundamentals, combined with
quick and versatile team-brains. A versatile
team is one that can combine at will every
fundamental trick known to basket-ball. The
repertoire of a winning team is as varied as is
the game itself. A team, consistent in its win-
ning, knows no limitations of strategy.
Plays are the easiest things in the world to
diagram, but plays that work against good teams.
are the direct results of executions that have
had their inceptions in fundamentals mastered
on the practice floor. For this reason, I have
given as much space to the outlining of practice
drills as I have to the diagraming of floor plays
to be used in games.
Not many goals are made against finished
teams from the tip-off nowadays. Consequently,
I am diagraming only the plays from tip-off
that open up the greatest possibilities in throw-
ing the defense off-balance. These plays dia-
gramed illustrate the use of the tip-off lanes in
“outfoxing” the defense.
328 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Refer
to
Diagram
|4
Tip-off Lanes—We have previously discussed
the passing lanes used in breaking up the five-
man defense. In this diagram, the tip-off lanes
are shown. These are in no way connected with
the passing lanes previously described, but are
imaginary lanes, each seven and a half feet wide
located on each side of center, showing the path
through which the guard must travel to receive
the ball on tip-off from center. (See Diagram
14 for position of lanes.) These lanes are
measured off in the imagination lengthwise of
the court from the outside of the center circle
toward the side line. Three such lanes on each
side of center take up the entire space between
the center circle and the side lines. The reason
for making these lanes seven and one-half feet
wide is that this distance represents the man's
reach. In four of the tip-off plays that fol-
low, the center will tip the ball into one or the
other of these six lanes. In the other tip-off
play, the center tips the ball behind him.
COMMON FOULS AT CENTER
In any play where the center is controlling
the tip-off, it is of vital importance to watch for
the unscrupulous player who will devise schemes
to interfere, when the center is properly placing
the ball. s
When a center is controlling the tip, he must
be on the watch for an opponent, who may have
been coached unethically, to strike his arm. This
TEAM OFFENSE 329
foul method is perpetrated in two ways and
always with the hope that the referee will over-
look it. First, the fouling center, who is being
outjumped, will, just as he arises from the floor
on the jump, take deliberate aim and strike the
successful jumper's wrist with his extended
finger tips. By so doing, he means to destroy
the center’s proper tipping force, and thus to
cause the ball to come down to a position where
he, the fouling center, can get another chance at
it, unless he is caught by the referee. Second,
if unsuccessful in this attempt, he will try either
the overjumping chest interference or the cork-
screw jump. In either case, he deliberately
plans to strike the opponent's tipping arm with
his outside forearm when both are in the act
of jumping. This is unfair and plainly against
the rules.
When confronted with such unfair play, in-
struct your center to give all the ground pos-
sible before jumping. Teach him to crowd
back in his half of the jumping circle so that
when he jumps he will still have space left be-
tween his own half of center circle and the other
jumper. This will give the referee a better
chance to detect the fouling center, for this
caution observed will force him to come over
into the other half of the circle in order to
make contact with the center who is outjumping
him.
330 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Diagram
º 14
TIP-OFF PLAY FROM UNBALANCED FORMATION
Dribbler Chest Shoves to Right Forward, Who Hook Passes
for Goal
This play is designed to offset unbalanced
defensive formations, such as the so-called “Y,”
the triangle, or the “L.” If the defense plays
one forward down on this play to assist the
guards, have your team use a signal that will
enable the offensive guard to receive the ball
out near the side line. - -
If the defensive forwards should play both
in front of and behind center, the signal of the
offensive should be to play the ball through lane
2 or lane 3.
With the signal given to go through lane 3,
the right guard drives through and receives the
tip-off from center. The right offensive forward
plays deep in his own corner near the side
and end lines. Except for two ten-foot fakes
that the right forward must make in two di-
rections, he maintains this position while his
own offensive right guard is dribbling down
the court. This faking maneuver toward
the basket draws the guard over and thus opens
a larger area to the dribbler, but he immediately
retraces his steps by quickly backing into his
former position and gets ready to receive a
pass from the dribbling right guard if necessary.
This play places a decided burden upon the de-
fensive left guard, as there are two offensive
men on him at one time.
TEAM OFFENSE 331
DIAGRAM 14
Tip-off Play from Unbalanced Formation
O
Dribbler chest-shoves to right forward, who hook-passes
- for goal.

332 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
The offensive left forward, after playing
Safe on the tip-off, and after seeing that the
play through lane 3 worked as planned, reverses
and cuts directly back toward and in front of
his own basket to receive a pass, if necessary,
from the dribbling guard. -
The center, after tipping the ball, takes one
step back and brings both feet together in order
to prevent an opponent from blocking him out
of the play. This position gives him a shifting
stance which will enable him to move in either
direction. However, as shown in Diagram
14, unless he is blocked off, he will cut back
and circle out on the opposite side from
whence he tipped the ball. This change of
location places him in a splendid position to
receive a back pass for a try at goal. The
offensive left guard, after seeing the ball well
down into offensive territory, moves over and
down the center of the court. He can, if neces-
sary, advance as far as the center circle.
Admonish him, however, when his team is
using the four-man offense and the ball is well
down in the offensive area, to go no farther
than the center circle. He must be vigilant
to see that no opponent slips in behind him,
because if the opponents should suddenly get
possession of the ball on a long pass to a
“sleeper” who has slipped in under the basket,
TEAM OFFENSE 333
the work of the offensive left guard would be
rendered impotent. -
During the maneuvers of his team mates, the
offensive right forward has been keeping his
defensive guard busy, by shouting, slapping the
foot, and feinting to leave the corner, either
along the side or the end line. The dribbling right
guard, once in position to pass, immediately
uses a chest shove pass to the right forward,
who employs a high arch, looping, chest shot
for the basket. This corner shot is the most
difficult of all shooting positions to defend;
therefore, is not, as some coaches suppose, the
most difficult shot to make. -
TIP-OFF PLAY FROM UNBALANCED FORMATION
Center Receives Hook Pass from Dribbler and Uses Push
Arch for Goal
Center Controlling Tip-off and Tipping Into
Second Lane—The center's unerring ability to
control the ball is the secret of successful tip-
offs directed to a designated player.
The Play—Center tips ball to right guard,
who smashes through lane 2 and receives the
ball high in the air opposite center. He starts
a smashing dribble toward the side line and in
the direction of the basket. Right forward is
shown (Diagram 15) lined up in lane 2, ready
for tip-off. He maintains this position pri-
marily to assure the right guard’s safe invasion
Diagram
15
334 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
down the court; and, secondly, to recover a
fumbled ball, should the play go awry. He is
standing between D1 (opponents' forward) and
the place where the right offensive guard will
receive the ball. From this position he can
easily cut in toward the center circle and there-
by block off D1, who is coming down on de-
fense; or he can, if necessary, go back on de-
fense to aid left guard. Or, if the first move-
ments of the play are successful, he can cut for
the center circle, drive directly down the center
of the court, and swing into his own basket.
Here he can quickly reverse and cut out toward
the opposite corner to receive a pass from the
dribbler.
The left forward who has been, during the
entire play, in, around and near the basket,
suddenly darts for the other corner in order to
draw []4 (defensive guard) off-position.
The center after tip-off must get out of the
circle quickly, for he must traverse half the
court in short order to figure prominently in
the play. He must always, after the tip-off,
leave the circle opposite the side to which he
has tipped the ball. Once down the court, he
(x3) feints as if to cut in behind D5, but
suddenly stops short and drives off at a right
angle toward the middle of the court. This
places him in splendid offensive position. He
now receives a pass from the dribbler (x5)
TEAM OFFENSE
335
Tip-off Play from Unbalanced Formation
DIAGRAM 15
O
\
--- .i.” tº .
Center controls, tip. Center receives hook-
pass from dribbler and uses push arch
for goal.

336 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
and shoots a long high arch push shot for the
basket. This shot, on account of the center’s
position in front of the basket, gives him a
chance for a rebound, should he not make a
clean hit on his first try. All other players,
with the exception of left guard, now smash
in and smother the defense in the offensive
area. X4 plays his position safely. He swings
to the center of the court and is prepared to
receive a back pass should the defensive team
become too aggressive under the basket. This
play, as well as the one previous, is planned on
the scheme of a four-man offense.
TANDEM LEFT X PLAY
Tip-off Play from Unbalanced Formation
Forward Uses Long Hook Pass to Guard
Diºn Conceal your intentions of “pulling” this play
by placing three of your men on the strong side.
The Play—Left and right forwards line up
on left side of center well up in the court. This
advanced position of the forwards pulls the
opposing guards farther up the floor than they
would dare to come if one forward camped
near the basket.
After the tip-off, the left guard (x4), by cut-
ting wide on the outside of lane 3, hesitates just
as he gets even with the center. He feigns a
“balled-up” signal and slowly moves on down the
court, showing little interest in the play. The left
TEAM OFFENSE 337
DIAGRAM 16
TANDEM LEFT X PLAY
Tip-off Play from Unbalanced Formation
o
Forward uses long hook-pass to guard.


338 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Diagram
[7
forward drives away to the right of center,
catches the ball high in the air and, while in
the act of landing, hook passes high over the
heads of the defense to the floor guard who
has arrived just in time for a set-up shot.
The left forward now circles in on a hard drive
to the right of the basket so as to be in position
for a returned hook pass from the floor guard.
The right forward cuts in behind center and
then swings on around toward the basket to be
ready to recover an over basket shot.
The center after the tip always takes one
step backward to keep from being blocked off.
Then, after going out of the ring to the side
opposite the one from which he tipped the ball,
he swings into the basket for follow up work.
The rear guard should always swing to the
center and down the middle of the floor.
This play is rather hazardous for the reason
that but one guard is left back for defense. It is
safer to pull the center back to help the guard, if
there is any question as to whether or not the play
will go through. However, the right forward
is in strategic position to aid the defense.
SCISSORS FIGURE-EIGHT PLAY -
Tip-off Play from Unbalanced Formation
Center Having Trouble Controlling Tip
In this play, owing to the uncertainty of the
tip-off, the guards remain in their regular ad-
TEAM OFFENSE
339
DIAGRAM 17
SCISSORS FIGURE-EIGHT PLAY
Tip-off Play from Unbalanced Formation

(T.
A \
STS
N
z
&
K
X
X
X
X
X
X
Af
@ 2:
Y
| -
O
Center having trouble controlling tip.
340 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
vanced guard positions, which are fifteen feet
from the basket.
The Play—Line up the forwards diagonally
about twelve or fifteen feet each way from the
tip-off circle. The forwards remain stationary
until the referee tosses the ball up in the air.
They then start advancing with a low cautious
swing while watching the direction of the ball
from the tip-off. They finish with a hard,
vicious drive which is calculated to meet the ball
high in the air on its descent. In this play, the
offense is lined up to meet either one of two
situations. They are prepared for an offense if
their own center controls the tip, and for a de-
fense if he does not. It is an offensive-defensive
game.
If the center can control the tip, it will be
on a corkscrew jump. If the center can tip the
ball four feet to the rear, the right forward
(x2), can drive through and slap pass the
ball to the floor guard (x4). The left for-
ward (x1) at the same time, can scissor to the
opposite side. The floor guard (x4) can then
chest-shove the ball to the rear guard (x5) while
he (x5) is on his lateral advance down the
COurt.
The center after the tip-off comes back on
the defensive. The right forward (x2) after
batting the ball to x4 circles and drives on down
TEAM OFFENSE 341
the center of the court and receives a floor
bounce from x5.
X1, after his initial scissor past the center
and into the offensive zone, drives wide in cir-
cular formation toward the basket. He must
be ready at all times on this drive to receive
a quick pass as he goes in to the basket. He
continues his drive on under the basket and
over to the left corner, where he will receive a
hook pass from x2. He can now crouch low and
shoot a high leaping push arch or chest shove
shot for goal. -
X5, after the floor bounce, cuts across in
front of the center circle and, following the
curve of a figure-eight, swings wide, crosses
in under the basket and takes the corner op-
posite x1. The center goes back and takes up the
work vacated by x5. After x1's try for basket,
x5 drives in to the basket for rebound work.
X4, after his chest shove pass to x5, moves
down the center of the court to assist in the
four-man offensive.
If the opponents should secure possession of
the ball, the center, who has figured so little
in this play, could continue on back to the
defensive area to help the guards. These
three men would now form a set triangular
defense to halt the advance of the opponents.
This triangular defense with the two guards
back in their regular positions and the third
342 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
:
man stationed on the free throw line would as-
sure no close-up shots and also would guarantee
a quick break from defense to offense.
GUARDS-UP PLAY
Tip-off Play from Balanced Formation
Guard Using Medium Hook Pass to Forward
*..." When the opposition is giving trouble, it is
often expedient to bat the ball to the team mate
who is supposed to handle the pivotal pass. In
this instance, with the center controlling tip-
off, he tips the ball to the side into lane 2.
X2 drives through this lane high in the air,
batting the ball at its greatest height to x5.
While the ball is still in the air in lane 2, x4,
seeing that the play is going through as sig-
nalled, moves from his position and advances
down the floor diagonally to his right about
fifteen feet. At this point, x5, who is in pos-
session of the ball, uses a one-arm snap pass to
x4 in his advance position. X2, after bat-
ting the ball, reverses and cuts out toward the
basket. Then, by cutting back and in toward
the center of the basket, when near his own
free throw line, he gets into a favorable position
to receive the hook pass from x4. X1, who
apparently has not figured in the play, suddenly
cuts over to the right side of the court and
swings in to the basket on the right side. The
center (x3), after tipping the ball to the right,
TEAM OFFENSE 343
DIAGRAM 18
GUARDS-UP PLAY
Tip-off Play from Balanced Formation
O
Guard uses medium hook-pass to forward.

344 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
takes one full step back and swings circularly to
his left, rounding into the basket on the left side.
At this juncture x4 hook-passes to the right
forward, who dribbles in to the basket for a
try at goal.
X4, after hooking, follows on down the cen-
ter of the court for a back pass if necessary.
X5 now swings down the center of the floor to
the tip-off circle. This movement puts him in
good position to receive a second back pass and
to relay it, if necessary, on a long pass to an
uncovered team mate.
PINCERS PLAY
Out of Bounds Under or Near Own Basket
Diºn Out of bound plays present more scoring
opportunities than do plays from tip-off. There-
fore, it is important that teams, which have
drilled on certain out of bound plays in practice,
do not, in the excitement of the game, get
nervous and forget to use them properly.
The following out of bound formation under
the offensive basket presents untold possibilities.
By using this play as a guide, you can work
out fifty-six practical plays from this one forma-
tion alone. The same principle used in this
play can, with slight alteration, be adapted to
an out of bound side line play.
Stress upon your players the importance of
using the play in the heat of the game. Teams,
TEAM OFFENSE 345
DIAGRAM 19
PINCERS PLAY
Q
Out of bounds under or near own basket. -

346 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
in their desire to get the jump on their op-
ponents, make the common mistake of getting
nervous and spoiling the play. Many teams
will work this play to perfection in practice
drills, but the minute the game is on, unless they
are cautioned repeatedly, will let it go awry.
Part of the confusion in working this play
under the stress of the game is due to the
passer's fear of losing the ball, by retaining it
longer out of bounds than the allotted five
seconds. To overcome this anxiety of the
players when in the game, it is well during
the practices to pull out your watch and count
time aloud, in order that the players may es-
timate how long it will take for five seconds to
elapse. In counting time on this play, you
will find by looking at your watch that by
the time you utter the words “one thousand
and one” with average speaking rapidity, one
second of time will have elapsed—this count
approximates the lapse of one second. The
count then for an elapse of five seconds should
be “one thousand and one, one thousand and
two, one thousand and three, one thousand and
four, one thousand and five.”
The passer should plan to get the ball into
play between the lapse of the first and the
fourth seconds. This will avert any hitch with
the referee.
In this lapse of time between the first and
TEAM OFFENSE 347
the fourth seconds many new situations may
arise. Therefore, the passer should be cool-
headed enough to pass-in cautiously. A team
properly coached will soon get a clear concep-
tion of five seconds of time and will then exe-
cute this play in an orderly way.
The Play—Two men (x2 and x3, in Diagram
19) quickly get into position about twenty feet
from end line (outside of which is stationed
x1, the passer) and about twelve or fifteen feet
apart. In this play, these two players operate in
much the same manner as the jaws of a pair of
pincers. -
X3, on the left, gets into motion a fraction of
a second in advance of x2, who is in an iden-
tical position on the other side. Then x2, who is
the other lip of the pincers, starts a similar
movement. X3 rushes three steps forward
shouting to x1 (out of bounds) to pass to him.
Almost simultaneously with this movement x2
on the opposite side does the same thing. See
the lips of the pincers beginning to function.
If, at this point, either of these men should
See an opening, he should drive on in to the
basket for a try at goal. But if they find all
openings closed for a successful pass to either
of them, they stop short on their outside feet.
The inside foot of each of the two advancing
players should be drawn in and back, ready
for a shift in a new direction. In short, these
348 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
two advancing players are in pivotal position
without pivoting. Instead of pivoting, they re-
trace their steps, and, circling around, crisscross
at the free throw line (the hinge of the pincers)
with x3 crossing in front of x2. In passing
each other on this crisscross, these two men
describe an arc and end in the same spots from
whence the crisscross was started, but in re-
versed order.
It is of vital importance in this play that the
team members know, when crisscrossing which
player is to go in front and which, behind.
Else the two men executing the movement might
crash together and cause needless injury to
one or both.
During this preliminary operation of the
jaws of the pincers, x4 has adopted a watchful
waiting policy. If, as yet, no favorable situa-
tions have developed, x4 drives straight for the
basket, receives the ball from out of bounds, and
shoots.
Naturally, a defensive man will be placed in
front of the out of bound passer to prevent any
set-ups by the offense. Therefore, the passer
(x1), out of bounds, must quickly, yet accurate-
ly, survey the field for his best opening. All out
of bound plays are very elastic, and a player
must have a fine sense of judgment to feel,
intuitively, the hottest point of contact. The
passer upon survey may find it best to fake a
TEAM OFFENSE - 349
pass to the floor guard (x4) who, driving in, is
trying to pull his opponents after him.
After such maneuvers as outlined—the whole
of which should not consume more than three
seconds—the passer, who is out of bounds may
pass safely to x5, who drives on down the
floor past the center circle and either takes a
long underhand loop shot for the basket or
passes into the corner to x1 who has circled in
from out of bounds. In such an instance, x1 will
probably find himself in position to take a quick
push arch or chest shove shot for a try at goal.
oUT of Bound PLAY UNDER OPPONENTS BASKET
Out of bound offensive plays under the op-
ponents’ basket are of less importance than
are those under the offensive basket. The team
on defense naturally gives ground toward the
opponents’ basket in order to protect the offen-
sive territory.
In plays of this kind, the rear guard should
be the man to pass the ball in from out of
bounds. The first object in such passing is to
get the ball through before the defense gets set.
A running crisscross pass coupled with a
smashing attack and pivot is considered the
best type of advance to make on a play of this
kind. A long pass is, also, always justifiable
if the opponents should leave an offensive
“sleeper” unguarded.
350 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
But if the defense should get set in the regu-
lar set five-man way, a short pass in to a team
mate should be the beginning of a strategic
advance. Such an offensive position calls for
a good dribbler. Deliberate approach toward
the first defensive line is wise. Then a change
of pace is in order. Upon approaching the
first defensive line, the offensive team should
quickly accelerate its drive, for it is now in
offensive territory and must score to win. If
the first and second atempts are futile, the
offense should strive to keep possession of the
ball and also to keep courageously hammering
away, hitting hard and fast. Such vigorous
offensive power will worry the opponents, even
if it does not net a goal. -
A hard fast dribbler to the right or to the
left will in all probability, by pulling the de-
fense out of position, give the offense a splendid
chance to work a hook pass down one of the
passing lanes. (See Diagram 13.)
If the player in possession of the ball should
be rushed before getting into the passing lane,
he could pivot and back-pass to a team mate
who was in position to receive it. This tem-
porary break in time caused by the execution of
the pivot should give the other players on
offense just time enough to escape to unguarded
spots where the one most strategically located
might receive the pass.
TEAM OFFENSE - 351
DLAGRAM 20
OFFENSIVE FOUL LINE PLAY
# ,
* /
~7-
O
Using corkscrew jump for tip-off after missed free throw.


352 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
This play is outlined in a general manner on
account of the shifting needs of such occasions.
Specific plays for such emergencies would be as
varied as are the many conditions arising from
an out of bounds under the opponents’ basket.
OFFENSIVE FOUL LINE PLAY
*..." It is not always good strategy to fight for
positions along the foul line. A rangy agile
outfit can often gain the advantage by letting
the opponents choose their places along the foul
lines. -
By stepping in more closely behind the op-
ponents and presenting the shoulder and back
arm, an offensive player can very successfully
make a corkscrew jump and tip the rebound to
a team mate who may dash either to the side or
to the corner of the court. Shiftiness in execut-
ing such plays is far more important than
weight. -
If expecting to use this play in games, it is
splendid practice-drill to line up two teams—
one on offense and one on defense—and to in-
struct the men on the offensive to deliberately
miss their free throw attempts. Upon the re-
bounds, drill the men in the correct way to re-
cover the ball after a missed free trial for goal
—simulating game conditions. -

CHAPTER VI
Team Defense
EVOLUTION OF DEFENSIVE PLAY
The common conception of team work is that
it applies only to the offense, when, in reality,
team work shows at its best on the defense.
This misconception can be attributed to the fact
that in the early development of the game the
players in possession of the ball were the cen-
ters of attraction while very little thought was
given to the players who did not have the ball.
All efforts were placed on scoring, and no at-
tention given to the work of preventing the
opponents from scoring. -
When choosing the players for a team, the
ability of a man to score was the deciding factor.
All men had to be offensive players in order
that the team might win. Offensive work was
primary while the work on defense was
secondary.
The results of experience have changed these
conditions until now the two phases of the game
are given equal consideration; and in many
instances their order of importance has been
reversed. The offense has yielded to the rela-
tive importance of the defense very miserly and
reluctantly. At first, only one player was as-
signed to defensive duty, leaving four men sole-
ly for scoring purposes. This one man assigned
354 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
for defense was chosen not only because of his
qualifications as a guard, but largely because
he could not score. This shows the emphasis
placed upon scoring, as well as the reluctancy
of the offense to concede to the defense their
equal share of credit in the team play.
Later, in the next step of the evolvement of
the defense, two men were used on guarding
duty while the other three players were as-
signed to offensive work alone. Soon, two
were found to be insufficient on defense so later
three were used. Then the three-man de-
fense gradually gave way to the four, and
finally to the five-man defense of today with
its different variations of execution.
This inevitable change from the shifting to
the set or massed five-man defense has been
made necessary through the gradual changes in
the rules—particularly those pertaining to per-
sonal contact and guarding—and through the
speeding up and complicating of the offensive
play. The later teams found, with the scoring
powers of the two teams equal, that in order to
win they must not only retain possession of
the ball as much as possible; but must also,
when they lost the ball, develop means to prevent
their opponents from scoring. Now, the decid-
ing factor in the score of a game is often not
so much in the difference of the scoring power
TEAM DEFENSE 355
of the teams, but in the difference of the
effectiveness of the defense of the two teams.
For this reason, defense in basket-ball has
had a consistent evolution and has really ad-
vanced more markedly than has the offense.
This rapid evolution of the defensive strategy
of basket-ball since its origination can be
divided into six definite stages, namely: (1) the
old style shifting man-to-man defense; (2) the
five-man one-line defense; (3) the two-man set
and three-man shifting defense; (4) the three-
man set and two-man shifting defense; (5) the
four-man box with one-man shifting defense;
and (6) the five-man two-line set or mass
defense.
It is not intended to convey the impression
that each style of defense, in its evolution, has
marked a complete abandonment of the previous
style, for this is seldom true in the history of
the evolution of anything. There is usually a
gradual merging and overlapping from one stage
to the next. However, the various evolutionary
stages do show the drift from a no man defense,
in which all play was offensive and all players
were expert scorers and unskilled guards, to the
five-man defense, in which all players must be
equally versatile on offensive and defensive play.
It is still possible to find styles of defense
in use which were in vogue many years ago, but
the general tendency has been to adopt some
DIAGRAM 21
B - C
O O O
Q
Q
Representing first three steps in evolution of basket-ball defense.
§

TEAM DEFENSE 357
form of the five-man defense and to abandon
the earlier defensive plans.
THE OLD STYLE SHIFTING MAN-TO-MAN DEFENSE
First Defense Used in Basket-ball
In this type of defense each player was re-
sponsible for one opponent. The moment the
offense lost possession of the ball, each player,
now thrown on the defensive, picked the op-
ponent to whom he was assigned and for whom
he was responsible and followed him closely
until the ball had been recovered. Usually the
center guarded the center; a forward played
his guard; and a guard covered his forward.
It will be seen that this paired off the players
and tended toward individual play rather than
toward team work. Although, there was a
certain amount of co-operation between players,
in that one player might leave his opponent for
a team mate's opponent whenever the conditions
seemed to indicate such a shift. This step was
the first indication of bringing five players into
the defensive work and gave evidence of a
complete break-over in favor of the relative
importance of team defense. -
This old style of shifting man-to-man defense
is still used by some teams. But it requires a
team of seasoned brainy players to execute it
successfully, because of the clever work needed
to constantly stay with an opponent as he
Diagram
21-A
358 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Diagram
2|-B
maneuvers about the court. This style is most
effective against a team composed of individual
stars or “old heads” who do not co-operate well
in offensive team play but depend almost en-
tirely upon their individual initiative and skill
to dribble, sidestep, and pivot—thereby evading
opponents and working the ball into the basket.
Against a team using the crisscross, shifting,
revolving type of team defense that is so preva-
lent today, the man-to-man defense could not
operate for the reason that the players execut-
ing the new style of offense were constantly
changing directions so as to draw the defense
out of position. This fact made it practically
imposible for such a defense to stay with its
men; and even though the defensive players
could stick to their men, the extra exertion re-
quired to chase-about all over the court would
exhaust them in a short time. Out of this
necessity evolved a form of defense to offset
these new tricks of the offense. This first step
in the defensive evolvement was the five-man
one-line defense.
THE FIVE-MAN ONE-LINE DEFENSE
Second Stage cf the Evolution
By using the man-to-man defense, the play-
ers could neither stick to their opponents nor
prevent them from reaching the goal with the
ball. As a result, the idea of building a wall
TEAM DEFENSE 359
across the court to prevent the offense from
breaking through was devised. This wall was
established out beyond the center circle so as
to make it practically impossible for the offense
to get a scoring shot across it. -
In this style, the defense, upon losing posses-
sion of the ball, formed a line across the court,
as shown in Diagram 21-B. The players were
equally spaced, and their line extended the full
width of the court. Their idea was to stop any
passing formation from going by or through
this wall, with the ball. This plan might be
likened to the goal line defense in football—a
defense which is difficult to go through but
easier to go over. The offense, in order to
break through into scoring territory, had to
break the wall. When the offense got behind
the defensive wall, the ball was passed over.
Each offensive man that broke through the de-
fense was covered by his nearest opponent or
by the defensive player who was assigned to
him. Once through the wall, this style reverted
to the old man-to-man defense, but in many
ways it was worse. If the offense worked
straight down the court, no trouble in guarding
was experienced; but when it crisscrossed, zig-
zagged, circled and pivoted, the players on the
defensive found themselves blocking each other
in their attempt to cover their opponents.
360 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Diagram
2ſ – C
Out of this experience of inadequate guarding
came the second step in the evolution of basket-
ball defense. When the players in this five-man
one-line defense saw that they must drop back
near the goal to put up an adequately strong
defense to the offense, they realized the need of
stationing men back, solely, to guard the basket.
This was the first indication of the necessity of
using players for strictly defensive work. The
two-men set and three-man shifting defense was
the outgrowth of this need.
TWO-MAN SET AND THREE-MAN SHIFTING DEFENSE
Third Stage in the Evolution
In this style of defense, the two positions in
the diagram shown on either side of the goal are
for the defensive players. When their team
would lose possession of the ball, they would
retire immediately to the positions shown. Their
work was strictly defensive. In no case were
they supposed to advance far beyond the center
of the court, and any attempts that they would
make at scoring were from long shots. It was
their job to protect their own basket while their
three team mates would carry on the offensive
work. It was the paramount duty of the guards
not to allow an opponent to get between them
and the goal. - .* *
The position of these guards when they were
set in this style of defense was from seven to
TEAM DEFENSE 361
ten feet from the end line and from fourteen to
twenty feet apart; and each guard stood equi-
distant from a line parallel to the side lines and
dividing the court in half. (Note positions on
Diagram 21-C.) These guards were to be re-
sponsible for the territory directly in front of
them, between them and the side line, between
them and the end line, and half of the territory
between each other. Their three team mates,
when not in possession of the ball, assisted these
two defensive men by picking an opponent and
guarding him as he advanced toward his own
basket. However, these offensive team mates
were always ready to dart back toward their
own goal the moment the ball was recovered
from the opponents. Still the defensive play
was found to be faulty, and the search for a
perfected defense went on.
This type of play was found to be weak be-
cause the guards were required to cover too
much territory. The offense found that, by
sending a player down each side of the court
for the guards to cover, the center territory in
front of the basket was left unguarded and was
an ideal position from which to score. This
weakness proved the inefficiency of a two-man
defense. Basket-ball defense needed a player
to guard the zone in front of the basket, and
thus there developed the fourth step in the
evolution of the five-man defense.
362 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
DIAGRAMS 22-A, 22-B

O
O
r Representing fourth and fifth stages in the
evolution of the defense.
TEAM DEFENSE 363
THE THREE-MAN SET AND Two-MAN SHIFTING
DEFENSE
Fourth Stage in the Evolution
This style of defense, shown in Diagram
22-A, is indicated by circles representing the
defensive territory for which each of the three
men who were set was responsible. So long as
the three men remained set within their re-
spective territories (smaller circles), the twenty-
eight-foot circle was very well protected. But if
they moved out of their zones (indicated by the
circles) to protect their goal from long shots,
their opponents would have an opportunity to
slip in behind them for short easy shots There
was also a tendency on the part of the guards
to follow their opponents who charged through
one zone into the territory of another defensive
zone and by so doing would give the offense an
Opportunity for close-up shots.
When playing this style of defense, the other
two players were free to shift about for open
spaces from which they might receive passes
when their team recovered the ball. But it was
not long until the need for a still tighter de-
fense was apparent.
Three-man Shifting, Two-man Set Defense
Gives Way to Fifth Step in Defensive Evolution
—In order to extend the defense farther out
toward the center, to reduce the territory that
each player must cover, and at the same time
Diagram
22-A
364 - MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
to make the circle of defense about the basket
still tighter, a fourth man was called back to
the cause of the defense, thus leaving only one
player to shift about the court to the unguarded
spots and to be ready to receive long passes from
team mates. This plan of defense came to be
known as the four-man box defense.
THE Four-MAN Box DEFENSE
Fifth Stage in the Evolution
"gº" This style of defense is shown in a typical
form in Diagram 22–B, which is drawn to scale.
In this form of defense, the two guards D4
and []5 always played back. Seldom did they
go past the center of the court except to receive
a pass for a long shot. In such case, one guard
stayed back while the other went up. In no
case did the rear guard let an opponent play in
behind him. Note in the diagram the position
of the guards when thrown on the defensive.
The moment possession of the ball was lost, the
guards would drop back to these positions. The
forwards would hurry back to the positions
shown by D1 and [I2. * . . . . . . . .
As the opponents would bring the ball down
the court, the first two men who went through
the defense were covered by the two guards, and
the next two, by the defensive forwards. The
forwards, as they rushed back to their defensive
TEAM DEFENSE 365
positions, might each “pick up” an opponent and
stay with him until the ball was recovered.
The fifth defensive man usually stayed back
to guard the shifting center, who remained in
the territory of his own goal. Thus, with this
type of defense, a four-man offense was all that
was possible. The defensive center was usually
chosen for the back court work because of his
range and height. When his team mates recov-
ered the ball, if he was unable to get far behind
the player guarding him, he would come up the
court to meet all passes made to him and would
then either turn and shoot or pass to one of the
defensive forwards who had rushed down the
COU11ſt. • , - -
This type of defense was used quite generally
as late as 1919 and still is used to some extent.
For instance, some teams who use the five-man
defense advance one player—usually the one
opposite the side where the strength of the
offense appears—so that when the team on de-
fense recovers the ball this player in advanced
position can dash quickly for his own goal and
into a position from which he can receive a
long pass, or can come back up the court to
meet the ball and be ready to pass to an open
Spot. s
Four-man Defense Gives Way to Next Step in
Defensive Evolvement, the Five-man Defense—
The four-man defense gave way to the five-man
366 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Diagram
23
two-line set or mass defense, principally because
of the continued development of the zigzag,
crisscross, and the revolving plans of offense.
The floor space that four players were required
to guard was too great a handicap for the
defense to be able to meet the new offensive de-
velopments successfully, even though a four-
man offense was all that was possible against
this defense. On narrow courts, the four-man
defense can still be used effectively.
THE FIVE-MAN TWO-LINE SET OR MASS
DEFENSE
Sixth and Final Stage in the Evolution
The advent of the five-man two-line set or
mass defense marks the full submission of the
adherents of offense only to the importance of a
strong defense. It also marks the beginning of
an impenetrable defense which is the beginning
of the greatest perfection in defensive play.
This diagram shows the general set positions
for the five-men defense as practiced today.
Most all successful present-day defensive meth-
ods are variations of this formation. Many
coaches place their primary wall out to the
center of the court and advance the secondary
defense proportionately. The reason for this
advance of the two defensive lines is to prevent
any possibility of a shot over them and also to
meet the offense before it has had time to form.
TEAM DEFENSE 367
DIAGRAM 23
SET FIVE-MAN TWO-LINE DEFENSE
O
Fundamental diagram for the many varia-
tions of the massed five-man defense.
Last stage in the evolution of
the defense.


368 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
The defensive lines should be so far out toward
the center of the court that scoring shots over
them will be of small percentage. The greatest
danger to which the defense is subjected from
this type of formation is that the offense will
send men behind both defensive lines and then
pass over them; or that the offense will draw
the secondary defensive line back by sending two
men through and then pass over the primary
line to a player who has slipped behind it.
VARIATIONS OF FIVE-MAN DEFENSE
(1) General Type—Another method of playing
this style of defense is to have the center who is
in the front defensive line drop back between
the first and second lines of defense, thus
strengthening the area around the basket, from
which most goals are scored. This really forms
a three-line defense. This formation has many
strong points, one of which is that it strengthens
the center of the regular formation, as shown
in Diagram 23. This center position is always
considered the weak spot in such a defense.
When playing the defense as it is shown in this
diagram, it is very easy to fall into such a
three-line formation and to meet many styles of
offense directed at the middle of the defensive
wall.
(2) General Type—Another variation of the
five-man two-line set formation is arranged by
TEAM DEFENSE 369
placing the second line closer to the front line
and the center player behind both these lines
and at a distance of not more than seven feet
from and directly in front of the goal. In each
of these two above-mentioned formations, the
two outside players in the front line move close
enough to the center of the court for their floor
positions to divide the court longitudinally into
thirds. This latter method of lining up the
defense with the center player behind both lines
is not so formidable as the preceding method
with the center player between the lines for the
reason that the center of the formation is left
somewhat weak and the corners of the court
are more open to attack. -
Due to the fact that the variations of this
defense, both in court positions and in the
movement of the players, is so similar to the
formation itself, Diagram 23 only, will be used to
discuss the different phases of this set five-men
two-line defense. tº
In such a formation, the three players out in
front are called the primary line; and the two
in the rear, the secondary line of defense. The
players in the front primary line are usually the
two forwards on each side, with the center be-
tween. This order may be shifted, if desired,
to strengthen the defense. The key man is the
center player. The players in the back, or sec-
ondary line, are usually the two guards. This
370 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
five-man set defense operates by two general
methods. One is a variation of the man-to-man
type of defense, and the other is the zoning
method of the five-man defense.
The Man-to-man Type of Five-man Defense
—In this style of the five-man defense, when two
opponents break through the first line, they are
covered by the guards as long as they are behind
the primary line. This leaves the three players
in the front line to cover the three players re-
maining on offense. One of these offensive
players does not dare to come too far toward
his own goal, so that in reality two players on
offense pit themselves against three on defense.
This is now, due to the development of the game,
a necessary advantage in basket-ball.
The general plan of such a defense is that the
front line of defense blocks the player with the
ball when he advances within from three to six
feet of that line. The front defensive line ac-
complishes this aim by surrounding the man
with the ball and crowding him to the side lines
and out of bounds, or by blocking his avenues
of passing and escaping in order to get a held
ball. Each team then has an equal chance for
possession of the ball.
An example of this type of defense follows.
The player with the ball has advanced to a point
near forward D1. The center D3 comes over
toward D1 and slightly forward, so that an
TEAM DEFENSE 371
attempt to go around him or between D1 and
[13 will be blocked. Player D2 at the same time
comes forward and over to the same side of the
court to complete the blockade. D2 must be
careful not to advance so far out and toward
D1 that he will not be able to intercept any
attempted pass back of him or to the side of
the court that he has just vacated. This block-
ade now leaves the pivot and back-pass as the
only avenue of escape for the man with the ball.
Even then, by clever work on the part of D3,
this move can be anticipated and the ball in-
tercepted.
If the offense should succeed in getting out
of this pocket by passing to the back court, the
defense would take its original position prepara-
tory to the next advance. If the attack should
now come down the center of the court, the
players D1 and D2 would close in toward D3
and advance as before to surround the player
with the ball,—at the same time exercising care
not to leave sufficient space between them and
D3 for the offense to break through.
When the ball has been intercepted, a quick
dash down the floor by the players who are
nearest the goal will often put the ball in good
open scoring position before the opponents have
had time to break from offense to defense. Here
in this rapid break-over from offense to defense
lies the story of the score of many a game. Let
372 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Refer
to
Diagram
23
it be borne in mind throughout all discussion of
these various forms of defense that their at-
tempted executions are worthless without calling
into play every perfected fundamental of indi-
vidual defense as well as every possible advan-
tage of footwork and headwork, for the rapid
break-over from one to the other.
Zone Method of Five-man Defense—The
other general method by which the five-man
defense operates is the zone method. In this
style of play, each player has a certain territory
for which he is responsible. These individual
territories are shown by the fourteen-foot circles
around each player. You will note that a few
areas are shown to which no player is assigned.
The guards are responsible for this territory
between their zones and the side line as well as
for the corners of the court nearest their zones.
It is assumed that an opponent shall be covered
by the player into whose territory he first enters
until the opponent has entered a team mate's
zone. Note that the zone lines of one player
are tangent to those of another. In this fact
lies one of the weaknesses of this system, for
the reason that two players may at times guard
the same opponent and thus leave portions of
their zones dangerously open to attack. Another
weakness of any defensive zone method is that
one defensive man may have two opponents to
cover in his zone at the same time. The player
TEAM DEFENSE 373
in such case is forced to jockey his opponents as
best he can, always remembering to keep between
them and the goal. -
Elastic Band Method of Offsetting Weak-
messes of Zone Defense—Many of these faults
can best be offset by correct and carefully timed
shiftings of the defensive players. These con-
jointed movements of such a defense in action
look very much as if the players were en-
compassed by an elastic band which is pulled
with each shifting movement of the defense into
a lopsided formation. A more detailed discus-
sion of this elastic band defense follows: The
defensive men always take the positions on the
floor indicated by the squares on the diagram.
Assume that a heavy elastic band—the tension
of which, with certain reservations to meet emer-
gencies, is always a constant—is drawn around
the five players. Assume, further, that each
player is fastened to this band so that he cannot
roll or slip along it. Now, when one player
moves, the resultant direction of the others is
fixed. Regardless of the place at which the
offense thrusts, the defense moves conjointly and
simultaneously to meet it. -
This defensive band swaying back and forth
as the tide of offense surges against it, then
receding and surging again, is not unlike the
children’s game of . “Bull in the Pen,” wherein
the circle, formed by the children interlocking
374 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Refer
to
Diagram
23
their hands, sways and changes as the player
(the bull) on the inside of the ring tries to
break through to get the man who is, according
to the rules of the game, stationed outside the
ring. :
In order to continue the discussion of such a
defense further, assume for the moment that
Diagram 23 is a typical offensive formation. In
such a case, let us also assume that the ball has
been passed from the other end of the court and
worked to the new position shown for x5, which
is in front of and to the right of the defense.
Players x2 and x1 have reached the positions
shown, just as x5 reaches his new position with
the ball. The defensive forward D2 follows the
two offensive players x1 and x2 to the rear of
his zone. The defensive guard D5 moves back
with x2. This movement draws the other de-
fensive players, []3, D4, and D1 in the direc-
tions indicated by the solid lines. The position
of the ball is always considered the strength of
the offense, and all players move in its direction.
D3 is in a position to harass the player with the
ball. [I2 can cover x1, and []5 can cover x2.
X3, after passing the ball to x5, moves to one of
the positions on the court shown by the arrows.
Because of the distance of x3 from the player
with the ball, and because of the direction that
the pass must take with respect to the defensive
players D1 and D3, a pass to x3 may be easily
TEAM DEFENSE 375
intercepted; therefore, he is not a dangerous
opponent in his present position.
Now, if x1 should continue in the course
shown, [I2 would follow him to the edge of his
zone, where D.1 would pick him up and follow
him while he was in this zone. Then, should x2
continue across the court to a position under
the basket where he would suddenly dash to a
spot behind the original position of x3, he would
be followed by D5 until D2, who has remained
at the back of his zone, could cover him. There-
after, D5 would again drop back to his original
position. If x3 should continue around behind
or on past D4, he would be followed by this
guard until he left the zone. If the point of
attack suddenly should be changed by a pivot
and a pass back from x5 to x4, the direction of
the defense would be reversed, as shown by the
dashed lines with arrows. -
By the use of movements similar to the fore-
going, any offensive situation can be met and
usually mastered. But the defense, in executing
such plays, must remember to move so that it
is always balanced and ready to change its direc-
tion, to feint and jockey the opponents, and to
worry the player with, the ball. A good de-
fensive man knows just when to thrust out his
arms and yell, or to slap his feet to the floor and
feint an attack. By perfecting all guarding
376 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
fundamentals, by employing every legitimate
guarding trick, and by mastering every defensive
movement of team play, any present-day defense
can make it very difficult for an offense, no
matter how brilliant, to succeed in getting
enough baskets for a winning score. A heady,
determined team playing a five-man defense can
so bewilder an offense that it can, almost without
exception, turn the tide of victory.
However, this zoning method of defense is
very difficult for novices to execute. It requires
much team experience, and is very unlike the
man-to-man variation of the five-man defense,
which requires less team training to play
it. Players cannot be thrown together in
this zoning method and be expected to work
smoothly at first. They must accustom them-
selves to their surroundings and to one another.
Developing defensive players to the point where
they can so feel their surroundings that they
move as if tied together, is indeed tedious work.
Success in such work can be attained only by
diligent and repeated practice of setting the
defensive men in their positions and giving the
ball to an offensive five which will try by any
fair means to penetrates to pass over, or to shoot
over, the defense.
TEAM DEFENSE 377
HOW TO TEACH A FIVE-MAN SET DEFENSE
OR ITS WARIATIONS
Perhaps the best way to teach this plan of
defensive play is to start with the lines of de-
fense back close to the goal. Put the guards
only a few feet from the end line and the de-
fensive forwards and defensive center on a line
even with the outer edge of the foul circle.
Instruct the offensive team that, for the present,
it must not shoot over the defense but must
work through it, if possible. As the defensive
players become accustomed to their set positions,
gradually move them out until they are able to
guard the full territory, as shown in Diagram
23. When the various defensive men learn to
play their own individual positions well, let
them exchange positions with each other, so that
they may become accustomed to playing every
possible defensive position on the court, and so
that you may be able to correctly place the best
possible combination on defense.
Another method of developing this defensive
style and one that can be worked well with the
preceding method, is to place the offensive team
in different possible positions on the court and
then direct the defense to set itself to meet these
conditions. Such work can be supplemented by
blackboard chalk talks and diagrams. Players
coached in this manner will gradually learn to
feel their positions and will know just how close
Refer
to
Diagram
23
378 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
to play to an opponent in order to cover him,
and just how much jockeying and feinting to do
in order to scare the offense out of its zone. One
fundamental defensive principle must always be
followed; that is, ‘a player should always keep
between his opponent and the goal that he is
guarding.
To add further to the discussion of how to
teach a versatile defense, three different possi-
ble court positions are taken up for treatment
of their defensive phases. These three possible
court positions to be discussed are (1) falling
into defense after losing the ball, (2) defense
after a shot for goal, and (3) defense when the
offense is playing for time. Follow Diagram 23
for most of this discussion.
nºr Falling Into Defense After Losing the Ball—
Diagram The method of falling into this defensive forma-
* tion is as important as the defense itself. In
Diagram 23 if the team which is set on the five-
man defensive plan should be thrown on the of-
fensive, players D1, D3, and D2, on account of
their floor positions, would carry the brunt of
the offensive work, while the guards D4 and []5
would play the back court game and attempt
only long shots, one guard always playing back
of the other. However, the guards might alter-
nate positions if each should be capable of doing
equally good floor work. The rear guard should
never allow an opponent to get behind him. This
TEAM DEFENSE 379
rear guard is in fine position to direct the team
play, for he can see the movement of all players
and is in position to diagnose every situation.
If at any time, while this team is on the offen-
sive, one of the guards should go all the way
down the court or drive through for a shot,
one of the forwards or the center must imme- .
diately fill the guard’s vacated position.
When this team loses possession of the ball,
it must break quickly from offense to defense.
Almost simultaneously with the loss of the ball,
the two guards should drop back, one at the
free throw line (unless there is already an op-
ponent behind him), and the other one (the floor
guard) six or seven feet directly in front of the
rear guard. These players should stay this
far out in the court and this distance out of
regular position in order to slow-up the offense
as much as possible until their team mates can
fall back on defense. As the offense advances
to meet these two guards, the rear guard should
cover the first man down into his own offensive
territory, and the floor guard should take the
second player who will be farther out in front.
They should not cover these players in a man-
to-man fashion. but should jockey them and
feint at the player with the ball in order to
confuse the play as much as possible. If the
guards can stop the advance or slow it up for a
time, the center and the forwards will be able to
380 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
get back on defense before the play gets too far
down the court. If both guards should be
drawn over to the same side of the court, the
first defensive man who comes to their rescue
should fall into place on the opposite side of the
court. As soon as the defensive forwards and
center drop back on defense, the guards should
get into their regular positions. In this situation
and all others similar to it, the guards should
form the front line defense and hold it until
they are forced back in order to keep between
the offense and the goal, or until they have been
reinforced by their team mates.
The point for teams to keep in mind in sit-
uations similar to this is that D1, D2, and DJ3
should not give up and fall back on defense the
moment they lose the ball. Too many teams do
this and lose many opportunities to recover the
ball and to make a try for a goal. The whole
front line, or primary defense, should begrudg-
ingly give ground while falling back. They
should pick up a man as they withdraw to their
end of the court and make an attempt to inter-
cept the ball as the offense advances. Many
players, the moment they lose the ball, will pass
by the offensive player with the ball without
even trying to get it, their whole thought, once
possession is lost, being to reach their position
in the defense formation. Often an unexpected
underhanded cut at the ball will knock it from
TEAM DEFENSE 381
a player's hands. “Don’t give up the moment
the ball is lost,” is a good slogan to follow.
Possession of the ball is everything; the team
should fight for it always.
Sometimes when a team loses possession of
the ball, it so happens that neither the forward
nor the center are back on defense even after the
offense has advanced far into defensive territory.
In such a case, the two men who are in the
front defensive line must cover the three zones
as best they can until their team mates get into
position. The guard on the side which is thus
weakened should play out into the court farther
than is customary until the delayed player gets
back into his zone position. In this type of
defense, the defensive team should, as nearly as
possible always keep the primary line of defense
intact in order to prevent any unmolested ad-
vance toward the basket. At the same time,
no opponents should be allowed to slip in behind
the defense for a set-up shot under the basket.
When the defense is not complete with all five
players in position, only clever jockeying and
feinting will keep all zones equally strong against
attack.
Defense After a Shot for Goal—After a shot
has been made, the guards should immediately
close in on the basket and be ready for rebound
work or for blocking all attempts at follow shots.
The defensive forwards should quickly turn
382 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
toward the basket and drop back to a position
inside the free throw line so that they can inter-
cept any tip out to a corner or to any point back
of the guards. The defensive center should
turn and cover the zone directly in front of the
basket. This position would be anywhere from
inside the foul line to a few feet from the
basket. It is the defensive center’s duty to
block any player coming down the middle of the
court who attempts a follow shot, and to recover
any rebounds directly in front of the basket.
This defensive play really means that the five-
man defense is drawn back close to and facing
the basket. It is a compressed five-man defense.
Many maintain that no such thing as a five-
man defense exists after a shot is attempted, but
that every player should cover an opponent until
the ball is recovered or until the ball has been
passed out and another advance started. In this
latter case, the regular defense would again
form. This plan of every player covering an
opponent after a try for goal is perhaps as good,
if not better, than any; for when the defense is
drawn in so close to the goal, there is a ten-
dency, if zone work is adhered to, for two players
to guard one man; or else for these two players
to hesitate, each thinking that the other will
cover the offensive man. This blunder will
occur in defensive zone work in spite of coaching
and in spite of the insistence that no player
TEAM DEFENSE 383
should wait for someone else to do work that
he can do for himself. Whether both players
rush in to the same man or whether they both
hesitate, an unguarded shot is often allowed.
If every man should pick an opponent after
the try for goal has been made, there would be
no danger from unguarded shots. This man-
to-man defense in such situations as this under
the basket, is especially easy to execute as the
players are limited in rebound work on account
of the small playing space into which they are
crowded.
Defense When Offense Is Playing for Time—
The set five-man defense is of no use when a
team is behind. The defense must now go out
and get the ball. The offense will hold the ball
in the back court just as long as it possibly can
without making an attempt to advance. In this
case, as many players should go out after the
ball as there are opponents in the back court.
The remaining defensive players should cover,
man-to-man, the opponents who advance toward
their own goal. The defensive men who
have gone out after the ball must cover all oppo-
nents in the back court. They must also attempt to
get a held ball, or to intercept a pass, or to
crowd the man with the ball to the side lines and
force him out of bounds.
The moment a defensive team begins a back
court game, the following procedure should be
384 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
followed: The defensive players who advance
to force the play must work cautiously and pro-
portionately, aiming to cover all opponents at
the same relative time. They should advance in
a crouched well-balanced position, with feet apart
and arms extended at the sides, so that they are
in good position to make the most of every
opportunity to get the ball and are, at the same
time, in strategic positions to drop back with any
advance that the offense might make. *.
TEAM DEFENSE 385
SPECIAL DEFENSIVE SITUATIONS
Many other situations for which the five-man
defense is not applicable must be met; namely,
the defense at the tip-off when the opponents
control the tip; defense when the opponents are
making a free try for goal; defense when the
opponents are awarded the ball out of bounds
at the end line near their own goal, at the end
line near the opposite goal, and at the side line
inside the scoring zone and outside the scoring
zone; defense after a held ball in the oppon-
ents’ own goal zone and Outside the opponents'
goal zone. Each of these various phases of
defense require special defensive treatment out-
side the realm of the five-man defense.
DEFENSE AT THE TIP-OFF
At tip-off, when the tip is being controlled by
the opposing center, any signals or offensive
plays that the other team might have will be
useless. Under such conditions, any attempts
that the team which is being outjumped might
make to use signals would be worse than futile
because the opponents and the zones would be
left unguarded and the opponents could score
with ease from the tip-off. -
The team whose center is being outjumped can
follow either of two courses. It must either sur-
render the tip altogether and line up in defensive
position to prevent the opponents, after they
386 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Diagram
24
have taken the ball, from scoring; or it must
place its players in such positions that they may
fight for the tip, even though the opposing center
is tipping the ball and controlling its direction.
Any number of defense formations may be
taken at the tip-off. It is the intention here to
give only a few of the more fundamental forma-
tions from which any number of variations may
be made. For convenience in distinguishing one
formation from the other, the following names,
suggestive of some figure formed by the play,
have been used, namely, “The Scissors Defense,”
“The Funnel Defense,” and “The Trapezoidal
Box Defense.” In the discussion of these three
defensive formations, it is assumed that the
opponents in each case control the tip.
The Scissors Defense
In the scissors defense, the positions of the
players are shown in Diagram 24. This defense
takes its name from the shearing effect that the
lines of action of the two players on the opposite
sides of center would have, if they were forces.
Players D1 and D2 (the defensive forwards)
should be placed in such positions that they will
be able to cover all of the general tipping lanes
on their side. Also, they should be in position
to meet all opponents driving in on tips at an
angle rather than in a direct line. The positions,
TEAM DEFENSE - 387
DIAGRAM 24
THE SCISSORS DEFENSE
/ \
\ 0
O
Defense when center is being out-jumped
at tip-off.

388. MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
as shown in the diagram, are designed to meet
these requirements.
Usually the tips come on either side directly
or obliquely in front of and behind the center,
and about four feet from the center circle in
the first tipping lane. However, a center who
is easily controlling the tip, may tip the ball to
good advantage into one of the two outer lanes
on either side of the circle. The heavy lines
indicating the directions of players D1 and D2
show the usual lines of attack of these two
players and are the lines from which this forma-
tion derives its name. Player D2 covers the
front oblique, rear oblique, the side tips in his
part of the court, and the back tip. Player D1
covers the front tip, the rear oblique, front
oblique, and side tips in his defensive area.
These two players must time their dash for the
ball a fraction of a second slower than their
opponents’ start, so that they may judge the
position of the tip if they have not previously
been able to solve this.
In breaking up the tip, the defensive men
have either of two courses to follow. They
could either spring for the ball, or they could
meet the opponent just as he comes to the floor
and attempt to get a held ball. If the opponent
should bat the ball instead of catching it, then
players []1 and [I2 would be forced either to
attempt to beat them to the ball while it is in the
TEAM DEFENSE 389 .
air or to intercept it by outguessing the opponent
in determining to which court position the ball
will be batted. When going after the ball in the
air, the defensive forward must drive hard in
order to protect himself against the force of his
opponent. He must spring into the air and ex-
tend one arm high so as to outreach his oppo-
nent, and thus obtain the ball. By half-turning
in the air after recovering the ball, he can evade
an opponent, thereby preventing a held ball.
The dash lines shown on the diagram are
possible positions for players D1 and D2 to
cover for other tips when their direction is antic-
ipated. You will note that the position of the
players from these dash lines are about equi-
distant from all of these points. The center in
this play should, after the tip, step back and to
the side to which the ball has been tipped in
order to aid in any way possible in breaking up
the opponents’ play. If the opponents have
secured the ball, the center can advantageously
drop back to a defensive position. The guards
D4 and D5 should play back to stop any try
for goal directly from tip, and, also, to guard
any opponents in the back court. The exact
position of the guards will be governed by their
opponents in the back court. They should
always keep between the opponents and the goal.
In no case should the guards advance farther
390 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
than half way between the goal zone line and
the center circle. ~
Should the opponents get the ball from the tip,
player [11 continues to the defensive position of
the forward, while D2 circles and takes the other
forward position on the opposite side of the court.
The Funnel Defense
Diagram This formation gets its name from its shape.
* The funnel defense is a variation of the scissors
defense. In this defense, players []1 and D2
are drawn in closer to the center circle, and D1
is directly behind, while D2 is in front of the
opposing center. The positions of these players
protect against a front or back tip. These play-
ers may cover to the same side to meet plays, or
they may work as they did in the scissors forma-
tion. This latter method of attack is indicated by
the dash lines in Diagram 25. In this formation,
tips to the outside lanes are comparatively safe,
as it is next to impossible for the players to get
out to these positions soon enough to stop them.
In such a case, the most that could be hoped for
would be that D2 could drop back, after the tip,
to the side to which the ball has been tipped, and
thus prevent a shot. Then, []1 should hurriedly
cover to the opposite side to block a pass.
This is a strong formation for blocking the
player who receives the ball on the tip. A
possible play is shown in Diagram 25. The ball
TEAM DEFENSE
391
DLAGRAM 25
THE FUNNEL DEFENSE

O
/ \
& \_/
/
\
º
Aſ ©.
ſ
©
/~N
\ /
O
A strong tip-off defense for plays passing
close to center.
392 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Diagram
26
has been tipped to the right inside lane for a
guard play. D2 immediately covers to that side
and gets in position to block the offensive guard
from going forward or to the outside, as he
comes to the floor with the ball. D1 covers in
behind, to grab the ball, should the offensive
guard pivot. The center (D3) steps back and
outside of the circle, and covers to the inside.
If the offensive guard should come to the
floor with the ball, as is usually the case, he
will find himself blocked on all sides, and as a
result a held ball should be effected easily. D2
should plan to get just in front of the position
where he expects the offensive guard to hit the
floor after his jump for the ball. Usually, play-
ers in the position of D2 can get a held ball by
driving for it. Players []4 and []5 play the back
court just as they did in the scissors defense.
Sometimes this same defense is played by ad-
vancing the guards D4 and D5 to positions in
line with D2, while D2 drops back to a position
in line with the old positions of D4 and D5.
This is a weak formation in that the back court
is not sufficiently protected and the opponents,
if they should get the tip, have a greater chance
to SCOre.
The Trapezoidal Box
If a line should be drawn through positions D1,
D2, D5, and D4 (Diagram 26) in the order
TEAM DEFENSE 393
DIAGRAM 26
THE TRAPEZOIDAL BOX
O
/ \
\_/
©
\ ^
O
Center tips ball to forward. Forward bats
the ball to guard. Guard passes to
forward, who dribbles in for a shot.

394 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
named, a trapezoid will be formed. From this,
the name of “Trapezoidal Box” is given to this
formation. On the tip, either player D1 or D2
drives for the ball. Which player it will be
depends upon the side to which the ball has
been tipped. The purpose of the player driving
for the ball is to spring high into the air and bat
the ball back to the guard who is on the same
relative side and who will advance to meet the
ball. If the tip has been made to the side of []1,
then D2 should drive toward the side line in the
direction of the dashed line, so that if []1 suc-
ceeds in getting the ball to D4, he will be in a
position to receive a pass and dash toward his
goal. At the same time, D5 drops back to guard
the goal, should []1 not succeed in getting the
ball to D4. The center steps back out of the cir-
cle ready to go down the court to the left or to
drop back into a defensive position. If []1 should
miss the ball, he immediately would fall into the
forward's defensive position on his side of the
court, and D2 would continue to his position,
while the guards D4 and D5 would drop back
into their regular defensive positions.
The position of the guards at the tip-off pro-
tects against front tips, while the position of
the forwards prevents back tips. They are also
in position to rush side tips, as has been dis-
cussed and as is shown in Diagram 26.
It may be in this formation that the opponents
TEAM DEFENSE 395
will play one or two men back near their goal.
In this case, the guards would have to drop back
farther than shown in the diagram. They might
play in a line with the center, one behind the
other (one guard back near the goal and the
other in a line with their former positions), with
the understanding that one was to cover to the
right and the other to the left, should the ball
go to their opponents. This would still maintain
protection against front tips.
This formation has the advantages of other
formations in that, should the opponents gain
the tip, both forwards are in a better position to
fall back on defense. They are both moving in
the direction of their opponents' goal.
Sometimes a team will concede the tip to its
opponents and will place the forwards and
guards back on defense at the beginning of the
tip-off. Some teams are so clearly outplaying
their opponents at the tip-off that this procedure
is the wisest, even though it tends to put the
team on a strictly defensive game.
It will be seen from the above comments that
there is no end to the number of combinations
for defensive play at the tip-off. Sufficient weak-
nesses and strong points of these defenses have
been discussed so that other combinations can
be built to meet particular offensive plays.
A good well-planned defense at the tip-off will
succeed in gaining possession of the ball for its
396 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Diagram
27
team a good percentage of the time, even though
its opponents control the tip.
DEFENSE AFTER FREE THRow
Many baskets are scored after missed free
tries for goals because the defense is not alert
and because the vital zones about the goal are
not protected. Most scores, after missed free
trials, are made from close-in positions on either
side or directly in front of the goal, because the
ball after the missed goal does not bound far
from the basket. Its force and back spin is spent
when it hits the basket rim or the backboard.
For this reason, the area in proximity to the
basket is the most vital scoring spot for tip-ins
and should be the zone of concentrated defense.
The most logical areas for tip-outs are between
the side lines and the foul lane. These areas,
too, must be guarded, but not so heavily as the
tip-in area, because the danger is not so great
there. Missed free throw shots require that the
ball be handled twice, the second time being on
the rebound. Therefore, the position under the
goal is the best place to stop the offensive team's
opportunities to score. The goals made from
tip-outs, compared to the goals from tip-ins, will
be very few.
In the arrangement for such a defense, the
two tallest players should station themselves,
one. On either side of the basket along the foul
TEAM 101EFENSE
397
DIAGRAM 27
DEFENSE AFTER FREE THROW
[5]
O
Defensive men are placed so as not to
allow a set-up after a missed shot.


898 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
lines, about two and one-half feet from the end
line. This plan keeps an opponent from getting
between these players and the backboard, with-
out their being directly under the backboard,
so that the board would interfere with their
jumping for the ball. These two players must
block any rushes from the side by the opponents
and must also spring for the ball, should it come
to their side,-timing their jump so as to meet
the ball while they are at the highest point.
These players may legally block any opponent
who rushes. By stepping into the foul lane,
after the ball has hit the basket or backboard,
they can present their backs and hips to the
rest of the court. The defensive players tak-
ing this position should crouch, ready to spring
for the ball. The quick step into the foul
lane with the crouch before the jump is made,
gives good poise and adds height to the jump.
If these guards obtain the ball, they should
bring it down to the floor in front of the ad-
vanced foot to protect against a held ball and
then pivot (usually toward the side lines) for a
dribble into an open position or for a pass to a
team mate. Immediately after such a pivot, it
may be that an underhand or a hook pass will
be in order.
The third defensive player should station him-
self at the intersection of one of the foul
lines with the foul circle. The moment the ball
TEAM DEFENSE 399
touches the rim of the basket or the backboard,
he should step into the foul lane with his back
and hips presented to the opponent who has
just made the shot. This defensive man must
block any opponent who drives down the middle
of the court for a follow shot. He is also in
a position to get any rebounds that come directly
back to the front. These three players should
form a triangle of defense about the goal and
should in most cases intercept the ball.
The other two defensive players should station
themselves at the point of intersection of the
foul circle with the goal zone line. They should
be responsible for the guarding of the territory
bounded by the goal zone line, the end line, and
the side lines. These two players are also respon-
sible for any tip-outs. They must meet and re-
cover any rebounds which go over the heads of
the players around the goal. These men must
necessarily be a trifle slower getting into action
than their team mates, because they must first
determine the direction of the opponents in their
territory and wait for any tip-outs to take that
direction. By rushing in too quickly, these men
would either overrun the ball or let an opponent
elude them and get the ball for a shot.
Should a defensive man who is under the
basket recover the ball, his team mate, who is on
the same side to which the man with the ball
will pivot, should mové to the side lines, where
400 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Diagram
28
he will be in good position to receive a pass out
to him. The player on the opposite side of the
court should move quickly toward his own goal
for a long pass, from across the court. A
quick thrust like this, before the opponents have
had time to shift to the defense, will net many
needed scores. It is the quick, smashing sur-
prise play that throws the opponents into a
momentary trance and gains the needed points.
So long as the remarks are directed to a
team mate and are neither abusive nor unsports-
manlike, talking while an opponent is attempting
a free throw is good strategy. If often dis-
concerts the thrower and causes him to miss the
basket. Anything, whether pertaining to the
game, the crowd, or a subject remote from the
game, can be used. Such a conversational topic
might be uncorrelated directions to team mates;
such as, “You take him in front, and I’ll get him
behind,” etc. Or, if the defensive team knows
any of the thrower’s personal history, such as
his record for scoring or for not scoring, or
some joke or tale about him, such information
can be used at this point in the game to good
advantage. Jesting will have a tendency to
distract an opponent's attention and to make his
shooting less accurate.
- DEFENSE AFTER A HELD BALL
When a held ball is declared outside of the
opponents’ scoring zone and near or beyond the
TEAM DEFENSE 401
DLAGRAM 28
DEFENSE AFTER HELD BALL
XI
*
A \ [4]
X4—X

2
\_/ x.
/TN
\ y
O
Defense builds wall around basket to
repel invasion.
402 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
center of the court, the same defensive forma-
tions can be used that are used at the tip-off.
The regular defense that is used by a team
at the tip-off is usually good. If one of
the jumping players is decidedly taller than the
other, usually the taller player will tip the ball
back and catch it himself. In anticipation of
this, one player should be behind the tall oppo-
nent. When this opponent who gets the ball
turns around, the defensive man stationed behind
him should charge the ball, carry it to the floor,
out and away from this opponent before he has
time to realize what is happening. This method
of taking the ball from an opponent has been
described, step by step, in the chapter on indi-
vidual defense.
If the held ball should occur near or within
the opponents’ goal zone, the best defense, when
it is almost certain that the opponents will con-
trol the tip, is to keep the strength of the defense
between the two jumping players and the goal.
Diagram 28 may be taken as a typical situation
for a held ball within the opponents’ goal zone.
The defensive players []4, [15, and D2 have
formed a triangle of defense about the goal.
D5 is in a position to cover the territory back
of D1, between the goal and the side line. D4
is covering the area on the far side of the court
in order to prevent any “sleepers” from slipping
in behind the defense. [I2 is guarding the
TEAM DEFENSE 403
center of the court and the area on one side of
the jumping players, as well as the territory
back of them. D1 is guarding against a tip
toward the side lines. D3 and x3 are jumping
for the ball. Should x3 catch the ball on the
tip and pivot back, he would be blocked by D1,
[13, and [I2. If the ball should be tipped back
safely, the defense would move immediately to
the lopsided five-man set defensive formation.
DEFENSE ON ouT of Bound PLAYS
The ball is played from out of bounds more
than from the tip-off, so that it is very important
to form a defense for blocking plays and for
obtaining the ball on out of bounds. -
In the first place, when the ball goes out of
bounds, the player nearest to the ball should go
right after it with his hand extended above his
head so that he can call the attention of the
official to the fact that he is the one to whom
the ball should go. Often if there is a doubt in
the mind of the official as to who last touched
the ball, a player by such tactics can gain the
decision. At any rate, he will show that he is
alert and that he is playing for every break.
In out of bound plays, a cool and versatile de-
fense has a fine chance to regain possession of
the ball. The opponent with the ball has only
five second to pass the ball into the field of play
and many times, through fear of holding it too
404 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
long, passes too hurriedly and gives an alert de-
fense a chance for the breaks.
The player guarding the opponent with the
ball can do more than anyone else in helping to
intercept it. This man on defense should do
everything possible to worry his opponent and to
so distract him that he will lose track of his team
mates who may be strategically located. A
guard in such a position should never be caught
without his arms outstretched and his feet apart;
but should wave his arms, talk and vell, and
shift about on his feet. He can block low
passes and floor bounces with his feet as well
as with his hands. He should watch his oppo-
nent’s eye and at the same time watch the ball.
He should never allow any feints or distractions
from other men on the court to divert his atten-
tion, even for the fraction of a second, from his
opponent who is in position to pass. He should
get as near to his opponent as possible, thus
making a smaller passing angle and, conse-
quently, lessening the territory that he must
guard.
Ball Out of Bounds Opposite Opponents' Goal
—When the opponents are awarded the ball out
of bounds opposite their own goal, the two de-
fensive guards should drop back immediately
near the two opponents who are farthest back.
The other three players should cover their oppo-
nents in a man-to-man fashion and should drop
TEAM DEFENSE 405
back only after they have failed to intercept the
ball and their opponents have started an
offensive. $ -
Many teams when they lose the ball under
their own goal on out of bound plays imme-
diately fall back on defense. This is conceding
everything to the opponents and should not be
done, unless a team wishes to recover from a
strenuous offense and all of the legal time outs
have been used.
Even though the percentage of chances for
recovering the ball from out of bounds are
against the team on defense, nevertheless, two or
three interceptions during a game may turn into
easy goals. Fighting for the ball always worries
, the team that is awarded the ball. The defense
should never give up.
Ball Out of Bounds Under Opponents' Own "º"
Goal—When the opponents are awarded the ball
out of bounds under their own goal, perhaps
the best defense to use is the five-man cup de-
fense. Diagram 29 shows a typical case of such
out of bound play. One of the defensive guards
(D5) should cover the player with the ball.
The other defensive guard (D4) should be
stationed near []5, and an offensive forward
(D1) should be stationed on the other side of
this trio. These players will be a little farther
out in the court than D5, but not far enough
out for an opponent to get between them and
406 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
the end line to receive the pass. This arrange-
ment forms a cuplike defense similar to that used
in football. D1 and D4 are responsible for
guarding the corners and the court behind Cl3
and D2, D3 and D2 always fill in the center of
the cup and are never beyond the goal zone line.
The defensive players, with the exception of D5,
who directly faces the player with the ball,
should face halfway between the player with the
ball and the relative opponents. This position
should place their backs away from the goal.
At the same time they should always keep be-
tween their opponents and the goal.
The defense should never follow its opponents
man-to-man when the play is in this part of the
court, for they might be pulled out of their posi-
tions by one opponent while another opponent
slipped into the space left unguarded for a
set-up shot. If the ball should be successfully
returned to the court by a long pass out to x5,
the defense should immediately move out to its
regular five-man set defensive positions.
If the ball to be passed in, is directly under
the goal, the defense should be balanced in the
center of the court; while if the ball is to one
side of the goal, the defense should be unbal-
anced or strengthened to that side, as the oppo-
site side is farther from the ball and is thus less
liable to attack. -
In the diagram shown, D2 is in a position to
TEAM DEFENSE 407
DIAGRAM 29
DEFENSE ON OUT OF BOUND PLAYS
Under Opponents’ Goal
*u-
5
= ai-
-
/~N
\ iſ
O
Defensive cup formation protects the basket;
also allows a quick break from
defense to offense.

408 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Diagram
30
advance out into the court to intercept a long
pass over the defense. If the ball were on the
opposite side of the court, [J3 would be in posi-
tion to do this.
Ball Out of Bounds at the Side Line in Oppo-
ments' Own Goal Zone—If the ball is awarded
to the opponents out of bounds in their own
goal zone but along the side line, the regu-
lar, though compressed, five-man defense should
be used. This time, unless the ball is in the very
corner of the court, one of the outside players
in the primary line of defense should cover the
opponent with the ball. A large, rangy player,
usually a forward, should be assigned the task
of guarding the player who is out of bounds.
Such a rangy player on defense can give the
man out of bounds more trouble and can make
his intended plans for the return of the ball
more uncertain and more difficult than can a
smaller stocky man. Diagram 30 shows the
positions of the players in such a defense.
The defense is compressed to the space inside
the goal zone. The guard toward the op-
posite side of the court should move to a posi-
tion almost in front of the basket. []5 should
be stationed nearer to the side line than to the
basket. D1 should guard the player with the
ball, while D3 should be in the front line about
midway between the defensive guards (D4 and
D5). D2 can act as a floater who may drop
TEAM DEFENSE - 409
DIAGRAM. 30
Ball Out of Bounds at the Side Line,
In Opponents' Own Goal Zone.

Ö
|^\ ,
[TIX
H; |
Massed defense in opponents’ own goal zone
insures against short shots.
410 1MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Diagram
back or move out. He should intercept long
passes across the court and should prevent a
“sleeper” from slipping down the far side of the
court for a set-up shot.
HOW TO BREAK UP A ROLLING OFFENSE
By a rolling or revolving triangle offense is
meant an offense which employs three or more
men passing the ball at angles while the men
themselves go down on curves, always cutting
in behind the men to whom they pass. The
secret of the success of such an offense lies in
the ability of the passer to pivot around and
get the ball quickly enough to avoid a clash with
the defense, and, at the same time, to advance
on the next curve in time to get back into the
play.
This style of offense with its variations recalls
the German military tactics, which is mechanical
and not versatile. The best system is a flexible
system. Just as the rolling German military
advance swept everything before it until the
sleeping world awakened and formed a defense
to meet it; so did the rolling offense in basket-
ball, in its infinitesimal part of compared magni-
tude, during its earlier days, meet and sweep
everything before it. The rolling offense found
the basket-ball world sated with old methods
and indifferent to new ones, so that it virtually
swept every team that it met off its feet for
TEAM DEFENSE 411 .
several years, until the rest of the basket-ball
world arose from its satiety and met this
offense with a defensive power that could stop it.
Now, there is no great difficulty experienced in
turning back a rolling offense by intercepting
the ball. The following play (Diagram 31)
shows a method that will work havoc with any
rolling offense, no matter how well-geared and
how high-powered it may be.
In executing the play all that is needed for its
success is co-ordination of mind and muscle;
alacrity and cool-headedness, or mental poise.
It may be that the last requisite is the greatest
one, for a team upon which there is one man
who loses his head in any department of the
game is like an engine with one bearing burned
out. It has a knock in it—no power and no
pull. $
The Play—To break up a rolling offense,
a man-to-man defense cannot be employed. The
offense would so entangle the defense that it
could not extricate itself until a goal had been
scored. The object of the rolling offense is to
pull the defensive players out of their positions
so as to give space for a player to slip through
on a dribble to the basket. This diagram will
show the relative positions of the defense and
the offense—with the offense ready to break
through. The offensive players x1, x2, and x3
have worked the ball up the court to a position
412 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
in front of the defense. The offensive center
(x3) then dribbles toward D2 in order to draw
D1 over in the direction of D2, as shown in the
diagram. The dribbler then pivots, blocks D1,
and passes to x1, who dribbles by for a shot.
In order to prevent the success of this play
the following tactics should be employed: D1
should charge x3 by using the boxer’s catch step,
which is the correct fundamental advancing step
employed by guards. The use of this correct
guarding step will avert any possibility of the
player being overbalanced. He should charge
far enough to prevent x3 from dribbling be-
tween D1 and D2. Then D1 should take a
quick uppercut at the ball. This blow will many
times knock the ball from an opponent’s grasp.
D1 should now step over and back toward his
former position. As x3 pivots and passes to
x1, x1, as he comes for the ball, will find his
path blocked, -
If []1 is quick to follow up, the attempted
pass may result in a held ball. At least the
offensive advance will be blocked and must start
over only to meet similar defensive tactics. It
may be that x3 will attempt to pivot in the
opposite direction and pass to x2. If []2 will
employ the same tactics used by D1, x2 can
be blocked off just as easily. -
The direction in which x3 will pivot can be
determined by watching his feet. As the block-
TEAM DEFENSE 413
DIAGRAM 31
HOW TO BREAK UP A ROLLING OFFENSE
º
_2~ſ
* /
º
º
S
º
/
/ 2.
&TN
\ \ /
Guard using boxer's catch step confuses
dribbler in rolling offense.
( . -
(W
2
2.
s º -
º

414 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
ing pivot is commonly employed, the player will
pivot on the foot that is forward. If the left
foot is forward, the player will pivot with his
back to his own right. If the right foot is
forward, he will pivot with his back to his own
left. -
By following these directions, one guard can
block two offensive players who try to pass by
him with the rolling offense. Such an offense as
this becomes a simple toy in the hands of any
guard if he will always remember these points:
(1) never charge headlong for the player with
the ball, but charge with catch steps so that the
body balance will always be maintained; (2)
worry the player with the ball first by feinting
and then by taking an uppercut at the ball;
(3) watch which foot is forward before the
pivot is started; (4) shift to the side of the
pivot and back, in order to miss the intended
block and thus meet the player who is coming to
receive the ball. -
CHAPTER VII
Inspirational Coaching
BUILDING TRADITION
Real teams are built around tradition. A
school without tradition must build it. Winning
teams make athletic history. Without victories,
schools lack traditional atmosphere for those
who come after. Athletes in such schools are
void of the desire to emulate superb players.
Superb players are victorious players.
Give “Old Timers” a Cordial Welcome—“Old
timers” should always receive a cordial welcome
around the gymnasium and on the campus. See
to it that every player on your present team
has a chance to shake the hands of former stars
when they come home. Arrange little “has-
been” evening chats whenever possible, so that
the present lads may enjoy the atmosphere of
Other years. - -
Evenings like these are bound to bring out
many greatest games and greatest plays, and
the young player will be charmed and fascinated
in this vivid atmosphere created by the “old
timers” in retrospect. And out of it all will
come greater reverence for the school, more
profound respect for the old star who has re-
turned as a success in life’s adventures, and a
deep desire to emulate these traditions of skill
and courage.
416 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
In this connection, I recall the story of a
football end of other years who had returned for
the big game. He was riding out to the field
on the bus with the football end who was now
filling his own former position. In conversation
with this end he said, “Well, old man, the team
you hit today never gained a yard around my
end during the three years I played.”
Silence then played an effective role. The end,
who was to play that position on this day did
not answer, but in his heart he vowed, “If this
fellow held down the same end that I am to
play today for three years and left behind him
such a record, the man who skirts my end in
this game will die.”
These heights to which players are led to do
the near impossible are, without exception, the
results of psychic stimuli. This time it came
from the “old timer”—the very stratum of tradi-
tion. A silent urge to an aspiring player often
determines the depth of his resolve.
Athletic Galleries—I believe in athletic gal-
leries in the gymnasium. They should be main-
tained and added to consistently throughout the
years. They build history, a knowledge of
which is valuable in the life of the player.
Athletic Gallery of Alongo Stagg—Coach
Alonzo Stagg of the University of Chicago per-
haps has the most noteworthy collection of this
kind in the country. Pictures of the “C” men
in all sports are placed in these galleries, with
INSPIRATIONAL COACHING 417
a star above each captain. An athletic gallery
where the players of this year, next, and next,
may study the faces of the men who have
played their positions in years previous stands
ever before the aspirants as an effective and
silent talk.
Respect for School Officials—Foster rever-
ence among the men on your teams for the
president and the faculty of your school by re-
questing that various members of your faculty
make occasional talks to the boys in the dressing
rooms before the games. Create respect for the
other sports by asking the coaches of the various
branches to make occasional informal talks to
the team. Arrange “pep” meetings in which the
team is given a position of prominence and the
school band and the students are given every
opportunity to express their unqualified support
of the team. All of this stimulates school spirit,
which in the end spells tradition; and tradition
is the mother of loyalty. +.
Story of a Lad Who Lived True to Tradition
—One of the best basket-ball players I have ever
seen was a lad, who, as a slip of a tow-headed
boy in the grades, had carefully studied the
maneuvers of the school’s greatest athlete. This
“greatest athlete” was a local boy also, and in
the life of the little boy had become much the
same sort of influence as did the “Great Stone
Face” in Hawthorne's tale, to another boy who
418 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
sat in his doorway at evening, as the days and
years passed by, gazing at the great face and
longing to grow more like it. It was a tangible
ideal, as was the school’s “greatest athlete” to
the little tow-headed boy in the grades.
In the big game of the year this greatest
athlete received an injury which, it is alleged,
ultimately meant his death. The little hero-
worshiper, throughout the rest of his boyhood
years vowed and revowed to live to take the
place of this great athlete whose death was
glorified in the life of many a little boy about
town. -
The young hero-worshiper lived true to his
ideal and to his vow, and grew to be a fine,
clean, clear-brained athlete, an honor to his
school, a “scrapper,” and in every way worthy
of the ideal in the life of his hero. He lived
true to tradition and left illuminated history
behind.
GETTING CLOSE To YoUR MEN
Go With Your Men Individually—Perfect
technique, perfect team work, good conditioning,
and the building of tradition are not enough. The
truly successful coach must go with his men,
individually, beyond the field of conditioning
and beyond the field of play. He must get into
their hearts; he must know their folks; he must
find what interests them most; he must study
their different temperaments, as he would study
INSPIRATIONAL COACHING 419
the temperaments of his own sons. In short, he
must “get under their skin,” feel their sorrows
and help to find remedies for them.
Inspiration Cannot Be Standardiged—Inspira-
tional coaching can not be standardized as
technique has been, and can be successful only
so far as the coach permits the light of his own
personality—his own soul—to shine through.
The Trouble May Be Deeper Than Staleness
—I have had well-oiled, high-powered team-
machines utterſy shattered for a time by a
keen disappointment to a player. On some
occasions, it has taken weeks to help the fellow
find himself—his shooting would be inaccurate;
his passing, uncertain; his team work, ruined;
and his intellect, stagnant. A man, perhaps,
who had in years previous and in games previous
played like a flash—heady, fleet, baffling op-
ponents, and thrilling spectators, now playing
like a “dud.” Crowds saying, “What's the
matter with ‘Red' this year? He's not going
at all.” And “Red” aware of his off-form has
faced many an audience in humility and shame,
with his psychic self suffering a shock that he,
try as he might, could not outdistance. The
physical body cannot act co-ordinately when
that spark of ambition that fires men to acts of
courage has smoldered.
Do Not Preach—In such mental crises as
these, coaches must tread carefully. Preaching
420 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
carries no weight. “Busting in” to a fellow and
calling him a “quitter”—efficient as it is many
times under other conditions when shock is
needed—tends only, in such cases as these, to
add greater mental depression to a lad who is
already, as he puts it, “down and out.” Such
tactics do not avail.
Have a Quiet Talk—When you find such con-
ditions sapping your team's strength, it is well
to make an appointment with the lad in trouble
for a quiet talk in some appropriate spot. Some-
times the office is best, if the player feels most
at home there. Or, it may be your den in your
own home is the place. Or a virile hike into
the hills, when the icy blasts of basket-ball
weather come to meet you as you open the door,
is a worthy retreat in such crises. For souls
in struggle find an easier outlet for expression
while the body is in action and is, at the same
time, forced to battle with the weather elements
of the world.
It May Be a Depression Brought On By
Financial Straits—Perhaps the player's trouble
is depression excited by lack of funds and he
cannot see how he can go on to school. Or it
may be too much work and not enough time
to study. It may be incompatibility in the home.
Or it may be a love affair. Whatever it is, an
earnest coach will find it out and endeavor to
substitute happiness for misery. It is true that
INSPIRATIONAL COACHING 421
the player's power resides directly in his nerves
and muscles, but a psychic stimulus applied to
these forces will whet his athletic power.
We have No Scales Delicate Enough to
Weigh Men's Finer Athletic Qualities—We have
scales in the gymnasium for weighing men before
and after practice to determine their physical
fitness; but research has, as yet, given us no
set of scales, however sensitive, to determine
man’s finer athletic quality—that indefinable
something that upsets “dope” and causes a man
to chalk up half a dozen field counters in one
game and to play scoreless in the next.
Earnest Men Make Sacrifices That Hurt—If
a player is financially depressed, aid can be
found in many legitimate ways. In fact, I can
say, in all truth, that I have never yet found a
player in dead earnest about his education who
has not found a way out of financial difficulties
through work and through student loan funds,
even though, at times, circumstances have
pressed hard. -
One of the greatest centers I ever had, lived
on two meals a day during his first two years
in college, so that he could make ends meet.
Others of our most superb natural athletes, who
have made history for their schools, have worn
coats with frayed cuff edges and trousers with
neat patches, both at School and on trips—
clothing that hurt their pride, but not irre-
422 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
trievably. For, in the hearts of these earnest
men, the goal was the thing, a college edu-
cation. - - * . .
The “Floater”—The other type of athlete is
the “floater,” who keeps his eyes on the ground.
He does not seem to be able to look forward.
He will not play for his school, because it has
never become a part of his heart. In his develop-
ment, athletics have been misapplied. He does
not know the higher field of inspiration; and in
high school or in college, wherever he is (re-
gardless of his prowess as a player) his team,
his coach, and his school will be better off
without him. At best, he is a disorganizer—the
most potent poison that can be injected into
any team. - -
It May Be Depression Caused by Low Class-
standing—If the player is failing in his studies
and is mentally depressed on account of this,
get a team mate or somebody who knows the
subject in which his class-standing is low, to
boost him along. Take his textbooks along on
the trips and let the chap who knows most about
the subject in question, study with him while in
travel. This kindly assistance of team mates to
each other is a splendid way of promoting
friendliness. It stimulates interest in the other
fellow's life outside the basket-ball realm. It
promotes a feeling of kinship among the men
and very soon petty jealousies are completely
wiped out; and the men are all for the big
INSPIRATIONAL COACHING 423
thing—the team—and for the best men for the
positions on the team, regardless of who they
may be. Submergence of self is a valuable
psychic situation to be developed in the building
of a team. -
Players Can Tutor Each Other—Many times
I have seen the entire trip enroute spent by
players tutoring each other, “trig” here, calcu-
lus or, perhaps, English Lit. 23, there, and so on.
I have yet to see a player with any native ability
whatever, who, when handled in this way, has
failed to make the hill. His team mates will
not let him fail. They find secret pride in
their ability to tutor; satisfaction in their ability
to help; keener interest in the struggles of a
team mate; friendliness in closer companionship;
and a feeling of personal success in making it
possible to keep the personnel of the team intact.
Inquire About Class Standing—I have always
made it a point, three or four times each
semester, to ask the players how they stood in
their class work, so that we might, as a team,
avert any possible calamity of ineligibility.
When a player is low in class-standing, we go
right to work in the manner outlined above.
we do not mix fun and play with study. We
make it serious. In my seventeen years of
basket-ball coaching, I have lost but One regular
player through scholastic ineligibility, and that
was through a technicality of which we were, at
the time, not aware. -
424 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
It May Be Incompatibility in the Home—
Incompatibility in the home is a serious sort of
depression, and, so often, one which we, as
coaches, cannot reach. In many cases, how-
ever, especially if the player is a local boy, much
can be done to remedy such conditions. If pos-
sible, get intimately acquainted with his parents.
You will have a common talking point and a
splendid chance for your personality to win.
The parents are, regardless of incompatibilities,
the proud possessors of this boy. You, as coach,
are the salesman. Sell the boy and his aspira-
tions to his parents. Make them appreciate
in their son, a college star. Be the mediator,
and in a short time the boy will be a realized
asset rather than a liability in his home. His
parents will become some of the most ardent
rooters at the games; and, in all probability,
the mornings after home games this lad will be
getting eggs and toast served to him in bed. And
you will find in the boy a new will to do and a
new power to execute. You will then get all he,
as a player, has to give. -
It May Be a Romance—Or the depression
may be an affair of heart—a romance. I have
had fine machines more completely wrecked
by such depressions than by any others. In
handling such cases, you will need not only
strong personality to aid you, but great tact and
delicateness. You will often be forced to seek
cutside aid in order that you may outline, per-
INSPIRATIONAL COACHING - 425
haps through the player’s best boy friend, a
definite plan of forgetting, by means of skillful
and unsuspected substitution. Well-planned
double-dating on weekends is an excellent way
to bring this lad back.
Such cases are often slow to respond and
stubborn to handle; and the very fabric of a
team may be shattered for a full half-year, or
longer, by such aggravations, before any efforts
will bring success. Many coaches have lost men
for full seasons by such a route; for the coach
must deal with the men during their years of
late adolescence and early manhood. . These are
petulant and stormy years for many boys wh
get lost in a labyrinth of romances. .
GETTING CLOSE To YoUR TEAM
Be at Gymnasium Early—Always aim to be
at the gymnasium an hour before the game
starts, milling in and around the dressing
rooms and on the floor while the men are work-
ing out, with a word of encouragement and
friendly criticism here and there, such as, “Nice
going, boy,” “That's the battle,” “Not so hard,”
“Raise your shot,” “Follow in.” Or, if a player
is caught speaking to somebody in the crowd
during the work-out period, “Keep your mind
on the game,” “Forget the bleachers,” etc.
Instill Confidence and Concentration—This
twenty-minute work-out period should be spent
quietly instilling concentration and confidence
*
\
426 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
into your team. A coach should never arrive
at the gymnasium late, as the players learn
to rely upon his presence. When they go on
the floor to practice before the coach arrives
they miss a vital something that belongs to
them. This feeling of loss causes distraction
and lack of poise and often imperils a game.
During this pre-game period the team wants to
feel your presence, and to know that you are
back of them, heart and soul.
IN THE DRESSING ROOMs—JUST BEFORE THE
BATTLES
Big Squads—I believe in big squads of regular
players—twenty-five or thirty men. First, on
account of the morale. A large squad touches
more lives and creates keener interest. It also
gives the men who may later make the team
valuable experience. It is spirit that pulls teams
to victories, and large squads produce it. Large
squads, like large families, grow to be more
unselfish. Constant sacrifice of self is the big
program in the building of teams; and, in order
that a player may continue as a member of this
team-family, he must be first, last and always
for the whole thing rather than for the part.
In the Assembly Room—In the room where
we assemble for our last-minute talks, we have
a bench that seats five or six men—the men who
will start the game. When the men come in
from their twenty-minute work-Out, silence
INSPIRATIONAL COACHING 427
reigns. We have an unwritten rule that no one
who enters this room during this period shall
speak, with the exception of the coach. During
these brief moments before the game, the coach
should reassure his men of the high points in
the immediate opponents' style of attack—which
have all been charted and analyzed the day be-
fore. Once assembled, ordinarily, my first act
is to call the names of the men who are to sit
on the bench. If in a quandary over the choice
of one of the men, a minute may elapse while I,
treading back and forth, study the countenances
of the men in front of me before the final mem-
ber of the team is chosen. There may be two
men who are so nearly on an equal in playing
ability that I watch for a chance to catch one
of them off-guard to see what is in his face.
Sometimes, after my mind is made up to play
a certain fellow, I find, in one of his unguarded
moments, that his face lacks the fighting spirit
that we need, and I switch to another man
whose face shows it.
In these assembly rooms, before tense games,
a coach faces earnest men. He must speak to
them as the occasion demands. In easy games,
easy methods suffice; but in moments before
great games, a coach must be an inspired being.
He must rise to meet the occasion and give to
the men in these fifteen minutes enough of the
superhuman to carry them through twenty
minutes of grinding toil.
428 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Assembly Room Talks Cannot Be Standard-
ised—For the benefit of coaches who are new
in the game and who find it hard to express
themselves, I am giving a sample of the context
of an appropriate talk, to be varied as the
occasion demands. A coach must feel the spirit
of his players, just as a successful artist must
feel the colors that come from his brushes.
Therefore, no talk can be standardized.
Conteat of an Appropriate Talk—“You five
men on the bench represent, at present, the best
five in the university. You are the chosen ones
of your state tonight to start this contest. As
long as you're in there battling all the time,
you stay. You’ve got to play forty minutes and
not thirty-nine. We are now concerned in the
first twenty minutes of this fight. One man
alone cannot display his best and win, but five
men can! You’ve got to run the hearts out of
your opponents first, and then beat 'em.
“You will not remember these plays so
vividly tomorrow as you will twenty years from
now. When, by your own firesides, you will
play them all over again. Tonight you are
setting a mark for other teams to shoot at.
You are building athletic tradition. Hard
fight, but clean fight! And fight all the way!
Let's go!” -
Then, with a forceful handshake and a vigor-
ous slap on the back, interspersed by personal
INSPIRATIONAL COACHING 429
admonitions to each of the regulars, they are
off. These personal admonitions to the regulars
should be of this order:
“Bill, not a man has ever seen you quit a
minute in any game in which you have played.
May the rest of the gang go like you.”
“Mac, you are in the game just as long as
you go. At the least let up, out you come. You
can play if you will. This is your chance.”
“Jack, I can always count on you in an
emergency. We’ll need your leadership tonight.
Let's go, boy, you’re the stuff.” * ,
Inspirational Bits—Occasionally through the
years I have picked up inspirational bits, here
and there, that have been useful in these minutes
before great games. It is well for a coach in his
reading to be on the lookout for this type of
thing and to clip it for future needs. Youth re-
sponds readily to this type of inspiration. -
One such that I clipped long ago follows.
To my surprise, I have had players quote these
lines to me years afterward—players in whose
minds I had never dreamed that the simple lines
had lived. Such bits of inspiration give just a
little of that indefinable power in some needed
spot. They give a fighting courage.
“If you think you're beaten, you are.
If you think you dare not, you don’t.
If you’d like to win, but think you can’t,
It’s almost a cinch you won’t.
430 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
“If you think you'll lose, you've lost;
For out in the world you’ll find
Success begins with a fellow's will.
It's all in the state of mind.”
In ordinary games, do not key men high.
Never let your inspirational force go stale. Let
the occasion be your guide. But in a crucial
game, send a man on the floor with his soul on
fire. Study the souls of your players, as well as
their heads and hands. The grip that the coach
gets on the hearts of his players carries them to
sensational victories. And in these sensational
victories, the spectators get the thrills they love.
Men Outside of Themselves—In crises men
play outside of themselves. Oblivious of self or
of crowds. Freed from the bondage of entity.
LOosed souls—afire, forgetting all but the sting
of probable defeat. It is men like these—inspired
men, if you please—that lead athletic squads to
victory, just as truly as it was an inspired Joan
d'Arc that led a people on the fields of France.
STORY OF ONE GREAT GAME
I hold close in my fondest memories of these
seventeen years behind, the memory of one game
that I would not trade for a rich man’s gold. As a
lightship on a raging sea guides a storm-tossed
sailor, so has this memory guided me and will
guide me many times, when disaster threatens. It
has strengthened my faith in compensations and
INSPIRATIONAL COACHING 431
my faith in men. It is not the winning of the game
that I cherish, but the memory of the spirit of
the men who played the game. As an inspira-
tion to other coaches, with permission of my
splendid captain of 1923, I am giving this story
in detail. .
Missouri-Kansas Game, January 16, 1923—In
1923, Kansas had her first ever-victorious season
in basket-ball—in fact, the first ever-victorious
for any basket-ball team in the history of the
Missouri Valley Conference. The facts of this
story occurred in mid-January after we had
played five games of the ever-victorious season.
We had returned on the Sunday before this
game, from our northern trip through Iowa
where we had played three hard games in as
many days, with Grinnell, Ames, and Drake,
respectively. Every regular came home crippled
Black, right guard, and Wulf, center, had
Charley-horses; Bowman, left forward, had an
injured back; Ackerman, right forward, had a
twisted knee; and Endacott, left guard and
great captain of that year, had two badly
sprained wrists—all results of this northern trip.
On the following Tuesday, two days later, we
were to meet Missouri, our stiffest competition
in the year's race. The year previous to this,
we were tied Valley champions with Missouri,
with 15 won and 1 lost, the defeat of each being
at the hands of the other. -
432 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
We spent the few hours at home, trying to
patch up injuries as best we could in a short
time, and left Lawrence via Kansas City on
Monday afternoon. We were traveling by way
of Sedalia, Missouri, where we were to stay all
night. We had planned to arrive in Columbia
the day of the game. From Kansas City, we
sent a wire to Pleasant Hill, Missouri, for a
seven-o'clock dinner for eleven men. This was
to have been served to us on the train. The
arrangements for the dinner had been made pre-
viously with the Missouri Pacific traveling pas-
senger agent, as there was a stop of only five
minutes at this junction point. According to
our previous arrangement, we were to eat our
dinners enroute and to send the service plates
back from Sedalia. But, like other well-laid
schemes, the order was “balled up,” and the
caterer, utterly ignorant of the training diet for
an athlete, prepared fifty-five dry sandwiches
and Served them to us in two large market
baskets. It was impossible on this local train
for the team to have other diet until we arrived
in Sedalia at nine-forty-five p. m.
We left Sedalia at six the next morning in
order to make connections at McBain for
Columbia. This plan should have given us a
chance for a good rest in Columbia before time
for the game. - -
When we left Sedalia we were, according to
train schedule, just two hours and forty-five
INSPIRATIONAL COACHING 433
minutes from Columbia. We had planned to eat
our breakfast there, but at McBain, nine miles
from Columbia, we found that the “plug” train
that carried passengers from McBain to Colum-
bia had broken down. Every fifteen minutes for
an hour, the station agent reported that the train
was coming. At the end of the hour, we tele-
phoned to Columbia for busses and sought break-
fast at McBain. McBain, aside from the station
and a typical Missouri negro eating shack, does
not exist. True to the traditions of the South,
these negroes who ran the eating shack served
only their own color. But on this morning, they
were asked to serve eleven hungry white men
who had eaten only dry sandwiches for dinner
the evening before. So the colored population
moved out of the shack and our basket-ball team
moved in. We sat on soap boxes for chairs and
ate from dry goods boxes for tables. The menu
was “Ole Missouri sow-belly and eggs,” some
half-cooked oatmeal with milk—all, washed down
with bitter coffee. º
At ten-thirty a. m., just as we had finished
eating, a picnic truck arrived—a moving van
with seats in it and with canvas curtains on the
sides to keep out the January blasts. We boarded
the van and started for Columbia. Three miles
On our way out, in the Boone County hills, the
truck broke down. The squad, half-chilled from
the long wait in the wintry weather, started to
434 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
“hoof it” six miles into Columbia. We left our
grips in the truck and took up the hike, sing
ing our Alma Mater song, “The Crimson and
the Blue,” and followed it with “I’m a Jay-Jay-
Jay-Hawk.” It was imperative that we keep
up the team morale; for the big battle was to
be staged in less than eight hours.
Three miles down the road, the truck overtook
us. We “piled” in again and pulled up at Roth-
well Gymnasium, in Columbia, at twelve-thirty
p. m. The roads were dry and dusty, and the
loose canvas curtains, aided by the lack of
fenders, slapped the dust into the boys' faces
and clothing, so that when they alighted they
looked more like a bunch of miners than they
did like a team of college players. -
We washed at the gymnasium, but did not
change our clothing. We put on our basket-
ball shoes, and shot a few goals to accustom
ourselves to the strange court. We wanted the
boys to see the battleground minus the crowd.
We worked twenty minutes.
It was Tuesday p. m., and the boys had not
sat down to a real meal since Monday noon in
Lawrence, Kansas. These unavoidable circum-
stances had caused us to upset every theory of
training that we had thought we possessed. But
now, six hours before the game, we were settled
in a good hotel with a good meal.
INSPIRATIONAL COACHING 435
It might be interesting here to give this menu:
One-half head lettuce, French dressing
Porterhouse steak, one and one-half inches
thick
Baked potato—Dry toast—Butter
Sliced peaches
Cocoa.
The idea of giving a man a meal like this
after one o'clock in the afternoon on the day of
a crucial game, which was to be called at seven,
sounds irrational indeed. But the men were
half-starved, and they needed the meal to
strengthen their morale.
After a short walk to “limber up,” they went
to bed at two. Up at four, they dressed for a
two-mile hike—this to overcome grogginess.
Weak tea, toast, and sliced peaches at five.
Then, to a private room for a thirty-minute dis-
cussion of Missouri’s style, and afterward, on to
the gymnasium for the battle. -
True to Missouri-versus-Kansas traditions,
the bleachers were packed to the guards with
howling, seething Missouri rooters, eager to de-
feat Kansas. The game was on. And the root-
ers unaware of the Kansans' vicissitudes of the
past twenty-four hours, and therefore unaware
of the Kansans' true physical condition, were not
overconfident. - -
With but one field goal apiece at the end of
the half, the score stood 6-6. The air was
436 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
charged, and the teams fought neck and neck
for a break which did not come.
The half was over. In the Kansas dressing
room, five substitutes worked feverishly over five
panting men. It was serious business. Not a
word was spoken. A bigger battle loomed ahead.
For four minutes, the regulars rested, relaxed,
eyes closed and cold packs on their heads. Sud-
denly the referee called out, “Three minutes.”
Everybody up; towels thrown aside. With final
instructions on offense and defense, men flung
themselves together for the last appeal. Sensi-
tive ears all over the state of Kansas were wait-
ing for news of victory. We were in the hands
of the enemy, half through and scores even, and
even scores did not win games. More power
was needed. - --, 'v.
Down the stairs came the sounds of that
familiar battle cry, “Eat that Rock-Chalk Jay-
Hawk up! Eat that Rock-Chalk Jay-Hawk up!
Yea, Missouri!” This was the cement that
bound. In the minds of these boys, the game
took on a new meaning. Before, it meant two
universities; now, it meant two states. The
Kansans went on the court again with jaws set
and souls on fire. - -
In the last half, the first ten minutes failed
to break the tie. Then a Missourian rang up a
beauty. Missouri followed this break with an-
Other. Then Kansas came through with a pair.
INSPIRATIONAL COACHING 437
Missouri called for time out. The score was 10.
all.
When the game was on again with eight
minutes to go, Missouri, in quick succession,
chalked up three field counters. Kansas called
for time out, and Missouri rooters went wild.
Continuous cries of “Kansas has broken” filled
the hall. A six-point lead in a game like this,
with but five minutes to go, looked like a cer-
tain victory. -
The Kansans, huddled together in the middle
of the floor, determined and desperate, planned
their next driving attack. *
The referee blew his whistle, and again the
game was on. Using a Smashing guard attack,
Captain Endacott crashed through from tip-off
and dribbled his way to the basket for a field
goal. In the next play, Black, the other Kansas
guard, smashed his way through on the same
identical play, on the other side of the court, and
chalked up another counter.
On the very next play, Endacott on a dribble
from tip-off repeated his stellar performance of
a moment before and bludgeoned his way to an-
other goal. The score was tied again—16 all.
In three and one-half minutes the game would
be history. . .
At this moment, Missouri, confused and be-
wildered, failed to call for time out. Another
quick goal by Kansas brought the Missourians
to their senses. They now called for time out.
438 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
Kansas appeared invincible. Missouri rooters
pled and prayed. The Missouri Tigers swore
they would not lose. Desperation everywhere!
Exhilirating hell!
The whistle blew, and the game was on again.
Missouri, overanxious, committed a foul; Kan-
sas made it good. The score stood 19–16, Kan-
sas. Kansas scored again. It looked hopeless
for Missouri now, when a goal by the Tigers
brought hope anew. The score was 21-18.
Kansas fouled; Missouri converted it into one
point. Neither team missed a single free toss.
Score 21-19, Kansas. Less than two minutes
remained to play.
Bowman called Captain Endacott's signal for
a smash through center. True to form, Enda-
cott took the tip from center, high in the air.
Before he could alight, the Tigers, divining the
play, drove to a clench. It was a held ball.
Referee Quigley threw the ball again into the
air. Feeling that the time to play was short,
Endacott “bulldogged” the ball for the rest of
the game, refusing to let it get out of his grasp.
Sixteen times, the ball was thrown up; and
sixteen times Endacott, after the tip-off, pounced
upon it like a leopard on its prey. He leaped
for it; he dived for it; he lunged and plunged,
with no thought of his own physical being. The
ball was the thing. He was conscious, only, of
the two points that would tie the game.
INSPIRATIONAL COACHING 439
A greater exhibition of man's doggedness was
never witnessed before nor since. The timer’s
gun cracked, with Endacott and a Tiger still
“bulldogging” the ball. The game was over.
Not a substitution for Kansas. Kansas won.
But in the dressing room came the scene that
a coach does not forget. I want to remember
team spirit as I saw it there. The other play-
ers helped Endacott to the basement dressing
room, where I, after penetrating an almost im-
penetrable crowd, saw him. He was sitting on
a bench in a crouched position, his head rest-
ing in his hands and his elbows on his knees.
I walked up to him and slapped him on the
back and said, “Wonderful work, Endy!” The
other players halted me with, “Don’t do that;
he can’t get his breath.”
I discovered upon examination that the inter-
costal muscles, due to overexertion, had cramped.
He had played himself out. It was then that I
fully realized what he had given. We worked
on him twenty minutes before we could get
him comfortable.
This picture of these men who had given their
all, bent over their team mate who had given
part of his superhuman self, lasts. e
It was a hard earned victory and called fo
no outward hilarity. The immediate cost had
been too great. Such victories strengthen one's
faith in the old slogan, “A team that won't be
440 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
beat, can’t be beat.” The team that won this
game did not need coddling. Real teams do not.
Not many teams will be forced to go twenty-
four hours without sitting down to a real meal,
and not many teams will be required to play four
such games in five playing nights; but, if the
exigencies of a season should necessitate such
sacrifices, you will be given an opportunity to
see a true test of the steel that is in your team
machine.
It is a coach’s delight to travel with a team
composed of good sportsmen who will cheerfully
accept the fortunes of travel, and who will, re-
gardless of all vicissitudes, conjure up no ex-
cuses as alibis for lost games.
OBLIGATIONS
Abstinence an Asset to an Athletic Life—AS
a player and as a coach, I have never used
tobacco nor liquor in any form. I make this
statement, not as a braggart, because the after-
dinner cigar has, throughout these years, con-
stantly tempted me. As a lad in my early teens,
I used tobacco; but when an athletic life lured,
an appeal stronger than the desire to smoke, was
the desire for a strong body. -
During my years as a player, I could not af-
ford to break training on my own account. I
wanted to give to the game the best physical
machine that I could build; for I wanted endur-
INSPIRATIONAL COACHING 441
ance, speed, agility, and all the things that help
to make a good player. w -
Personal Habits are Watched—During my
years as a coach, I have felt that I could not af-
ford to break over, because I saw in my first
years of coaching life that my personal habits
were constantly being watched and copied by my
players; and I could not afford to fail.
A coach should not only direct; he should lead.
Where he leads, his men will follow. This has
been the big urge in my life to hold me fast to
training rules. A coach has a right to expect
total abstinence during the training season and
has all the more right, if he, himself, trains.
Consequently, if he can refrain from the uses
of tobacco, he is fortunate, indeed. I have only
on the rarest occasions had infractions of train-
ing rules.
Never Curse a Player—Never curse a player,
although in desperation, you may be forced to
employ strong satire. No gentleman can be
cursed without nursing in his heart a prejudice.
Never appeal to men's prejudices. Always ap-
peal to their loves.
On Some occasions, however, most coaches are
compelled to resort to anger and disgust, but
only when no other appeal will bring the team
out of a lethargy. Such inertia invariably comes
when the team goes into the game overconfident.
It cannot get going: sluggish passing; careless
442 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
shooting; dull team work; no fight—playing like
a bunch of old women at a game of tiddledy-
winks. At such times, stinging sarcasm, must
be employed to stir the men to action. If you
will consistently study the temperament of your
team, you will soon feel the times when the team
needs to be aroused by ironical gibes. How-
ever, let me say that such occasions are rare.
Twice only, in my experience as a coach, have
I found this method in its extremity, expedient.
COMPENSATIONS
Never lose sight of your opportunity to direct
by personal example, not only the habits of your
men, but their reflected habits in a vast coterie
of boy-worshipers. Always strive to be worthy
of the trust imposed upon you. In the mind of
the boy, if a coach does a thing, it is all right,
and if a star player does the same thing, it is
better still.
Let no night be too dark; no task too for-
bidding; and no hour too late; for you who are
out to make good, to go to your men if they
need you. Willing and whole-hearted service
will bring to you some of the best in compensa-
tions. º
“Give to the world the best you’ve got, and
the best will come back to you.”
This is the truest message I can leave with
you who are young in the game as coaches, or as
players who may enter the coaching field.
INSPIRATIONAL COACHING 443
Give Your All—No matter how your season
goes, give your all—your best. Keep a stiff
upper lip when discouragement palls, “and the
best will come back to you.”
Your Profession and Its Promise—Your pro-
fession holds little of gold or fame. True, if
you win, you are a prince; if you lose, a pauper;
but, at best, an “in and outer,” who with aver-
age success has a means of making an honest
living.
Finding Your Way—But a coach to the man-
ner born should find no discouragement in this.
Steady, persistent, willing service while finding
your way will bring you at last to an enlarged
horizon where the reach of your vision will be
from the hilltop instead of toward it.
Your Vision Must Abide—Your vision In 11St
abide in rough going, else you cannot be to your
players an inspiration. You must, time and time
again, meet the knocker and hand him a knock-
out wallop. Be always “up and at 'em” with
the vision more in command. Your vision
should be a sacrifice of love for your profession
and for the opportunities that it offers in deal-
ing with young men.
If Your Team Is Beaten—If your team is
beaten some times, as all teams are, and you
know that they have given their all; be kinder to
them than usual. See that they have a splendid
meal in a pleasant place. In every way show
444 MY BASKET-BALL BIBLE
them that you are satisfied. It is not only their
victory that you want; it is their respect and
their best. Next time, you will get it.
The Satisfaction of a Handclasp Down the
Years—The satisfaction of a handclasp of a
friend, here and there down the years, when
season after season is finished, is compensation
enough. To have a man who has made good
tell you (years after you thought that fle had
forgotten) that he would have quit many a time
on an uphill grade if there had not flashed
through his mind some of the never-quit athletic
“pep” talks of other years, brings more com-
fort than does gold. To have been able to aid
a man in forcing his will to obey, makes the
game worth while.
Gold Does Not Measure the Best in Life—
Education teaches us not to measure the best
things of life by the standard of gold. The true
coach must throw into his work an eager sacri-
fice for which no school can pay in cash.
At each commencement time, you will watch
your players—the men you have learned to love
—go out by graduation. Never get calloused nor
indifferent toward the passing of these men who
stand at this time, “happy because life's myster-
ious adventure is before them, sad because they
are leaving something beautiful behind.” For
they are your concrete results. Out of these as-
sociations will grow deep and tender affections,
INSPIRATIONAL COACHING 445
InOt unlike the love of sons for a father who has
been wise and kind.
In the After While—After the fretfulness of
these zestful years of desire to win and dread to
lose have passed away, your experiences as a
coach will mellow and will strengthen your phil-
osophy; and you, a veteran in the game, will de-
sire to drift into serene maturity with the fruits
of these deep affections that you have fostered
along the way, as your truest satisfaction. These
will be your compensations. The rest, the
games you have played—the games you have
lost, and the games you have won—will be as a
dream. • -
- ºr * *" - ---- :-ºrg--- ... - ...— . “g -
& r - - -
*. - - A. -
t - - - -
# *
f - º
1, • ‘
l -
t t -ºr
- * *
- *
g -
- w - & -
* g
& - - -
* & & ** -
&
- tº, ... --
3.
- * -
º
r - *
- *
º
* -
e
- - t
º
- 4 -
- § -
wº -
º
§ .
.*
ſ
e
g -
*
*
-- º








* - * * · · ·，≤）. --—~~~~：::：:：:：：：--：-， - ~~~~ ·




----• ſ’' *■）;****№.º ~*~*=~~~~ ~~~~ ~~ ·
\
}
{


ſ
i.º|
º:
;
III
3
:.:
:º
.
- - - --~~~~~~-----. --
-
:
sº|
0R
MUTILATE [ ARD

™* （№º！!！！！！！！！！！!！！！
ſaegae